Mechanismsmechan 00 Jonerich

AND
MECHANICAL MOVEMENTS
MECHANISMS
AND
MECHANISMS
AND
A TREATISE ON DIFFERENT TYPES
OF MECHANISMS AND VARIOUS METHODS OF TRANSMITTING, CONTROLLING AND MODIFYING MOTION, TO SECURE CHANGES OF VELOCITY, DIRECTION, AND DURATION OR TIME
OF ACTION
BY
FRANKLIN
ASSOCIATE EDITOR OF
D.
JONES
MACHINERY
AUTHOR OF
"
"
" TURNING AND BORING," PLANING AND MILLING,' GAGING TOOLS AND METHODS," ETC.
FIRST EDITION
NEW YORK
THE INDUSTRIAL
LONDON
:
PRESS
CO., LTD.
THE MACHINERY PUBLISHING

1919
COPYRIGHT, 1918,
BY
THE INDUSTRIAL PRESS NEW YORK
COMPOSITION AND ELECTROTYPING BY
F. H.
GILSON COMPANY, BOSTON,
U. S. A.
PREFACE
THIS
treatise
on mechanisms and mechanical movements
is
intended for designers of machinery and for all interested in originating new mechanical devices or in deyeloping and perIn view of the fact that there is an fecting those now in use.
almost endless variety of mechanisms, it might seem impracticable to deal with such a broad subject in a single volume
of this size.
As
the classes of mechanisms, however, which
differ radically in principle, are few in comparison with those which simply vary in form, it was considered not only practi-
cable, but very desirable, to present in one volume a variety of mechanical devices representing different types of mechanisms and selected especially to illustrate important fundamental
principles.
designers of machines or mechanisms in general are constantly engaged in the solution of problems pertaining to
The
motion and
its
transmission.
The motion
derived from some
source of power must be modified to produce certain effects, and various changes in regard to velocity, direction, and time
of action
may
and
be necessary.
effectiveness,
Frequently, the same result
may
be obtained by forms of mechanisms which

principle
differ entirely in
and
it
is
essential to
employ an
approved method.
explain
The purpose
of this treatise is not only to
various mechanical motions may be produced and but to show the relation between the theoretical controlled,
how
The examples include many mechanical combinations and are practical designs ingenious which not only illustrate the principles involved, but indicate
and
practical sides of the subject.
exactly how those principles are applied. An understanding of these concrete examples will prove much more beneficial
than a study of abstract theories, which only give an inadequate

V
416067
VI
PREFACE
conception of their application in the design of mechanisms of various types.
Many
technical
of
proportioning
graduates and draftsmen understand the parts to safely withstand certain stresses
of different combinations
more thoroughly than they do the use
of parts either for transmitting, reversing, or otherwise modifying motion to secure whatever action or effect may be required.
Frequently, the stress involved or the strength of the parts is of little importance, and the principal problem is one pertaining to motion, especially in the development of new forms of mechanisms. While a general knowledge of mechanisms
their possibilities could be obtained by studying miscellaneous designs, this would involve considerable duplication of effort, because so many mechanical devices which vary as
and
to form and purpose are identical in principle. The different forms of mechanisms described in this volume represent many distinct types, and they have been classified and arranged so
that various modifications of the same general type
may
readily
be compared. The columns of
MACHINERY were
of valuable assistance in
supplying information and illustrations regarding various types of mechanisms, especially of the classes common to the machinebuilding and machine-tool fields. Special mention should be made of the excellent examples of mechanisms obtained from
the contributions of G.
W. Armstrong and
movements
is
G.
M. Meyncke.
importance
The study
of mechanical
of especial
at the present time, owing to the increasing use of automatic machines in almost every branch of manufacture, and this treatise is
to
published in the belief that it will be of practical value many designers, draftsmen, mechanical engineers, and in-
ventors engaged in originating and planning
new developments.
THE AUTHOR.
NEW
YORK, January,
1918.
CONTENTS
CHAPTER
I
MOTIONS AND GENERAL METHODS OF TRANSMISSION IN MACHINES

PAGES
Velocity and Acceleration Velocity Ratio Link Mechanisms Universal Angular Velocity Joint Straight-line Motions Toggle Joint Pantograph Mechanisms Transmission by Frictional and Toothed GearClasses of
ing
Motion
Trains of Mechanism
Transmission by Flexible Bands, Ropes, and Chains Analyzing Action of Epicyclic Gearing.
1-38
CHAPTER
II
SPEED-CHANGING AND CONTROLLING MECHANISMS

ArTypes of Mechanical Speed-changing Mechanisms Combination of Conerangement of Cone-pulley Drives Geared Speed-changing Mechanisms pulley and Gearing
Frictional Speed-changing Devices Multiple-disk Type of Friction Disk and Epicyclic Speed-changing Mechanism Gear Combination Governors of Centrifugal and Inertia
Types
39-59
CHAPTER
III
CONVERSION OF ROTARY AND RECTILINEAR MOTIONS

Crank and Connecting-rod
pin and Cross-head Cross-head or Scotch
Relative Motions of Crankthe Crank and Slotted the Eccentric
Yoke
a Stationary Crank
centric
Cylinders which Revolve about Cylinders which Revolve within an Ec-
Track
Rack and Gear Combination
Methods
of
Vlll
CONTENTS
PAGES
Doubling Stroke Single- and Double-stroke Toggle Mechanisms Press-bed Motions for Flat or Cylinder Presses the
Napier Motion
ing
Reciprocating Motion from Epicyclic Gear-
60-96
CHAPTER IV
REVERSING MECHANISMS
Gear Type
Intermediate Spur Gears for Reversing Motion Bevel of Reversing Mechanism Reversal of Motion
with Friction Disks
Operation of Reversing Clutches
Controlling Point of Reversal by Special or Auxiliary Mechanism Planer Reversing Mechanism Reversal of Motion
Automatic Ratchet Reversing through Epicyclic Gearing Mechanism Automatic Control of Spindle Reversal Automatic Variation in Point of Reversal Reversal of
Motion
after
Predetermined
Number
CHAPTER
of Revolutions
97-123
QUICK-RETURN MOTIONS
Quick-return Motion from Crank and Oscillating Link Whitworth Quick-return Motion Modification of Whitworth Motion Quick-return Motion from Elliptical Gearing Eccentric Pinion and Elliptical Gearing for Quick-return Motion 1 24-133
CHAPTER VI
INTERMITTENT MOVEMENTS
Ratchet Mechanisms for Releasing Automatic Disengagement of Ratchet Gearing Automatic Reduction of Intermittent MoveEscapements ment Gearing for Uniform and Variable Intermittent Motion High-speed Intermittent Gearing of Moving Picture
Gearing
Sprockets
the Geneva Type of Intermittent Gearing InProjector termittent Gears for Shafts at Right Angles Adjustable Intermittent Motion Automatic Variation of Intermittent
Ratchet
Motion
Automatic Indexing Adding Mechanism
Mechanism
Action of an
134-183
CONTENTS
CHAPTER VII
ix
IRREGULAR MOTIONS
PAGES
Motion Cams Return Cam for Follower to Secure Positive Motion Yoke Type of Cam Follower Inverse Cams Wiper and Involute Cams Automatic Variation of Cam Cylinder or Barrel Cam Motion Automatic VariaVarying Dwell of Cam Follower tion of Cam Rise and Drop Sectional Interchangeable Cams for Varying Motion Mechanism for Engaging Cams in a Group Successively Obtaining Resultant Motion of Several
Plate
Positive
Cams
Cams
Double-shifting
Cam
CHAPTER VIII
184-201
DIFFERENTIAL MOTIONS
Differential Screw Chinese Windlass Differential Motions from Epicyclic Gearing Compound Differential Gears for Varying Speeds Differential Motion between ReDifferential Feeding Mechanism for volving Screw and Nut
Revolving Spindle
for Controlling Mechanisms Substitute for Floating Lever
Application of Floating Lever Principle Steam Steering Gears

Differential Governors for
Water Turbines
Differential
Gearing
of
Automobiles
Differential Speed Regulation through Differential Gearing Differential MechAction through a Cam-controlled Gear anism of a Gear-cutting Machine Differential Hoisting
Mechanism
Differential
Speed Indicator
202-229
CHAPTER IX
CLUTCHES AND TRIPPING MECHANISMS

Positive and Controlling Motion by Means of Clutches Friction Clutches RapidMultiple-disk Friction Clutches
Magnetic acting Multiple-disk Clutch equipped with Brake Clutches that Automatically Disand Induction Clutches Automatic Tripping Mechanisms for Stopping a engage Breakable Pins to Prevent Machine or some Moving Part Overload Automatic Clutch Control to Prevent Overload
CONTENTS
PAGES
Pressure of Frictional Gearing varied according to
Load
AutoTripping
Automatic Relief Mechanisms

matic
Devices
Speed-limiting
for Forging
Machines
Devices
Electromagnetic
230-280
CHAPTER
AUTOMATIC FEEDING MECHANISM?

Automatic Feeding Attachments having Inclined Chutes Attachment for Automatically Feeding Pinion Staffs Magazine Attachment for Narrow Bushings Revolving Magazine Attachment Hopper Feeding Mechanism for Screw Blanks
Simple Arrangement for Feeding Shells with Closed Ends Foremost Feeding Bullets with Pointed Ends Foremost Feeding Shells Successively and in any Position Feeding Shells Successively and Gaging the Diameters 281-297
MECHANISMS AND MECHANICAL MOVEMENTS

CHAPTER
I
MOTIONS AND GENERAL METHODS OF TRANSMISSION IN MACHINES

MACHINES
and adapt
it
of various classes are designed to
modify energy
to useful work.
is
The energy
is
derived from some
natural source and
transmitted through the
members com-
posing the mechanical device to the place where work is to be performed. The construction of any machine or mechanism
a combination of parts which will produce the necessary motion, and, second, the formation and proportioning of these parts so that the required amount of energy may be
involves,
first,
transmitted.
distinct
branches of work.
In the design of any machine, then, there are two One branch pertains to motion
and the other to the magnitude of the forces involved and the mechanical means for transmitting them without breakage or excessive distortion of the different machine members. Evidently, the
means
it
for obtaining the right kind of
motion and of
to suit specific purposes may be studied without modifying the forces which are to act upon the machine parts considering or the proportioning of these parts with reference to stresses,
etc. This volume deals principally with various well-known mechanical movements and contains illustrated descriptions of
mechanisms which have been applied

of machinery.
to
many
different types
Classes of Motion.
When motion
it is
is
of a
machine part does
not vary in direction,

tion of
said to be continuous;
reciprocating,
when
the direc-
motion
reverses, it
periods of rest,
it is intermittent.
and when there are in motion may be free body
MECHAtflCAt MOVEMENTS
or constrained.
may move
upon
it,
The motion is said to be free when the body any direction in accordance with the forces acting whereas the term constrained motion means that the
in
direction of
movement
is
confined to a restricted path.
The
planets in their flight through space are examples of free motion,
the path or orbit of a planet being determined

of all the forces acting
upon
it.
by the The moving parts
resultant
of every
machine represent examples of constrained motion. For instance, the cross-head of an engine is constrained and caused to
move in a straight path by a guide or guides.

to thrusts which
Owing
to the angu-
lar positions of the connecting-rod, the cross-head is subjected
would cause
it
to
move
laterally
were
it
not for
the straight guiding surfaces that are strong enough to resist the opposing force. A shaft which revolves in fixed bearings is
another simple example of constrained motion.

teristic feature of
The
charac-
constrained motion
is
that
all
points in a
body
having such motion follow definite paths when the action of any In ordinary machine construction, the force produces motion.
forces tending to
move a
constrained part from the desired path
are not absolutely counteracted, because the fixed members are deformed somewhat under stress; the degree of such deflection
may
readily be reduced to practicable limits, as it depends upon the dimensions, form, and physical characteristics of the parts
stresses.
which oppose the Plane Motion.
Practically all of the movable parts of machines have either a plane motion, a helical motion, or a spherical motion. body has a plane motion when all points in that
body move
parts have plane motion.
Nearly all movable machine For instance, any point in the rim of a flywheel, as at a (diagram A, Fig. i), moves in a plane xx perpendicular to the axis of rotation, and any other point, as at A part which moves 6, moves in a plane yy parallel to xx.
in parallel planes.
along a straight path also has plane motion. The piston, piston-rod, or cross-head of a steam engine are simple examples. Referring to diagram B, Fig. i, it will be seen that all points,
as at c and d,
move
in parallel straight lines.
Plane motion
may
be either rotation, translation, or a combination of these
TRANSMISSION OF MOTION
movements. When all points of a body move in concentric circles about a fixed axis or at constant distances from a line
perpendicular to the planes in which the various points move, the body has a plane motion of rotation, as illustrated by diagram A,
Fig.
i.
a plane motion of rotation; the motion

or intermittent.
Revolving pulleys, shafts, gears, cranks, etc., all have may be either continuous
When all points move with equal velocities along parallel paths, the motion is known as rectilinear transThe piston or cross-head of an engine, the carriage of lation.
a lathe, and the table of a planer are all examples of this motion. The side rod of a locomotive represents an example of cur-
Fig. i.
Diagrams
illustrating Different
Kinds
of
Motion
vilinear translation, as various points in the
body
of the rod
follow curved paths which lie in parallel planes. The word " translation," when used alone, is generally understood to mean In plane motion, the motion of any rectilinear translation.
two points of a body determine the motion of the entire body. For instance, if the motions of any two points of a connectingrod are known for any period, the motion of the entire rod for
the period is also known. When Helical Motion.
of rotation
all
points in a
about a fixed
axis,
body have a motion combined with a translation
known
as
helical motion." The movement of a nut along a screw is a common example of helical motion. As a nut is screwed onto a bolt, any point, as at e (see diagram C, Fig. i), moves around the axis zz and at the
parallel to the axis, this is
"
same time advances, thus following a helical path, as indicated by the arrows. The relation between the rotation about axis zz and the translation parallel to this axis is constant in nearly all applications of helical motion to machines; the lead / or pitch of the helix, which corresponds to the translation for one complete rotation, is constant in a regular helical
motion.
When all points in a body move in the Spherical Motion. surfaces of imaginary spheres and at constant distances from a " fixed point or common center, the motion is There spherical."
are comparatively few examples of spherical motion in machine " " construction. The steam engine governor, illusfly-ball
trated
by diagram D,
Fig.
i, is
an example of spherical motion.
Variations in the speed of the engine cause the balls to swing about the fixed point or center / as they revolve, so that the
movements
socket joint
Velocity
coincide with a spherical surface. The ball-andis another illustration of spherical motion.
and Acceleration.
Velocity
is
the rate at which

it
a moving part changes

of
its position,
and numerically
represents
rate
the units of distance traversed in a unit of time.
Thus the
motion or the distance traversed divided by the time required may be expressed in feet per second or minute, miles per hour,
etc.
When
the distance traversed

is
a given time
by a point along its path in expressed in linear measure, the rate of motion is
is
.
referred to as linear velocity.
When
velocity
variable, the rate at

If the
which
it
changes
is
known as acceleration
speed of a wheel having a peripheral
velocity of 20 feet per second
is increased to 30 feet per second, within a period of two seconds, the acceleration will be 5 feet per second. If the change of velocity were at a uniform rate,
the acceleration would be constant, but, if the change of velocity were not uniform, the mean acceleration in the preceding example
would be
5 feet per second;
however, this does not necessarily
represent the actual rate of increase during any one second. In the design of various classes of machines, the problem may
change or acceleration, or to the ratio of the velocities of different parts. The term " velocity ratio " relates to the Velocity Ratio.
comparative velocities of driving and driven members. For instance, if two gear wheels are so proportioned that one rotates
twice as fast as the other, the velocity ratio would be either 2 or depending upon whether the gear having the higher were mentioned first. If the driving gear had a velocity speed
,
relate either to actual velocity, the rate of
of 50 revolutions per
minute and the driven gear 25 revolutions
per minute, the velocity ratio of the driving to the driven gear would equal f^ == 2. The actual velocity of these gears might
be changed, but the velocity ratio would be the same. Thus, if the speed of the driving gear were doubled, the driven gear
would
also rotate twice as fast
and the
ratio
would
still
be
or
expressed. The velocity ratio is of especial in the design of various classes of mechanisms, owing importance to the necessity of obtaining the proper relative motions between
2 to i, as
commonly
movable
is
parts.
The angular velocity of a rotating body to the angle through which any radius of the body equivalent turns in one second, and it is generally expressed in radians.
Angular Velocity.
The angular
velocity in radians is equal to the linear velocity in feet per second, divided by the radius in feet, of the point on the revolving body, the angular velocity of which is required.
If
D equals the velocity of a point on

and
feet per second,

feet,
R equals the radius of
the periphery of a the revolving
body body
For
in in
then the angular velocity in radians equals

if
in-
a flywheel 12 feet in diameter revolves at 60 revolu2 x 3.1416 x 60 i i -^ MI , tions per minute, the angular velocity will equal
stance,
"
radian is the angle subtended by an arc 6.2832 radians. in equal to the radius of the circle forming the path of the point
motion.
One radian equals

3.1410
57.296 degrees.
Cycle of Motions.
Machines and mechanisms
of practically
have moving parts which, after passing through a series of motions, all occupy the same relative positions as at the beginning of the movements. The completion of the entire
all
classes
series of
movements constitutes a cycle. The cycle of a planer or shaper corresponds to a forward and return stroke; in the case of a steam engine, one revolution of the crank represents a cycle. While gas and gasoline engines are commonly classified " " is as two-cycle and four-cycle, this use of the word cycle " " " and two-stroke cycle four-stroke erroneous. The terms " are preferable and accurate, since two strokes complete cycle a single cycle in one case and four strokes, a single cycle in the
other.
The period of a cycle is the time elapsing while the motions constituting the cycle take place. Motion is said to be transmitted positively Positive Driving.
the mechanical construction
when
of a driving drical parts
and driven member
such that the velocity ratio remains constant. If two cylinis
having parallel axes are in contact, one can only transmit motion to the other through frictional resistance at the line of contact. With this arrangement, the resistance against
which motion could be transmitted would depend upon the amount of friction, and there would be no positive assurance
that slippage between the driver and follower would not occur. were possible to produce surfaces that were perfectly smooth, a very small resistance would prevent the driver and follower
If it
from rotating in unison. If instead of smooth cylinders, however, teeth were provided, as in gearing, the drive would be positive or compulsory, because slipping could not occur unless the teeth
were broken.
positive drive has been defined as one so arranged that there is an increasing contact radius of the driver,
although this is not invariably the case. When the operation of a mechanism depends upon the action of a spring or a weight
(gravity), it is a non-positive or force-closed mechanism, and is generally considered inferior, mechanically, to the positive type,
although, in
ting motion
many
is
cases, the non-positive
entirely satisfactory
method of transmitand comparatively inex-
pensive.
The method of General Methods of Transmitting Motion. transmitting motion from one movable member of a machine or mechanism to another part or combination of parts depends upon
the motion of the driving member and the kind of motion required for the driven member, the relation of one part to the
other as to the distance and position, the amount of energy or power to be transmitted, and other factors. Ordinarily, motion
actual contact of parts forming the mechanism, although this is not invariably the case, as the transmission may be electrical and not mechanical or by physical
is
transmitted
by an
connection.
The
general methods of transmitting motion from
one part to another, which are commonly employed in different kinds of mechanisms, will first be illustrated by simple diagrams
which merely show the principles involved. These diagrams represent methods of transmitting motion from some form of
driving
member
or
"
driver
"
to a driven
member
or follower.
The practical application of these principles to various designs in actual use will be considered in chapters to follow.
Direct Transmission by Shafting.
r
plain shaft which
is
used as a connecting link between the shaft of one machine or mechanism and the shaft of another represents an efficient
method
form
of transmission,
although, in this case, the shafting
rotates as a unit, and, therefore,

of transmission to
it is not possible by this direct the velocity ratio of the driving change and driven members, as it is merely a rigid shaft and not a form of transmission which, by varying the proportions or design,
will give
follower.
a different relation between the speed of the driver and While the flexible shaft is also used extensively to
transmit motion, especially

free or universal
when
rotate as a unit,
movement, and this method
the driven part must have a the driving shaft and follower also
of transmission does not afford
means
changing the velocity ratio, as may be done with the different forms of transmission to be described.
of
Link Mechanisms.
link
is
a rigid body for connecting
parts of a mechanism, and it may be used for holding or guiding some other member or combination of parts, or for transmitting
motion.
There are many parts
of
machines which belong to
For
the general class of links but which have special names.

instance,
when a
link has
an
oscillating
movement about some
axis or fulcrum, the
whereas, if the link fied as a crank. When a link
names lever and rocker are commonly applied, makes complete revolutions, it may be classiis
used to transmit motion from a
rotating crank to a part having a reciprocating movement, it is usually called a connecting-rod or pitman. On a steam engine, the connecting-rod joins the cross-head with the crank on the
main
shaft.
The motion
of the eccentric is transmitted to the
valve by the eccentric rod, which is another example of the special names applied to links. If a slotted member is used to connect
known
link
the ends of forward- and reverse-motion eccentric rods, this is " as a link," as in the case of the well-known Stephenson
motion
for
steam engines.
Levers, as applied to different kinds of mechanisms, are commonly used to transmit motion from one line or plane to another, and for guiding movable parts, as,
Applications of Levers.
for example, the end of a rod having a reciprocating motion. Levers which have an oscillating movement about a pin or
fulcrum
may have
parallel lines of motion, or lines of
motion
which
intersect.
Diagram A,
Fig.
2,
shows a lever which trans-
mits motion from one line aa to another parallel line bb. As the lever oscillates about pin c, the pins by which the two rods are
connected to the lever have a circular motion, as indicated by the A line aa or bb, representing the general direction of the arcs.
motion,
is
called the center-line of motion.
In the case of a steam
engine of the reciprocating type, the center-line of
motion
is
a line
passing through the center of the cylinder and the center of the crankshaft. When the engine is running, the connecting-rod os-
an equal distance each side of Diagram B shows a lever having When the bb, which are not parallel.
cillates
this center-line of motion.

lines
of
motion aa and motion

intersect,
lines of
as in this case, the lever is known as a bellcrank lever. A lever for reversing the direction of motion is shown at C, the fulcrum, in this case, being between the driving and driven connecting
links;
thus,
when one rod moves

left,
to the right, the other rod
moves
to the
and
vice versa.
lever for reversing the
motion and changing its direction is shown at D. The form of lever shown at E is used for transmitting motion from one line to another that is not in the same plane. Such a lever or " rocker
used on locomotives equipped with the motion to transmit motion from the eccentric rods inside the frame to the valve rod on the outside. Diagram F illustrates one of the many ways in which levers may be ap-
arm," as
it is called, is
Stephenson link
Fig. 2.
Various Applications of Levers
plied to obtain different results.
In this case, the lever trans-
f on a reduced scale. These two are mounted in guides and move in straight parallel lines, parts and the lever has elongated slots in which the pins slide. This arrangement is shown as a reducing motion, and is sometimes applied to steam engines when taking indicator cards. The part e represents the cross-head and / a sliding bar which is
mits the motion of part
e to
10
connected by a cord to the indicator drum, the motion of which must correspond to that of the cross-head, but on a reduced scale. Levers
be arranged in other ways for reducing motion. The lever method of reducing motion, however, has been re-
may
placed quite extensively by more compact and accurate forms " of mechanisms, such as the reducing wheel." Motion is
transmitted from the cross-head to the indicator
by cords
that
wind about drums which vary

reduction of motion.
Position of
in diameter
and give the required

In the
:
Levers Relative to Lines of Motion.
design of levers, there are certain points that should
be observed
Fig. 3.
Methods
of
Applying Links
First,
a line passing through the center of the fulcrum and the center of the connecting pin should be at right angles to the
center-line of
position.
Fig.
2)
is
motion when the lever or lever arm is in its central For instance, when center-line kk (see diagram Z>, in mid-position, it should be perpendicular to the
motion aa so that the upper lever arm will move an equal distance each way from this central position. Simicenter-line of
larly, line
nn should be perpendicular
is
to bb
when
the lower lever
arm
is
in mid-position.
second point of importance

its
to so locate the connecting

side of the
pin that
center
moves an equal distance each

that
is,
center-line of motion;
the center of this pin should be
as far from the center-line of motion
II
ment
as
when
in mid-position.
when at the end of its moveThe third point to consider is
the relative lengths of the lever arms or the distance from the
fulcrum to each connecting pin. The lengths of these arms must be proportional to the extent of their motion. For instance, the horizontal distance
(see
diagram C) traversed by
:
the upper connecting pin for a given movement y depends upon the relative lengths of arms c and d\ thus x c y d, or, if c = 6
: :
:
inches,
12 inches,
and y
5 inches,
=
12
2.5 inches.
Link Connection between Oscillating or Rotating Parts. A link may be used to transmit motion from one oscillating rigid
or rotating part to another. Diagram A, Fig. 3, illustrates how two oscillating levers are connected by a link which simply
ties
both levers together.
The
are connected
by
side rods or links, as
driving wheels of a locomotive shown at B, so that the

of this kind,
wheels rotate in unison.
With a transmission
dimensions ab and cd must be equal and also ac and bd so that the four center-lines form a parallelogram. This method of
transmitting motion may also be employed for a series of rotating At C, three wheels are shown connected, and at D, parts. three wheels which are not arranged in a straight line. In the
latter case, the link is of triangular
form and
its
bearings must be
spaced to correspond with the distance between the fixed centers. When the axes of the driver and follower are not parallel, links
may
also
is
be used to transmit motion, although such an arrange-
ment
common except in universal joints. A' form of link work Universal Joint or Hooke's Coupling.
not
for transmitting motion between two shafts which are at an angle to each other is shown at A, Fig. 4. This is known as a universal joint or Hooke's coupling. The axes of each shaft
same plane and, with the design of joint shown, they have forked ends which are pivoted to some form of connecting link b. The axes of the two shafts and of the pivots intersect, As the shafts revolve, the connectas the illustration shows. link b between them receives a spherical motion, and, if the ing
are in the
driving shaft rotates at a uniform speed, a variable speed will
12
be imparted to the driven shaft, although it will make the same number of revolutions in a given time. In order to simplify
the construction, the connecting pins of many universal joints are offset as shown at B\ when the axes of the pins do not
intersect, the variation in the angular velocity of the driven
shaft
is
is
somewhat
increased.
The speed
of the driven shaft
alternately less
shaft.
and greater than the speed of the driving The variations in angular velocity between the driver
and follower can be eliminated by using a double joint, as at C, and an intermediate shaft between the two main shafts
which has the same inclination relative to each
shaft.
Uni-
Fig. 4.
Universal Joints
which operate on the same general principle as the designs illustrated in Fig. 4 are made in many different forms.
versal joints
A combination of links arranged to Straight-line Motions. impart a rectilinear motion to a rod or other part independently of guides or ways is known either as a straight-line motion or
a parallel motion, the former term being more appropriate. Mechanisms of this type were used on steam engines and pumps of early designs to guide the piston-rods, because machine tools
had not been developed
for
planing accurate
guides.
The
TRANSMISSION
principal application of
.OF
MOTION
13
straight-line
motions at the present

imparting a rectilinear
time
is
on steam engine indicators
for
movement
to the pencil or tracing point.
The
principle of the
well-known parallel motion, invented by James Watt in 1784, is illustrated by the diagram, Fig. 5. Links A and B are free
to oscillate about fixed pins at their outer ends,
and are con-
nected by link C.
line of link C,
point
D may
be located on the center-
A when A
links
which follows approximately a straight line when and B are given an oscillating movement, because, moves from its central position, the center of pin E
moves
to the left along its circular path while the center of
Fig. 5.
The Watt
Straight-line
Motion
As the motion of point D is affected by both links A and B, it moves very nearly in a straight line, provided D is correctly located and the angular motion of the
pin
F moves
to the right.
links does not exceed

line
about 20 degrees. Very few straightmechanisms produce a motion which is absolutely straight,
and the general practice is to so design them that the guided part will be on the line when at the center and extreme ends
of the stroke.
Scott Russell Straight-line
Motion.
The mechanism
illu-
is
trated in Fig. 6 will give an exact straight-line motion, but it necessary to have an accurate plane surface upon which
14
block
can
slide.
In addition to this sliding block, there are
two
of
links
AC
and DB.
The
link
DB
is
one-half the length
and the sh6rter link is connected at a point B midway A and C. The shorter link oscillates about a stationary pivot at D as end A is moved up or down along the straight line AD. Since AB, DB, and BC are equal, a circle with B
between
as the center will intersect points A, D, C for consequently, the line AD, traced by point A
to
AC
any angle
is
DC A]
perpendicular
DC,
since
ADC is always
AC
a right angle.
Instead of having guides or a plane surface for the sliding block C, the mechanism is sometimes modified by attaching
the block end of link
late
to another link
which
is
free to oscil-
about a fixed pivot so located that the link
will
be perpen-
Fig. 6.
The
Scott Russell Straight-line
Motion
dicular to the line

this link
CD, when
in its mid-position.
The
longer
and the greater the radius of the arc described by the connecting point at C, the more nearly will C move in a straight line; hence, the longer this link, the less point A deviates from
a straight
line
line.
is
This modification of the Scott Russell straight-
sometimes called the grasshopper motion. Some form of straightStraight-line Motions for Indicators. line motion is necessary on a steam engine indicator in order
that the motion of the indicator piston will produce a parallel movement of the tracer point or pencil, which draws a diagram
motion
on the paper or indicator card. The cylinder of the indicator is open at the bottom and is connected by suitable pipes with each end of the steam engine cylinder, so that the under side
of the indicator piston is subjected to
the varying pressure
acting upon the engine piston. The upward movement of the indicator piston resulting from the steam pressure is resisted
by a
spiral spring of
known
resilience,
and a rod extending
above the piston connects with some form of link work designed to give a straight-line motion to the tracer point. When the
communication with the be recorded by the steam vertical movement of the pencil or tracer which is brought into contact with paper wound about a cylindrical drum that is rotated by the reciprocating motion of the engine cross-head.
engine
is is
running and the indicator
in
cylinder, variations of pressure will
Fig. 7.
Straight-line
Motion
of
Thompson
of
Indicator
is
The
in Fig.
straight-line or parallel
7.
motion
one indicator
shown
The arm A which
carries the pencil at its outer

is
end
is
pivoted to link
which, in turn,
pivoted to the top
moves upward, the outer end is a straight line by link C, which oscillates about a guided along This mechanism fixed pivot and is connected to arm A at F.
of the indicator.
is
As arm
at which link
to so proportioned that a line from is attached to the piston.
intersects the point
motion of another steam engine indicator is shown in Fig. 8. This mechanism, like the one previously described, is so arranged that the fulcrum A of the entire mechstraight-line
The
i6
anism, the connection B, and the pencil point

in a straight line.
are always
The fundamental
principle of this
mecha-
nism
that of the pantograph. If link were removed and another link at E, both parallel and equal in length replaced by to FG, this would result in a well-known form of pantograph
is
mechanism.
The
length of link
mined as
follows:
The procedure
is
to replace may be deterto first ascertain, by trial,
a convenient location for the point at which link is to connect with link BG. The path followed by point as end C is moved
along a straight line
is
plotted on a large scale for
all
positions
Fig. 8.
The Crosby
Straight-line or Parallel
Motion
of the linkage within the required range of
path
will
be approximately the arc of some
circle,
movement. This and the fixed
is located at the center of this circle. If a pivot for link link at E were actually used in place of link D, a straight-line motion at C could be obtained, providing the pivot B had a
of guide intended to insure a would be objectionable, since it is straight desirable to reduce the friction of mechanisms of this type to a minimum. It is also essential to have the parts as light as possible in order to minimize the inertia and the effect of mostraight-line motion.
Any form
movement
at
mentum, which
is
especially troublesome
when taking cards
from engines operating at high speed.
With the parallel motion of another indicator, a pin on the pencil arm corresponding to the one shown at F in Fig. 8 engages a curved slot in a stationary plate which is secured to the indicator in a vertical position. This curved slot takes the
place of a link, and its curvature is such as to compensate for the tendency of the pencil to move in an arc.
Peaucellier
Straight-line
Motion.
The
link
mechanism
This
shown
in Fig. 9 will give
an exact
straight-line motion.
Fig. 9.
Arrangement
of Peaucellier
Linkage for Straight-line Motion
mechanism was invented by Peaucellier, a French army officer. It is composed of seven links moving about two fixed centers The four equal links E form a rhombus; of motion, A and B. the links F are equal, and the center B is midway between A and C. If the point D be moved in the direction of the arrows,
it will
is
be constrained to move in the straight path D'D", which perpendicular to the line of centers A BCD. This may be
i8
tested experimentally. The path of the point C is the circumference ACC\ and the path of GG' is the arc described with the radius F. If the center-line of the links and F be assumed
in
any position such as AC'D',
it will
be found that the rhombus
the sides of which represent the length of the links position shown in the drawing.
takes the
In Fig.
9,
the centers
and
are external to the links E.
variation of the linkage is shown in Fig. 10, in which the centers A and are within the rhombus. The links F are
equal,
and center
is
midway between A and

and points
C, as in Fig.
9.
The corresponding
links
in the figures are labeled
Fig. 10.
Modification of Peaucellier Straight-line
Mechanism
with the same

the point
D is
be shown experimentally that compelled to move in a straight line perpendicular

letters;
it
may
to the line of centers
CBAD.
link
Toggle Joint.
mechanism commonly known as a

machines of different types, such as
etc., for
toggle joint is applied to
drawing and embossing presses, stone crushers,

great pressure.
securing
The
principle of the toggle joint is
shown by
the diagrams A and B, Fig. n. There are two links, b and c, which are connected at the center. Link b is free to swivel
about a fixed pin or bearing at

sliding
d,
and
link c is connected to a
member
e.
Rod /
force
is
joins links b
and
c at
the central
connection.
When
applied to rod
in a direction at
right angles to center-line xx, along

e
moves, this force
is
which the driven member greatly multiplied at e, because a move-
ment at the joint g produces a relatively slight movement at e. As the angle a becomes less, motion at e decreases and the
force increases until the links are in line, as at
.B.
If
R =
the
Fig. ii.
Diagram
illustrating Action of
Toggle Joint
resistance at e;
P=
:
angle between each link and a

of the pins, then
2
{
the applied power or force; and a = the line xx passing through the axes
.
of links
is a combination Pantograph which are so connected and proportioned as to length that any motion of one point in a plane parallel to that of the
R s na = Pcos a A pantograph Mechanisms.
link mechanism will cause another point to follow a similar path either on an enlarged or a reduced scale. Such a mechanism may be used as a reducing motion for operating a steam engine indicator, or to control the movements of a metal cutting
20
tool.
For instance, most engraving machines have a pantograph mechanism interposed between the tool and a tracing point which is guided along lines or grooves of a model or pattern.
As the
tracing point moves, the tool follows a similar

scale,
path, but to a reduced design on the work.
and cuts the required pattern or
A
12.
simple form of pantograph There are four links, a, 6,
equal in length, as are links c
shown by the diagram, Fig. Links a and b are c, and d. and d, thus forming a parallelis
ogram. A fifth connecting link e is parallel to links c and d. This mechanism is free to swivel about a fixed center /. Any
Fig. 12.
Pantograph
for
Reproducing Motion on a Reduced or Enlarged Scale
movement
cause a point g (which coincides with a straight line passing through / and h) to describe a path similar to that followed by h, but on a reduced scale. For
will
of h
about /
instance,
the dotted
to k following the path indicated by would also trace a similar path. line, point g Another form of pantograph mechanism is shown at A in
if
h were
moved
This pantograph, which is sometimes called lazy is used to some extent for obtaining the reduction of tongs," motion between an engine cross-head and the indicator drum
Fig.
13.
"
when taking indicator cards. The pantograph is pivoted at b by a stud which may be secured to a block of wood or angle
iron attached to a post or in
21
place.
any convenient
The end
a has a pin which is connected to the cross-head of the engine. The cord which transmits motion to the indicator drum is
attached to the cord-pin e on a cross-bar. This cross-bar may be placed in different positions relative to the pivot b, by changing screws at c and J; the cord-pin e, however, must always be in
with the fixed pivot b and pin a. The position of the crossbar in relation to pivot b determines the length of the travel of cord-pin e and, consequently, the rotary movement of the
line
Fig. 13.
Pantograph Mechanisms applied to Engine Cross-head to Reduce Motion when Taking Indicator Cards
indicator
the length of the diagram which the pencil traces upon the indicator card. The objection to this reducing mechanism is the liability of lost motion resulting from wear
in the
drum and
numerous joints. Another form of pantograph reducing mechanism is shown at B in Fig. 13. In this case, there are four links joined together in the form of a parallelogram, and one of the links is extended and pivoted to the engine cross-head. The swivel-
22
ing movement of the pantograph is about the fixed pivot /, and the cord which operates the indicator drum is attached at g.
As the
for the
illustration indicates, this point of
attachment g coin-
cides with a line passing through the pivots/
and
h,
the same as
the length of the engine stroke and L, the length required for the indicator diagram,
.
pantograph shown at
If
F =
F:L~fk:fg,
Cams.
or
|=^.
cam is applied to various forms of or sliding machine members which have revolving, oscillating, edges or grooves so shaped as to impart to a follower a motion
The name
which
"
"
Cams
usually variable and, in many cases, quite complex. are generally used to obtain a motion which could not be
is
derived from any other form of mechanism. Most cams revolve and the follower or driven member may have either a
rectilinear or oscillating motion.
is
The
acting surface of the
cam
in direct contact either with the follower or with a roller
attached to the follower to reduce friction.

of
Different types
cams are described
in
Chapter VII.
is
The Screw.
ways
in
The
screw, which
used in so
many
different
machine construction, may be considered as a type of cam having one or more grooves of helical form. One important difference between a cam and a screw is in the follower which encircles the screw and is in contact with the groove or thread
throughout several turns.
When
a screw
is
used primarily to
its
is
transmit rectilinear motion to a nut or follower, must, of necessity, be reversed, unless provision
rotation
for
made
disengaging the follower and returning it by other means, since the thread groove or grooves wind about the screw only in one
direction.
The
lead-screw of a lathe
split
may
rotate continuously
when
cutting a thread, because a
nut on the carriage

is
may
be disengaged from the lead-screw when the carriage
to be
returned to the starting position. The axial movement of the follower or nut for each revolution of the screw will equal the
lead of the thread.
The lead is equivalent to the pitch or distance between the centers of adjacent threads, if the screw has
a single thread.
23
The lead of a double-threaded screw equals twice the pitch, and for a triple-threaded screw, three times the The lead then equals the distance that any one of the pitch.
threads of a multiple-threaded screw advances in one complete turn and also the distance that a nut would advance if given one complete turn. The object of using multiple-threaded screws
is
to increase the lead
and
resulting axial
motion
of the
nut or
screw per revolution, without weakening the screw by cutting a single thread of coarser pitch into it, and also to avoid using a single-threaded screw of larger diameter. a screw imparts motion to a follower, the latter does not always move parallel to the axis of the screw, as in the case
When
For instance, if a screw is in mesh with a wheel having teeth which successively engage the screw threads, the wheel may be given a rotary motion. This form of transmission will
of a nut.
be referred to later in connection with gearing. When rotary motion Transmission by Friction Gearing. does not need to be transmitted positively, driving and driven
members which are in contact and simply roll against each other Transmissions of are used for some classes of mechanisms. " The friction gearing." this kind are commonly classified as
diagram A, Fig.
14, illustrates the principle of
a friction drive
for parallel shafts.
The pinion a may

fiber, or
consist of flanges
between
will give
which paper, straw
some other material which

is
a high coefficient of friction is compressed. bear against a cast-iron wheel. The action
as the pinion
This pinion
may
purely frictional
and wheel revolve together and the velocity ratio remains constant, unless the resistance to motion exceeds the
frictional resistance.
Diagram
shows a form of
friction gearing
which has been
used quite extensively for varying the feeding movements of " " brush wheel c in this metal-cutting tools, etc. The small
case bears against the flat face of a cast-iron disk d, and the relative speeds are varied by changing the radial position of wheel c. If brush wheel c is cylindrical, there is the disadvan-
tage that its surface (which has a uniform peripheral velocity) is in contact with plate d the surface velocity of which varies
according to the radius at any point. For instance, the velocity of d is greater at the outer corner of wheel c than at the inner
corner of
ticable,
c;
therefore, the wheel should

is
be as narrow as
is
prac-
and the edge
sometimes rounded to reduce the contact
area.
Leather fiber wheels are recommended for friction gear-
Fig. 14.
Factional Spur and Bevel Gearing for Transmitting Motion
ing
when
cessive.
small and the contact pressure exFriction gearing of the bevel type is illustrated at C.
the face width
is
Diagram
D illustrates in principle a type of friction gearing used

The
are conical
for varying the speed of parallel shafts.
members
and are separated somewhat
driving and driven so that motion
is
25
the form of a wheel or the speed.
transmitted through an intermediate part which may be in band that may be shifted for varying
that can be transmitted through friction gearing depends upon the physical character of the materials forming the surfaces in contact and also upon the normal pressure be-
The power
tween these two surfaces.

of paper
For instance,
if
one wheel
is
formed
and the other
of iron, the coefficient of friction of
the paper wheel against the iron wheel in conjunction with the pressure with which they are held in contact will determine the
driving value.
This pressure must not be great enough to
injure the paper, and the friction material should be of a very firm texture to enable it to endure high pressure without a re-
duction of the frictional coefficient, as a small reduction of the latter factor would offset the effect of a relatively large gain
in pressure-enduring qualities.
Friction materials are
now
avail-
able which combine the essential qualities of durability
and
a paper wheel is in driving power very satisfactorily. contact with a cast-iron wheel, the former should preferably be
the driving member, because it is made of softer material and its surface would be injured and eventually ruined by even occasional and momentary rotation of an iron wheel against it under pressure, as
When
when
load.
When
starting from rest, especially with an excessive the softer paper wheel is the driver, if the resist-
ance to motion exceeds the frictional resistance so that slipping

occurs, the tendency is to wear off the edge of the rotating driver evenly instead of forming a flat spot upon it, as would be the
case
if it
were the driven member and remained stationary.

of applying contact pressure is
The method
adapted to con-
ditions, but, in general, the lever-operated eccentric box or thrust box is commonly used; it is a simple method for giving
hand or power
are used.
control.
The
pressure
may
In some cases, more elaborate devices be positively applied and it may
be made to vary automatically as the load increases or decreases.
As
friction is essential to the operation of this type of gearing, care should be taken to prevent any great reduction of the driving power by the accumulation of grease or other foreign
26
matter on the friction surfaces.
Rigid support for the friction wheels and the maintenance of a good contact between the workFriction gearing
it is essential
is
ing surfaces are also of importance. suitable form of transmission where
not a
to maintain
a prescribed relation between driving and driven parts of a mechanism throughout an entire cycle of operations. In some
however, a transmission whi^ is not positive is preferit constitutes a safety device and prevents the transmission of shocks or an excessive amount of power to parts of
cases,
able in that
a mechanism which might thereby be injured.

is
Friction gearing
quietly.
also very simple in design,
and operates smoothly and
Transmission by Toothed Gearing. The slipping that often occurs when motion is transmitted by cylinders or cones which roll in contact may be avoided by employing wheels or gearing
having teeth or projections which intermesh and insure a positive drive and a constant velocity ratio. In designing the teeth of
gearing, the object
motion obtained
tween
gears.
will
slipping occurs. parallel shafts as
to so shape the contact surfaces that the be equivalent to friction gearing when no Toothed gears for transmitting motion beis
This
is
the most
in all classes of
Fig. 14, are known as spur common type of gearing, and it is found mechanisms. The pitch circles e and / corre-
shown at E,
will
spond to cylinders in contact, and the teeth, if correctly formed, transmit a continuous and unvarying motion between the driving and driven gears. If one of the spur gears could be
straightened out, as indicated
by the dotted
g, this
lines,
until the
pitch circle is
as a rack.
changed
to a straight line
would be known
spur gear meshing with a rack will transmit to the
movement, when it is the driving member, and receive rotary motion when the rack is the driver. This form of gearing is applied in many different ways.
latter a straight-line
When toothed gearing has pitch surfaces which correspond to the frustums of rolling cones, as shown at F, it is known as bevel gearing. This type of gearing is usually employed to connect shafts which are at right angles, although the angle a may be greater or less than 90 degrees. When the shafts are at right
angles and the pitch diameter of both gears
is
equal, they are
'27
known
the
as miter gears.
plane.
same
The axes of ordinary bevel gears lie in The skew bevel gear is a special form for con-
necting shafts which are at an angle to each other and not in the
same plane. This form of gearing has been used very little. Another type of gearing for shafts which are not parallel and which do not lie in the same plane is shown at A Fig. 15. This is The called spiral gearing or, more properly, helical gearing. surfaces are cylindrical, the same as with spur gears, but pitch
,
the teeth, instead or being parallel to the axes, follow helical
Fig. 15.
Spiral
and
Worm
Gearing for Transmitting Motion
curves like screw threads; for this reason, helical gears are sometimes called screw gears. The axes of the shafts may be at
right angles, as
If
shown
in the illustration, or at
is
some other
angle.
the distance between the shafts
using helical gears, it may Helical gearing is sometimes used for connecting parallel gears. shafts instead of spur gears, especially when smoothness of action
not great enough to permit be necessary to resort to skew bevel
and high speed are
essential.
The
general practice
is
to use
double helical or herringbone gear which corresponds to two

helical gears placed together,
in order to eliminate end-thrust.
having right- and left-hand teeth A herringbone gear on one
28
shaft meshes with a herringbone gear on another shaft and, as the teeth are of right- and left-hand obliquity, the end-thrust resulting from the angularity of the teeth is neutralized.
gearing shown at J5, Fig. 15, is similar in principle to spiral gearing; the worm usually has either a single or a double thread which meshes with the teeth of the worm-wheel.
The worm
The worm is the driver and the velocity ratio depends upon the number of teeth in the worm-wheel and the number of threads on the worm. For instance, if the worm-wheel has 40 teeth, 40
revolutions of a single-threaded
worm
will
be required for one
Fig.
1 6.
Transmission of Motion by
Flexible
Means
of a Belt, Chain,
and
Band
revolution of the worm-wheel, whereas a double-threaded worm would revolve 20 times for one revolution of the worm-wheel.
single-threaded
of
worm
is,
in reality, a spiral gear
continuous tooth.
There are
be described
many
later.
having one forms of gearing, special
some
which
will
Transmission by Flexible Bands, Ropes, or Chains. A very common method of transmitting motion from one shaft to another is shown at A, Fig. 16. A pulley or wheel is attached
to each shaft
and a continuous band or
belt extends
around both
pulleys so that they rotate in unison, provided the factional
resistance
29
to trans-
between the belt and pulley rims

of for pulleys of the
is sufficient
mit the required amount

belt or
band
energy or power. The connecting form shown may be of leather,
and rubber composition. Thin steel bands smooth rimmed pulleys have also been used to a operating upon limited extent. For drives of the type illustrated at A, leather
cotton, or cotton
belts are generally used, although belts
made
of cotton
duck
impregnated with rubber are extensively used, especially where the belts are exposed to the weather or to the action of steam, as they do not absorb moisture or stretch as readily as do leather
belts.
Canvas stitched belting saturated with
oil is
also fre-
quently used in preference to either leather or rubber (cotton duck and rubber) belting. The shafts may be parallel or at an
angle, and frequently the belt is guided by idler pulleys in its passage from one pulley to another. Belts are usually flat bands,
although round belts operating upon grooved pulleys are often

used, especially
upon smaller
classes of machinery.
Manila ropes have been used in many transmitting power from the power plant
shafting, although
this
Cotton and factories and mills for

to different lines of
type of transmission has
been replaced
to a considerable extent
by
electrical
equipment.
With
the
English or multiple system, a number of parallel ropes are used; each rope forms a continuous belt, and the required number are placed side by side in grooves formed in the rims of the driving
With the continuous or American around and fills all the grooves of system, one long rope winds the driving and driven pulleys, and is guided from the last groove
and driven sheaves or
pulleys.
back to the
first
one by an
idler pulley.
belt type of transa positive drive, especially when it is mission is applicable require necessary to transmit considerable power from one shaft to another and the distance between the shafts is comparatively
classes of
Many
mechanisms to which the
Belts composed of chain links which engage teeth small. formed on the sprockets are extensively used. (See diagram B, The chain transmission is often applied where the Fig. 1 6.) center-to-center distance between shafts is too short for leather
or similar belting and too long for transmitting motion
by gearing.
30
The
teeth of the sprockets engage the spaces between the link blocks or rollers, and a positive drive is thus obtained. As there is no initial tension on the chain, the pull on the shaft bearings and the resulting friction is reduced. The chains used for this
purpose vary in regard to the form and accuracy of the links and For either belt or chain drives, the velocity ratio or sprockets.
relative speed of the driving
and driven pulleys or sprockets
depends upon their respective diameters.
The
belts, ropes, or chains previously referred to are for trans-
mitting rotary motion continuously. Flexible bands are sometimes used to impart rotary motion to a reciprocating shaft.
Diagram C,
Fig. 16, illustrates one application.
or ribbons, a and 6, are wrapped about these bands are attached to the drum.
The steel bands drum c, and the ends of The outer ends of the
bands are also attached to some stationary member.

shaft carrying
When
the
given a reciprocating movement in a plane xx, as illustrated by the dotted lines, the drum is caused to revolve in conjunction with the traversing movement, first in
c is
drum
one direction and then in the other.
This particular form of
used for generating involute curves on the teeth of gear-cutters, by holding the hardened cutter on the arbor of drum c and rolling it in contact with the plane face of a grinding
is
mechanism
wheel, the wheel face representing the side of an involute rack

tooth.
Mechanisms operated
in this
reciprocating motion, since the rotary
way necessarily have a movement reverses as the
band is wrapped and unwrapped around the drum. A hoisting mechanism of the type which has a drum and an attached rope that is wound and unwound for raising and lowering a load is
another example of transmission by a flexible connector. In many cases, the drum to which one end of the rope is attached is the driver while hoisting the load, whereas, in lowering, the
drum
on the
is
driven in a reverse direction
by the
action of gravity
load.
Trains of Mechanisms.
While a
single pair of pulleys
and a
connecting belt, or a single pair of meshing gears,
may
be em-
ployed for transmitting motion from one shaft to another, it is often desirable or necessary to use a series of pulleys or gears
between the driving and driven shafts. Various combinations of links, cams, etc., may also be used to connect driving and
driven members.
In general, any
If
series of pulleys, gears, links,
cams, etc., regardless of their order or combination, is

as a train of mechanism.
known
transmitted entirely is called a gear train. through gearing, the combination of gears Trains of gears, pulleys, etc., are common to all classes of mechis
motion
anisms and
may
be necessary either for obtaining a required
Fig. 17.
Train of Pulleys and Trains of Gearing
velocity ratio or for transmitting motion when the driving and driven members are so located that a more direct method
of transmission is not practicable.
Motion
is
often transmitted
through trains of gearing specially arranged so that speed changes may readily be obtained by manipulating suitable controlling
levers.
The diagram A,
Fig. 17,
shows a train
d.
of pulleys for trans-
mitting motion from pulley a to pulley drivers and pulleys b and d, followers.
Pulleys a and c are
If the
speed of pulley
of
a and
the diameters of all the pulleys are
known, the speed
pulley d
may
be found as follows:
Find the product of the
32
diameters of the driving pulleys; divide by the product of the diameters of the driven pulleys, and multiply the quotient by If the the revolutions per minute of the first driving pulley a.
speeds for pulleys a and d are given and it is desired to find the diameters of all the pulleys, proceed as follows: Find the speed
by placing the number of revolutions of the driving pulley as the numerator and the number of revolutions of the driven pulley as the denominator of a fraction, and reduce this fraction to its lowest terms. Then divide both the numerator and denominator of the fraction, thus expressing the ratio as two " " of factors by the same numfactors, and multiply each pair
ratio
ber until pulleys with suitable diameters are found. (One factor in the numerator and one in the denominator are considered
as
one pair.") Sometimes motion is transmitted through more than one pair of pulleys, especially when the required velocity ratio is high, to avoid using one very large pulley and one very
small one.
"
Trains of Spur Gears.
train of four spur gears
is
shown at
B, Fig. 17. The number and arrangement of gears in a train vary considerably. The shafts may all lie in the same plane or
be in different planes, and the train of gearing may serve other purposes than merely transmitting motion from one shaft to
driver e transmits motion to gear g through an " " intermediate gear / called an idler gear. While the idler
another.
The
affects the direction of rotation, it does

ratio.
not affect the velocity

lathes for connecting
Idler gears are used
the
"
"
on many engine
change-gears
is
of different sizes used for screw cutting.
The
idler stud is carried
position
gears.
by an adjustable arm or plate, and its varied to suit the diameters of the driving and driven
term
is
at C is known as compound whenever there is one or more pairs gearing; applied of gearing in the train, attached to the same shaft or stud. Assuming that h is the driver, motion is transmitted to driven gear i, and by the second driver^' of the train, to driven gear k.
The arrangement shown

this
The
will
direction of rotation of the first

if
and
last gears in
if
a train
is
be opposite
the
number
of axes
be even, but,
there
an
odd number
of axes, the first
and
last gears will revolve in the
33
two gears running in For are inversely as their diameters or numbers of teeth. instance, if a driving gear has 20 teeth and a driven gear, 60
same mesh
direction.
The
relative speeds of
teeth, three revolutions of the driver will
revolution of the driven gear.

gear, multiply the
number
be required for one obtain the speed of the driven of teeth in the driver by its speed in
To
revolutions per minute, and divide the product by the number An idler gear placed between the of teeth in the driven gear.
driving
and driven gears
will
not affect the
result.
To
of gearing, find the
determine the speed of the last gear of a compound train product of the diameters or numbers of teeth
divide by the corresponding product of the driven gears, and multiply the quotient by the revoThis rule may also lutions per minute of the first driving gear.
of all the driving gears;
all of
be applied when belt pulleys and gears are combined in one train. With such combination, the diameters of the pulleys, and either the pitch diameters of the gears or the numbers of teeth, could be
used in making the calculations. If one of the gears in a train is fixed Epicyclic Gear Trains. or stationary, and another gear (or gears) revolves about the
stationary gear in addition to rotating relative to its own axis, the mechanism is known as an epicydic train of gearing, because points on the revolving gears describe epicycloidal curves. The
two gears a and

link
c.
b (see
If this link
diagram A, Fig. 18) are held in mesh by a remains stationary and gear a makes one
of revolutions
made by gear b will equal the number of teeth in a divided by the number of teeth in b, or the pitch diameter of a divided by the pitch diameter of b. If a and b represent either the pitch diameters of the gears or numrevolution, the
number
bers of teeth, the revolutions of b to one turn of a equal
If
gear a
axis of
is
held stationary and link c is given one turn about the the revolutions of gear b, relative to arm c, will <z, then
,
also equal
the
j-
same as when gear a was revolved once with the
arm held
Since a rotation of arm c will cause -a stationary. rotation of gear b in the same direction about its axis, the total
34
of revolutions of gear
c,
number
turn of
will equal i (the

c,
relative to a fixed plane, for one turn of c) plus the revolutions of b

6,
if
relative to
or
+-
For example,
gear a has 60 teeth and
Fig.
1 8.
Epicyclic or Planetary Gearing
gear
b,
20 teeth, one turn of
arm
would cause
60
b to rotate
20
that the total
i -f-
or
3 times about its
own
axis; gear 6,
a, so
however, also makes one turn
about the axis of gear
number
of revolutions
relative to a fixed plane equals
=
20
4 revolutions.
In order to
b
illustrate the distinction
35
of
between the rotation
around
its
own
b is in
axis
and
assume that
mesh
is free
rotation relative to a fixed plane, with a fixed gear a and also with an outer
its
internal gear that
to revolve.
If the
speed of the internal
gear is required, it will be necessary, in calculating this speed, to consider not only the rotation of b about its own axis, but also
its
motion around
a,
because the effect of this latter motion on

c,
the internal gear, for each turn of link additional revolution of b.
is
equivalent to an
with gear
of e for
Diagram B, Fig. e on arm/.
18, represents
If
arm/
,
is
an internal gear d in mesh held stationary, the revolutions

e representing the If
one turn of d equal - d and

c/
numbers of
teeth or pitch diameters of the respective gears.
the internal
g,
gear rotation of
is
held stationary and

e
arm /
is
turned about axis

is
the
about
its axis will
be clockwise when /
turned
counter-clockwise, and vice versa; hence, the revolutions of gear e, relative to a fixed plane, for one turn of / about g, will equal
the difference between

revolutions equal to e
-
(representing the turn of /) and the
Method of Analyzing Epicyclic Gear Trains. A simple method of analyzing epicyclic gearing is to consider the actions For instance, with the gearing shown at A, Fig. separately. 18, the results obtained when link c is fixed and the gear a (which normally would be fixed) is revolved are noted; if gear a is revolved in a clockwise direction, then, in order to reproduce the action of the gearing, the entire mechanism, locked together as a The unit, is assumed to be given one turn counter-clockwise.
results are then tabulated, using plus and minus signs to indicate directions of rotation. Assume that gear a has 60 teeth and
gear
20 teeth, and that signs represent counter-clockwise movements and If link c is held signs clockwise movements.
b,
stationary
and gear a
is
turned clockwise
one revolution,
gear b will revolve counter-clockwise

consider
all of
is
(+)$-
revolution.
Next
bination
the gears locked together so that the entire comrevolved one turn in a counter-clockwise (-}-) direc-
36
a to
its original position.
tion, thus returning gear

tical effect of these
The
prac-
separate motions is the same as though link were revolved once about the axis of a fixed gear a which is
the way in which the gearing operates normally. By tabulating these results as follows, the motion of each part of the mechanism
may
readily be determined:
Gear a
i
Link
Gear
Link Stationary Gears Locked
turn turn
o turn
-fi turn
-\-i
-f-i
-ff$ turn +i turn
Number
of
Turns
+4
of
The
algebraic
sums
in line
is
headed
"
Number
Turns "
in-
dicate that,
when
gear a
turn about the axis of
a,
held stationary and link c is given one gear b will make 4 revolutions relative
-j-
to a fixed plane in a counter-clockwise or link c is turned in the same direction.
direction,
when
The application of this method to the arrangement of gearing shown at B, Fig. 18, will now be considered. Assume that gear d has 60 teeth and gear e, 20 teeth. Then, if gear d is turned clockwise with link / stationary, and the entire mechanism with
the gears locked
results:
Gearc/
is
turned counter-clockwise, an analysis of the

will give the following
Link/
Gear
f
e
separate motions previously referred to
Link Stationary Gears Locked
'.
turn turn
o turn
turn
+i
o
+1
turn
-fi turn
2
Number
of
Turns
Effect of Idler in Epicyclic

is
Gear Train.
If
an
idler gear i
placed between gears a and b (diagram C, Fig. 18), the latter will rotate about its axis in a direction opposite to that of the
link (the
same as with the arrangement shown at B) and the

t
revolutions of gear b, relative to a fixed plane, for one turn of link h about the axis of a, will equal the difference between
i
(representing the turn of h)
and the revolutions equal
to -
Assume that gear a has 60 teeth, idler gear i, 30 teeth, and gear Then the turns of 6, relative to a fixed member for &, 20 teeth. one turn of h about the axis of a, are shown by the following
analysis:
Gear a
38
if
direction as link n, whereas,
this value is greater
than
i,
gear b will revolve in the opposite direction.

epicyclic gearing may be used for obtaining a very reduction in velocity between the link n and the last gear great b in the train. As an extreme example, suppose gear a has 99 teeth, gear k, 100 teeth, gear /, 101 teeth, and gear &, 100 teeth.
Compound
The speed
of gear b will equal
=
100
revolu-
tion; hence link
each revolution of gear
shown at
D is Diagram E
frame
q,
n would have to make b. The arrangement known as a reverted train.
10,000 10,000 revolutions for

of epicyclic gearing
100
An
internal gear
gear,
shows another arrangement of reverted train. / forms part of the mechanism, and either this or pinion p may be the stationary member, de-
pending upon the application of the mechanism. In this case, instead of a single set of gears between p and /, there is a double
set located diametrically opposite
frame
q.
This arrangement
internal gear
/
is
and connected by a suitable similar to the mechanism of a

central pinion
certain type of geared hoist.
The
member,
driven
is
stationary,
p is the driving and the frame q is the
member and imparts motion
to the hoisting sheave.
Sun and Planet Motion.

illustrated
by diagram A,
Fig. 18,
mechanism of the general type was employed by Watt for
transmitting motion from the connecting-rod to the engine shaft, because the crank motion had been patented previously. This mechanism is known as a " sun and planet " motion, the fixed
gear a representing the sun and the revolving gear
b,
the planet.
In applying this mechanism to an engine, one gear was keyed
on the shaft and the other was fixed to the connecting-rod. The connecting link between the gears was loose on both shafts. A forward and return stroke of the piston caused the connectingrod gear to pass once around the shaft gear, but without revolving on its own axis, as it was attached to the connecting-rod. With this arrangement, if both gears are of the same diameter, the shaft gear will make two revolutions for one turn of the connecting link between the gears or one revolution for each stroke.
CHAPTER
II
SPEED-CHANGING AND CONTROLLING MECHANISMS

THE speed at which a machine or mechanism operates may be either uniform or variable, and be controlled either automatically or by some form of hand-manipulated device. If the motion is transmitted by a combination of gearing or other mechanical means, the rate of speed may be varied by changing
the velocity ratio of the mechanism that transmits the motion. When the rate of speed depends upon the action of a fluid such
as steam, the speed may be regulated by controlling the amount of steam that is used and the resulting pressure against the moving element. The object in regulating and controlling the
speed of a machine depends upon the type of machine and its If it is utilized in manufacturing a certain product, the use.
be limited by the nature of the operation it performs; moreover, the speed may need to be varied at times because of changes in operating conditions. This is frequently the case with machine tools. Another important use for speedrate of speed
may
regulating mechanisms is to vary the motion of some operating tool-slide or other part which must move at a rate depending upon conditions that are subject to change. The speed regulation of a to insure a
prime mover such as an engine or a steam turbine is uniform speed regardless of ordinary variations in
the resistance to motion of the driven
member
or changes in the
steam pressure.
speed variations are essential to the operation of machines such, for example, as are used for some kinds of manu-
When
facturing work, the changes are usually obtained by hand-conIf such variations are seldom trolled speed-changing devices.
be necessary to stop the machine and make an adjustment, or replace one or more gears with others of different diameters. When changes of speed are frequently needed,
required, it
may
3A
39
40
the machine
is
generally equipped with some mechanical device enabling one or more variations to be obtained rapidly, by simply moving a wheel, lever, or rod which controls the combi-
nation or velocity ratio of the mechanism through which the motion is transmitted. If the machine is of the automatic
type, the speed may be regulated according to varying conditions, the mechanism of the machine itself, which is constructed
by
or adjusted beforehand to give the proper changes. The exact of the details depends, in any case, upon conditions arrangement such as the speed variation required, the importance of rapid
changes, the relation of the speed-controlling other parts of the machine, etc.
mechanism
to
Mechanical devices for varying the speed are of special importance on machine tools. In fact, most machine tools are so
constructed that the speed of the cutting tool or of the part being operated upon can be varied, the range or extent of the variation depending upon the type of machine. These changes are desirable in order to cut different kinds of metal at the most
for example, soft brass may be turned, drilled, or planed at a much higher speed than cast iron or steel, and, by using the fastest speed that is practicable, obviously the rate
efficient speed;
of production is increased.
Another important reason
for speed
variation
to secure the proper surface speed for revolving parts, regardless of the diameter, and the correct cutting speeds for
is
In the case of lathes or other rotating tools of different sizes. the speed of the work is increased as the turning machines,
diameter decreases, in order to maintain a cutting or surface speed which is considered suitable for the kind of metal being
machined.
Similarly, drilling or boring machines are so dethat the speed of the drill or boring bar can be varied in signed accordance with the diameter of the hole being drilled or bored.
of this part of
The design
the
any machine
minimum and maximum
required, the total number ment by which each step or change
tool involves determining that would ordinarily be speeds of variations, the amount or increvaries,
and the design
of the
mechanical device for securing speed changes and transmitting
them
to the work-spindle or tool.
These speed-changing devices
SPEED-CHANGING MECHANISMS
usually consist of different combinations of gearing, although belt-driven pulleys and friction gearing are often utilized.
Types
of
Mechanical Speed-changing Mechanisms.

is
When
a variation of speed
obtained by changing the velocity ratio of two or more parts forming a train of mechanism, one of the
following methods is generally employed: (i) By means of conical pulleys connected by a belt or cone-pulleys having " " of different diameters upon which a connecting belt steps be shifted; (2) by the use of cone-pulleys in conjunction may
with one or more sets of gears; (3) by means of toothed gears exclusively, with an arrangement that enables the motion to be
Fig. i.
Stepped Cones and Conical Pulleys for Varying Speeds
transmitted through different ratios or combinations of gearing; (4) by employing a friction transmission consisting of driving and driven disks, pulleys, or wheels, so arranged that one member (or an intermediate connecting device) can be shifted relative to the axis of the other for varying the speed. These different
types or classes of speed-changing mechanisms are constructed

in various ways.
Arrangement
illustrates a
of Cone-pulley Drives.
Diagram A,
Fig.
i,
very simple arrangement for varying speeds, and one which has been extensively employed in connection with
tools
machine
and other
classes of
machinery.
Two
cone or
stepped pulleys are so located .that the large and small steps of one pulley are opposite the small and large steps of the other
42
pulley; consequently, when a connecting belt is shifted from one step to another, the speed is varied. If pulley a is the driver
belt is in the position shown, the driven pulley b will rotate at the fastest speed, and the speed will be gradually diminished as the belt is shifted toward the right. In designing
and the
cone-pulleys, it is important to proportion the different steps so that a belt of fixed length will have approximately the same
tension for
any position on the
pulley.
In the operation of some machines, it is desirable to secure very gradual speed changes, without stopping the driving and
driven
members
for
shifting
a connecting belt.
One simple
way
and
of securing such changes is illustrated by the diagrams C, Fig. i. The pulleys in this case are either frustums of
cones, as
shown at B, or
of conoidal form, as at C.
The form
shown at
the belt
is suitable for a crossed-belt, since the crossing of
it equally tight at corresponding positions on the two cones, which would not be the case with an open belt. When the latter is required, it is preferable to use the curved cone as illustrated at C. While the conical or conoidal pulleys
makes
provide very gradual speed changes, the belt tends to shift toward the large end of these pulleys, although such action may be prevented by the guide used for moving the belt to obtain
compensating for the taper One form of the driving and driven cones have been devised. of patented cone-pulley drive consists of two conical pulleys of
speed changes.
Special
of
means
the form illustrated at
jB;
open
belt which, instead of bearing directly
these pulleys are connected by an on the pulleys,
passes over inner bands or belts beveled on the inner face to correspond with the taper of the pulleys. There is one of these
compensating bands or auxiliary belts for each pulley;

belts are traversed with the
is
these
main driving
belt
when
the latter
Another patented method of shifted for varying the speed. compensating for the taper of cone-pulleys is arranged as follows: Instead of connecting the two pulleys directly by one belt, two belts are used, which transmit motion through an inter-
mediate double cone-pulley, which

belt for obtaining speed changes.
is
shifted with the driving
43
Combination of Cone-pulley and Gearing. One method of a cone-pulley in conjunction with gearing is illustrated using by diagram A, Fig. 2. This particular arrangement is com-
monly employed on engine lathes and is known as "back-gearing."
When
"
the pulley
"
d,
is
to the spindle
by means
driving the spindle direct, it is usually locked of a bolt which connects it with the
face gear
direct drive, the back-gears are disengaged
the latter being attached to the spindle. For the and the main spindle
together.
and cone-pulley revolve
By
disengaging the cone-
Fig. 2.
Gear and Cone-pulley Combinations
for Varying
Speed
pulley from gear d so that it rotates freely about the spindle and " cone engaging the back-gears, motion is transmitted from the " from c to d\ in this way, the range of speeds gear a to gear b, and obtained by the direct drive is doubled. With a four-step conepulley, there
would be four direct speeds and four slower speeds with the back-gears engaged, the drive being so proportioned that a gradual increase of speeds from the minimum to the maxi-
mum,
or mce versa,
may
be obtained.
The
sleeve
which
carries
the two back-gears revolves about a shaft having eccentric bear-
44
by turning
this shaft
ings at the ends, so that,
with a lever, the
back-gears are engaged or disengaged. Many modern engine lathes have double back-gears,
one
arrangement being shown at B. There are two cone gears a and b and two mating gears c and d on the rear shaft, so that a double
range of geared speeds may be obtained, in addition to variations secured with the direct drive thus, with a three-step cone;
pulley, there
would be a
total of nine speeds.

for
The
gears c
and
d are shifted along the rear shaft

relative to the cone gears.
changing their position modification of the double back-
geared drive is so arranged that the two gears on the rear shaft are connected by a friction clutch controlled by a conveniently
located lever.
Another design
as
"
of lathe headstock gearing is

this
com-
monly known ways
triple gearing,"
applied to the
same form
of drive
alalthough machine-tool builders. by

is
term
not
Ordinarily, however, a lathe is said to be triple-geared when there are two gear shafts. The cone-pulley speeds are doubled
by
of speeds is obtained
driving through one combination of gears, and a third range by transmitting the motion through the
other combination, the pinion of the second shaft being engaged directly with a large internal gear on the faceplate. Triple gearing is used on large lathes and the direct drive to the faceplate provides a very powerful turning movement, such as is required for taking heavy cuts on castings or forgings of large diameter.
Cone-pulley and Epicyclic Gearing. pulley and planetary or epicyclic gearing
is
The use of a coneshown at C, Fig. 2.
The
mounted on a stud
cone-pulley has a pinion a, which meshes with pinion b, carried by plate c. Pinion b also meshes with
an internal gear forming part of casting e. This casting and the cone-pulley are both loose upon the shaft, but plate c is keyed to it. When lock-pin d engages a notch in plate c, the gears are
locked together and the shaft
entire
mechanism revolving
driven directly by the cone, the as a unit. When lock-pin d is enis
gaged with a stationary arm g, the internal gear is prevented from rotating and motion is transmitted to the spindle of the machine from the cone-pulley, as pinion a causes pinion b to re-
45
volve about the stationary internal gear and carry with it plate c, which transmits a slower speed to the spindle than is obtained with the direct drive. This design, which has been applied to " some upright drilling machines, is sometimes known as a differential back-gear."
by the diagram D,
"
Another cone-pulley containing epicyclic gearing is shown Bevel gears are employed in this Fig. 2. instead of spur gears, and the combination is known as case,
This gearing was designed originally to replace the back-gearing of a lathe, but it has been applied to various classes of machinery. When used in conjunction with
Humpage's
gear."
a cone-pulley, the arrangement

loosely
is
as follows:
The
cone-pulley
is
mounted on
its
shaft
and
carries a pinion
a which meshes
with gear b. This gear is locked to pinion c, thus forming a double gear that is free to turn about arm d, the hub of which
Gear b meshes meshes with gear e. Diametri/, cally opposite arm d, there is another arm which carries gears corresponding to b and c. This additional gearing is included because of its balancing effect and need not be considered in
is
also loosely
mounted on the
spindle or shaft.
with gear
whereas pinion
studying the action of the gearing. The gear e is keyed to the spindle, and, except when a direct drive is employed, gear / is With the fulcrum gear / stationary and gear a stationary.
revolving, gear e
and the spindle are rotated at a much slower
arm d and the intermediate connecting gears roll around gear /. The direction in which gear e rotates for a given movement of gear a depends upon the ratio of the gearing, and
speed, as the
the direction the gears.
may be
reversed
f J -
by changing
c
is less
the relative sizes of

i,
When the ratio
X X
than
6
if
gears a and e will
revolve in the same direction, whereas,

i,
this ratio is greater
than
they pact form of gearing and the velocity ratio may siderably by a slight change in the relative sizes of the gears.
will revolve in opposite directions.
This
a very combe varied conis
The velocity ratio when

by
f J -
c
is less
than
may be determined
num-
the following formula, in which the letters represent the
46
marked with corresponding
reference
bers of teeth in the gears

letters in the illustration:
Ratio
If
/,
gear a has 12 teeth,
6,
40 teeth,
c,
16 teeth,
e,
34 teeth, and
46 teeth, then,
Ratio
=
z
T!
L=
39
85
X 16 40 X 34
46
f
I0 S3
.
Therefore, gear a will revolve 10.53 times while gear e
is
making
i,
one revolution.
formula
If the
c
is
expression
greater than
the
may be changed as follows:

Ratio = a
/X
b
When toothed gearused exclusively in a speed-changing mechanism, the most ing common arrangements may be defined as the(i) sliding-gear type;
Geared Speed-changing Mechanisms.
is
the clutch-controlled type; (3) the gear-cone and slidingkey type; (4) the gear-cone and expanding-clutch type; (5) the
(2)
gear-cone and tumbler-gear type;

gear and shifting-pinion type.
and
(6)
the multiple crownFig. 3, illustrates
Diagram A,
the principle of the sliding-gear design. One of the parallel shafts carries two fixed gears, a and c\ the gears b and d on the other shaft are free to slide axially so that motion may be trans-
mitted either through gears a and b or c and d. The first combination gives a faster speed than the latter, because driving
gear a
is
larger than gear
c.
speeds, two or more
sets of sliding gears are
For obtaining a greater range of used in many cases.
Clutch
Method
of Control.
Diagram B,
Fig. 3, illustrates
the use of a clutch for controlling speed changes. This clutch is located between the two driven gears and it can be engaged
47
with either of these gears by a lengthwise movement effected usually by a lever. While this clutch is free to slide axially, it is
prevented from revolving about the shaft by a spline or key. The driven gears, however, turn freely about the shaft unless
engaged by the clutch. A positive clutch is shown in the diagram, or one having teeth which engage corresponding notches
hubs of the gears; many of the clutches for speed-changing mechanisms, however, are of the friction type.
in the
Fig. 3.
Diagrams
illustrating Different
Types
of All-geared
Speed-
changing Mechanisms
In the diagrams A and 5, single-belt pulleys are shown upon the driving shafts. This is a common method of rotating the initial driving shaft of speed-changing mechanisms of the allgeared type, the shaft rotating at a constant speed and all of the changes being obtained by the shifting of gears or clutches.
On many
pulley is or one of the variable-speed type.
machines, however, the single constant-speed belt replaced either by a motor of the constant-speed type
48
The use of Intermeshing Gear Cones and Sliding Key. intermeshing gear cones and a sliding key for changing speeds is represented by diagram C, Fig. 3. Two cones of gears are
mounted upon
parallel shafts so that they intermesh,
one shaft
being the driver and the other, the driven member. All of the gears on shaft a are attached to it, whereas those on shaft b are
around the shaft, except when engaged by the which can be shifted from one gear to another by moving key c, rod d. If the key were in the position shown by the diagram, the drive would be through gears g and e\ if a were the driving
free to revolve
speed of shaft b could be increased by engaging the with gears to the left. Obviously, the number of speed key
shaft, the
changes corresponds to the number of gears in the cone. The driving end of the key projects through a slot in the shaft
and the edges are beveled to an angle of about 45 degrees, so that, as the key is moved in a lengthwise direction, it will be depressed by the action of the beveled edge against a steel washer or guard n placed between each pair of gears. With this arrangement, the key is completely disengaged from one gear before meshing with the next one, which is essential with a drive of
upward into engagement with the keyways of the different gears, by means of a spring beneath it. A modification of the mechanism just described is so arranged that, instead of locking the gears in the upper cone by means of
this kind.
is
The key
forced
a sliding key, each gear
is fitted
with a ring which

is
may
be ex-
panded by means
suitable means.
of
a wedge, the action of which
controlled
by
is
The gear-cone and

different types of
is
sliding-key
tools,
mechanism
applied to
many
machine
although this
re-
form of mechanism
usually installed either for transmitting
feeding motion or in connection with spindle drives which

quire a relatively small
amount
of power.
Gear-cone and Tumbler-gear Mechanism.
The
is
arrange-
ment
of a gear-cone
Z>,
and tumbler-gear mechanism

There
is
represented
by diagram
Fig. 3.
a pinion b which is free to slide nected with cone gears of different diameters, by means of the tumbler gear c. The tumbler gear is carried by an arm which
a cone of gears on shaft a and on a splined shaft and is con-
49
can be shifted parallel to the axis of the gear cone for aligning the tumbler gear with any one of the cone gears; this arm can
be moved at right angles to the axis of the gear cone for bringing the tumbler gear into mesh with the various sizes of
also
gears composing the cone (as
shown by the dotted
circles),
and
provision
is
made
for locking the

is
Cone-and-tumbler gearing
in its different positions. not always arranged as shown by
arm
tumbler gear, instead of engaging diagram D\ with a pinion mounted upon a splined shaft, may mesh with a long pinion, or the tumbler gear may be carried by a frame
for instance, the
which
is
different cone gears.
adjusted to bring the tumbler gear into mesh with the Another modification consists of a cone
of gears
which are adjusted axially for alignment with the tumbler

is
gear which
only
moved
in a radial direction.
The multiple Multiple Crown-gear and Shifting Pinion. of speed-changing mechanism is represented crown-gear type by diagram E, Fig. 3. The crown gear g has several concentric rows of teeth, and the speed is varied by shifting the pinion h so that it engages a row of larger or smaller diameter. This mechanism has been applied to drilling machines for varying the feeding movements of the drill. The design and application of the various kinds of speedchanging mechanisms previously described, and the exact arrangement of the gears or other parts are governed very largely by the type of machine and the general nature of the work which it does. Mechanisms of the same general type are often constructed along different lines, and in many cases various combinations are employed.
gearing of various forms is applied to some classes of machinery as a means of obtaining speed changes, although the other types of speed-
Frictional
Speed-changing
Devices.
Friction
changing mechanisms previously referred to are
much more
type simple in design extensively employed. and has the further advantage of providing very gradual speed
frictional
is
The
changes.
If
a definite relation, however, must be maintained
between the driving and driven members, the frictional transmission is not suitable, but, in some cases, the fact that it is
not positive and tends to slip when subjected to excessive loads is a good feature, as it serves to protect the driven mechanism
against excessive stresses.
Fig. 4 shows a type of frictional speed-changing mechanism which has been quite generally used, the details of construction
being modified somewhat, owing to variations in the amount of power to be transmitted and other factors affecting the design.
The
particular arrangement referred to
is
running-balance indicating machine.
The motor which
applied to a Norton drives
the machine revolves the leather-faced driving disk
which
is
in*
Fig. 4.
Speed-changing Mechanism
of Friction
Disk and Wheel Type
in contact with a steel
wheel B.
The
vertical shaft passing
through the driven wheel transmits motion to a horizontal shaft

(not shown) at the top of the machine, which, in turn, revolves whatever part is to be tested for running balance. Variations
in the speed of the
work
are obtained
by changing the
posi-
tion of wheel
relative to the axis of the driving disk
The
adjustments of wheel B are controlled by a hand lever provided with a notched quadrant for holding it in a given position. This hand lever is connected with the slide of wheel B by link C. A
reversal of
motion
is
obtained
by simply
shifting wheel
to the
is
opposite side of the axis of the driving disk.
The wheel
held
against the leather-faced disk with sufficient pressure by means of springs F which are provided with screws for varying the com-
becomes flattened out or thin from be adjusted inward by means of stopwear, the wheel screws G. The leather disk is held in place by a retaining ring H.
pression.
If the leather disk
B may
With a mechanism
of this kind, the
adjustments for changing
the speed should only be
Many
the driving disk is running. mechanisms of the friction type have speed-changing
made when
opposing cones which are connected by some

intermediate
that
to
member
speed.
may
be adjusted
the
vary
The use of an ordinary

belt has already
been
5
referred
to.
Fig.
shows an arrangement for regulating the

speed of a driven shaft, by changing the position
of
a wheel
placed between the driving cone B and the

driven cone C.
These
of cast iron
two cones are made and the

Fig. 5.
bearing surface of the intermediate wheel is
Friction
for Varying
Cones and Intermediate Wheel Speeds
formed
of leather disks
held in place between two flanges or collars. This particular mechanism is used for varying the feeding movement of a cold-metal saw. The handle connecting with a screw is used
for controlling the position of the intermediate
wheel and the
shows the rate of feed per minute, this dial being connected through shaft F and a gear at the lower end with a rack on the adjustable member, so that any change The lower in the position of the wheel is indicated by the dial.
rate of speed.
dial at
friction
cone
is
held in contact with the wheel
by means
of
a spring G, the tension of which may be regulated by lever H. This lever is provided with graduations so that the same tension as well as the rate of feed per minute may be duplicated.
driven cone
Another method of transmitting motion from a driving to a is shown in Fig. 6, which illustrates the Evans friction cones. The two cone-pulleys are not directly in contact
with each other, but bear against a band or ring of leather which
Fig. 6.
Friction
Cones which transmit Motion through Adjustable Leather Ring or Belt
serves to transmit the motion.
The speed
of the driven cone is
by simply a larger or smaller part of the cones. If cone A is the driver, the speed of cone B would be gradually increased if belt C were shifted toward the right, since the practical effect of this shifting
varied
shifting this leather ring so that it bears against
movement
shaft.
is
This mechanism
to increase the diameter of the driving pulley. is used ordinarily as a variable-speed counter-
There are two general methods of starting or stopping
the driven members.
Some
friction cones are so
arranged that
the leather ring is shifted to a parallel part of the cones for disthe drive, and others are so designed that one cone is engaging
raised
53
ping at the
and lowered by the same speed.
shifting lever, thus starting
and stop-
of Speed-changing Mechanism. The mechanism shown in Fig. 7 is an ingenious design variable-speed that is applied to some of the Brown & Sharpe cylindrical grind-
Multiple-disk Type
ing machines for changing the rotary speed of the part being ground and also the rate of the table traverse. Three levers
grouped around a
dial at the front of the
machine are used
for
Fig. 7.
Multiple Friction Disk Type of Speed-changing
Mechanism
controlling the mechanism.
The
rotary speed of the work,

dial (not
and another
position of lever A governs the lever in front of the circular
shown
in the illustration) serves to
change the rate of
These changes of work speed the table traversing movement. and table traverse are entirely independent. The long lever is used for starting and stopping the rotation of the work and the
traversing movement of the table simultaneously. The mechanism is driven from a driving shaft which runs at a constant
54
speed and connects with coupling B. The sprocket C is connected to the reversing mechanism and drives the table traverse.
silent chains
Another sprocket (not shown) is connected by a pair of and a splined shaft, with a driving member for
operates as follows: The shaft F carrying at a constant speed through drives shafts G and
the heads tock.
The mechanism
coupling
spur gearing.
steel disks
The shafts G and H carry a mounted on square portions of
series of
hardened
the shafts.
These
disks
are ground slightly convex and each group of disks intermeshes with another group or series of hardened steel
/ and
disks
and
Each
of these driven disks has a
rim at the
periphery so that the point of contact with the driving disk is are mounted in always at the outer edge. The shafts G and
and P, both of which pivot on shaft F, swinging brackets thus allowing the position of disks J and to be varied relative
to the disks
L and M.
If
the convex disks
/ are swung
towards
the recessed disks L, the surfaces of disks /, which actually do the driving, decrease in radius and, consequently, the speed of
disks
L and
their shaft also decreases.
The
lever
controls the
and the speed of the headstock, whereas the position of bracket lever at the front of the dial (not shown) controls bracket
and the feeding movements

segment gears on the brackets.
of
the table.
Motion
is
trans-
mitted to these brackets through bevel pinions meshing with
With
this
mechanism,
slight variations in speed

is
may
be obshifted
tained while the machine

for stopping the
in motion.
When
lever
R
S
is
machine, a
cam
at the end of shaft
operates
a lever which relieves the pressure applied to disks L and by the springs shown at T and U. This lever also applies brakes
which quickly stop the table and headstock. When the lever is raised for starting the mechanism, the disks L and grip the intermeshing disks / and K, and the driven members are
started without shock, the action being very similar to the wellknown multiple-disk friction clutch. plunger pump at V
from the bottom of the case to a distributor at the top pumps which lubricates the entire mechanism.
oil
55
Concave Friction Disks and Inclined Wheel. The frictional transmission shown in Fig. 8 is an example of variable-speed the type having annular concave frictional surfaces engaged by an intermediate wheel the inclination of which is varied for
changing the speed.
is
The
principle
upon which the device
by the diagram at the left. The two disks operates annular concave surfaces are rotated from some source of having power and run loose on shaft A which is driven at a variable
illustrated
is pivoted at to arm B, so The intermediate wheel speed. that it can be inclined as indicated by the dotted lines. The
drive to shaft
is
transmitted through
arm B.
When
wheel
Fig. 8.
Variable-speed Transmission having Annular Concave Surfaces
and Inclinable Friction Wheel

is parallel to shaft as shown in the illustration, and the two disks and C are revolving in opposite directions at the same
,
D will simply revolve about pivot 0, and arm B and shaft A will remain stationary. If wheel D is inclined, however, as indicated by the dotted line EF, the contact surface at E will
speed, wheel
be revolving at a higher circumferential speed than the surface

disk C; consequently, pivot 0, arm B, and shaft A will be given a rotary motion, the rate of which depends upon the angu-
F on
larity of
wheel D.
The
greater the angularity, the greater will
56
be the difference in the diameter of the contact surfaces of disks
G and C and
wheel
the higher the speed of shaft A. By inclining in the opposite direction, the rotation of shaft can
be reversed.
A variable-speed mechanism designed on this principle is shown at the right of the diagram in Fig. 8. A bevel gear H mounted on the end of the driving shaft revolves the two bevel gears / and K mounted on shaft A which is the driven member. These bevel gears J and K have annular concave surfaces which engage the cork surface of wheel D. This wheel revolves on an annular ball bearing, the inner race of which is attached to ring pivoted on a stud carried by arm B. The angular posi,
tion of wheel
D is controlled by a lever L integral with the pivoted

is
ring
M.
This lever
connected with ring
which
is
engaged
by a forked lever similar to the form used for shifting clutches. An objection to variable-speed mechanisms based on this
principle is that the variation of speed does not change the torque, so that, even though there is considerable speed reduction, the
torque will not be proportionally greater, because the limiting factor for the torque is the frictional adherence between the
driving and driven contact surfaces, and this frictional resistance is independent of the speed at which the shaft A is running; consequently, while variable-speed devices in general are of such construction that the torque increases when the speed decreases,
in the present case the speed is variable, while the torque re-
As the main feature of variable-speed devices often not the variation of speed as much as the increased torque obtained by a decrease in speed, the objection referred to is one
mains constant.
is
of great importance.
Friction
Disk and Epicyclic Gear Combination.
A very high
velocity ratio or great reductions of speed, as well as extremely
small variations of speed,

to be described.
may
be obtained by the mechanism
This mechanism (see Fig. 9) is a combination of friction disks and a train of epicyclic or differential gearing.
The two
shaft C,
disks D and E are free to revolve upon the vertical and the hubs of these disks form the bevel gears F and G. Between these two bevel gears are the additional gears T and
57
J mounted on
pin H, which
is
attached to shaft C.
The
disks
and
are in frictional contact with wheels
and 0, and
by screw K, which is rotated through disks R. If wheel N is revolved and disks D and E are equidistant from the axes of wheels N and O (as shown in the illustration), both disks will revolve at the same speed, but in opposite directions. As gears F and G also rotate at the same
their position is regulated
L and
speed,
the
intermediate
gears T and / merely revolve idly upon pin H,
which
position.
remains
in
one
in
Any change
relative
the position of disks
D
the
and
to
wheels
and
will re-
sult in reducing the speed
of one disk
and increas-
ing the speed of the other
one; consequently, gears
T and / begin
or
to
advance
around whichever gear
has the slower mo-
tion, so
shaft
that pin and revolve in the

as
same more
gear.
direction
the
rapidly revolving If disks and E
Combination of Friction Disks and Fig. 9. Epicyclic Gear Train for Obtaining Great Reduction of Speed
amount from the central position, the and the motion of shaft C will be at a very slow rate. The direction of rotation may be changed by moving the disks upward or downward. When the regulation of Centrifugal and Inertia Governors. speed is automatically controlled, some form of governing mechanism of the centrifugal type is commonly employed.
are only
moved a
small
differential action in the gearing
action
on steam engines depend for their the effect of centrifugal force on a rotating element. upon In the case of a " fly-ball " governor (see diagram D, Fig. i,
Many
of the governors used
weights or balls attached to pivoted levers are revolved by the engine and if the speed increases above normal, the balls or weighted levers move outward from the axis of
Chapter
I)
rotation,
in
owing to the increase

of
in centrifugal force.
balls
the
position
the
revolving
may
This change be transmitted
through suitable connecting levers and rods to a valve which partly closes, thus reducing the steam supply. When a governor
of this type is applied to a Corliss engine, the release of the steam valves and the point of cut-off is controlled directly by the
governor. Most governors of the fly-ball
type are equipped

with
one
or
more
springs which tend to resist the outward
movement
volving
of the re-
balls.
The
nor,
inertia or cen-
trifugal-inertia gover-
which
is
now
used so extensively, is attached to the fly-
wheel and
Fig. 10.
Centrifugal-inertia
Type
of
Engine
Governor
regulates the speed by varying the position of the

eccentric or crankpin
that operates the valve.
The
Fig.
type of governor operates is 10. This particular governor has an inertia bar A with ends to increase the weight at the ends. This bar is enlarged
pivoted at
general principle upon which this illustrated by the design shown in
where there
is
roller
tional resistance.
The
eccentric
is
bearing to reduce the fricattached to the inertia bar
and
it
has an elongated hole or opening to permit movements
relative to the crankshaft.
a third weight
eccentric.
Z),
which balances the

coil
Directly opposite the eccentric is effect of gravity on the
A
rod
heavy
bar.
is
is attached to the inertia spring pivoted to the bar on the opposite side of
bearing
59
oil
and
is
connected to a loose-fitting piston in the
dashpot G.
flywheel revolves in the direction shown by the arrow and speed variations cause a slight movement of the inertia bar about its bearing in one direction or another, thus changing the
If position of the eccentric, which changes the point of cut-off. the speed increases, the inertia bar lags behind momentarily
The
and the steam

If
is
eccentric swings inward
cut off earlier during the stroke because the and shortens the travel of the valve.
lever
a sudden increase of load should cause the engine to run slower, A as a result of its inertia, would tend to continue running
,
at the faster speed, which would swing the lever forward about bearing B in the direction of rotation, thus increasing the valve travel and admitting more steam to the cylinder by delaying the
The spring end of the inertia bar is the heavier point of cut-off. and the speed of rotation depends entirely upon the equilibrium
between the centrifugal force acting upon the inertia bar and
the tension of the spring, while the actual movement of the governor parts is effected by the inertia of the weighted end of
the bar.
The
adjusting a by-pass valve

this general
sensitiveness of the governor may be varied by upon cylinder G. Other governors of

of springs or other details.
type vary in regard to the form of the weighted
lever
and the arrangement
The
inertia type is preferable to the purely centrifugal design for engines subjected to sudden and decided load changes.
CHAPTER
III
CONVERSION OF ROTARY AND RECTILINEAR MOTIONS

MACHINES
form
of of
many
for
different types are
equipped with some
changing a rotary motion to a rectilinear The design of such a meor straight-line motion, or vice versa. kind of motion required, the chanism may depend upon the
mechanism
amount
of
power to be transmitted, or other considerations.
In this chapter, the common or standard methods are described, and also a number of special mechanisms.
Crank and Connecting-rod.

illustrated in Fig.
i is
The crank and connecting-rod
which,
when applied tilinear movement of
to a
a very simple and common arrangement steam or gas engine, changes the rec-
the piston and cross-head to a rotary
mo-
tion for revolving the crankshaft of the engine. mechanism is also used frequently on machines of
This crank
many
differ-
ent types, not only to transform rectilinear to rotary motion, but to secure a rectilinear movement from a driving member which revolves. The air compressor is an example of the latter
application, the rotation of the crank, in this case, being changed to a rectilinear motion for the compressor piston, and there are many other examples to be found in practice. The distance
traversed
by the part moving
diameter of the circle described
in a straight line is equal to the by the center of the crankpin,
and
this distance is
known
as the stroke.
Dead-center Position.
at either
When
or
(Fig. i), it is
said to be
the center of the crankpin is on the " dead center,"
because the crank and connecting-rod are then in line, and a force or pressure applied to the piston or cross-head will not
cause the crank to revolve, so long as it remains on the dead center or in line with the direction in which the force is applied.
To
avoid difficulty in starting engines of the duplex type, such

60
as locomotives, for instance, the crankpins are located 90 degrees
ROTARY AND RECTILINEAR MOTIONS

apart, so that,
6l
when one engine is on the dead center, the other in position for transmitting the maximum amount of power; thus there is never any difficulty in starting. Relative Motions of Crankpin and Cross-head. In some
crankpin
is
cases, especially in connection with steam engine work, it is important to note the relative motions of the crankpin and crosshead, or whatever part has a straight-line movement. The
crankpin has a practically uniform velocity, but the sliding
Fig. i.
Diagrams showing Relative Motions head
of
Crankpin and Cross-
member, which in the case of a steam engine consists of the crosshead and piston, has a variable velocity. Each time the crosshead reaches the end of its stroke, it starts from a state of rest and the velocity increases during approximately one-half of its stroke and then decreases until the cross-head again comes to a The relative state of rest at the opposite end of the stroke. positions of the crankpin and cross-head also vary at every
point of the stroke; mid-position (as
for instance,
when
the crankpin
is
in the
shown
in Fig. i), the cross-head is a distance
62
of its stroke.
x away from the center
The
when
by
the cross-head has traversed one-half
its
position of the crank stroke is indicated
the lower diagram. If the crank were rotating in the direction indicated by the arrow, it would turn through some arc a less than 90 degrees, to bring the cross-head to its mid-position,
and through a greater arc

of the cross-head.
b for the
It will thus
remaining half of the stroke be seen that the relative motion

first half of
between the cross-head and crank during the stroke is different from that of the second half.
in
the
This variation
the distances
of the crank;
c,
movement
if
is
further illustrated
that the cross-head

for example,
moves
is
for equal
by locating movements
the crank
dead-center position, the distance y, but the crank is placed on the opposite dead center and then moved through an arc J, which is equal to c, the cross-head will
if
moved through an cross-head will move a
arc
from the
move a
distance
z,
which
is less
than
y.
This
is
due to the fact
that one-half of the crankpin circle curves toward the cross-head, whereas the other half curves away from it. This variation of
motion has an important effect on the design of steam-engine valve-gears, and it is objectionable in some types of mechanisms.
(The connecting-rod shown in Fig. i was drawn somewhat shorter than it should be, in order to magnify the effects of angularity.
The
length of the connecting-rod from the center of the cross-
head wrist-pin to the center of the crankpin is usually equal to from 4! to 6j times the crank radius, on steam engines.) The eccentric is a modified form of crank The Eccentric.
and produces a motion similar to that of an ordinary crank and connecting-rod. The eccentric may be considered as a crankpin which is so enlarged that it surrounds the main shaft. In reality, the eccentric g (see Fig. 1 1 Chapter I) is mounted on the shaft and is surrounded by an eccentric strap h to which
,
when a
the connecting-rod is attached. relatively small movement
The
is
eccentric
is
very useful
required, and it is not practicable to obtain it by a crank located at the end of the shaft. Eccentrics have been extensively used for operating steam engine The distance from valve-gears, and for many other purposes. the center of the eccentric to the center of the shaft upon which

it is
63
The eccentricity is known as the eccentricity. to the radius of an equivalent crank. The terms corresponds " " " and " eccentricity are sometimes used interchangethrow ably, but, according to general usage, the throw is equal to the
mounted
diameter of the
circle
described
by the
eccentric center,
and
it is
equivalent to twice the eccentricity. Crank and Slotted Cross-head.
The
irregularity in the
mo-
tion of a cross-head relative to the crank with the
form
of
crank
mechanism
illustrated in Fig.
connecting-rod. If an arc is center, the distance e will represent the displacement of the cross-head from its mid-position when the crank has turned
depends upon the length of the struck from point D with C as a

i
through 90 degrees.
As the
radius
CD
representing the length
of the connecting-rod is increased, obviously there will
be
less
irregularity in the motion.
For instance,
if
were taken as a
center
and represented the length of the connecting-rod, the displacement of the cross-head from mid-position would be Therefore, it will be seen that less, as indicated by dimension/.
ED
the greater the length of the connecting-rod, the less the irregIf it were practicable to use a connectingularity of motion. rod of very great length, an arc intersecting point and the
horizontal center-line would only be a very slight distance from the center of the main shaft. With such an arrangement, the
horizontal
same as
If the
movement of the movement
the cross-head would be practically the of the crankpin measured horizontally.
movement
tion
connecting-rod were of infinite length, theoretically the of the cross-head and crankpin in a horizontal direc-
would be alike. A simple form of mechanism for eliminating the irregularity of motion previously referred to is illustrated at A in Fig. 2. " crank and slotted cross-head " This mechanism is known as a
The cross-head a has a slot which is at or the Scotch yoke. right angles to the center-line xx representing the direction of
rectilinear
movement.
in this slot,
The crankpin
and
is
carries a block,
which
is
sliding
fit
free to revolve
about the pin.
As
the crank revolves, the distance which the crankpin moves, as measured in a horizontal direction, will be the same as the move-
64
of the cross-head.
ment
This mechanism
is
sometimes
called
a harmonic motion, because if the crank rotates uniformly, the cross-head will be given a harmonic motion. When a point, as
at
6,
moves with uniform
velocity along a circular path, point
have a harmonic motion along the center-line xx\ hence, harmonic motion may be denned as the movement of a point along the diameter of a circle, which is projected from a point moving with uniform velocity along the circumference.
c will
The crank and

types of
slotted cross-head has
been applied
steam pumps.
One
of the rods extending
to some from the
Fig. 2.
Slotted Cross-head or Scotch
Yoke
slotted cross-head carries the
steam piston and the other, the

a driven member, and
its
water piston.
The crank
is
radius
regulates the length of the stroke. By mounting a flywheel on the crankshaft, steam may be cut off before the end of the stroke
wheel.
and used expansively, because of the energy stored in the flyThe crank and slotted cross-head is a very compact form of mechanism, although the sliding motion of the block in the slotted member causes more friction and wear than the or-
65
dinary crank and connecting-rod of the type shown in Fig. i. The latter is also simpler in construction and is, therefore, used
almost exclusively as an engine connection, as well as for other classes of machinery.
many
and
The diagram B,
Fig. 2,
shows a modification
of the crank
This mechanism gives the same motion as the one illustrated at A, but the cross-head has two slots at right angles to each other, so that it can be placed
slotted cross-head or Scotch yoke.
Fig. 3.
Stationary Crank and Revolving Cylinders
anywhere on a continuous
shaft.
The
vertical slot is for the
sliding crank block, whereas the horizontal slot forms a clearance space for the shaft. With this design, the crank could be
placed at any intermediate point on the shaft without using a center crank. It is not as compact, however, as form Aj and the
which is an objectionable feature. A crank Cylinders which Revolve about a Stationary Crank. which is connected to a piston or other reciprocating part orvertical slot is not continuous,
66
dinarily revolves,
but a piston
be given a rectilinear motion the crank in a fixed position by holding and revolving the cylinder, connecting-rod, and piston about the An example illustrating this method of utilizing the crank crank.
may
relative to a cylinder
is
shown by the diagram, Fig. 3, which illustrates the general arrangement of a type of aeroplane motor that is extensively used. With this form of motor, as the cylinders revolve about the stationary crank, the pistons move in and out relative to the cylinders, the same as though the latter were stationary and the crank revolved. The cylinders form the flywheel and drive
the propeller and, as they revolve rapidly, the temperature
is
reduced sufficiently by
air cooling
and without any auxiliary
cooling device. The gyroscopic effect of the rotating cylinders The valves for also serves to steady the aeroplane in its flight. the admission of the gas and the exhaust are actuated controlling
by a
single
cam and
are closed
ing from centrifugal force. the greater the centrifugal force and also the greater the necessity for a rapid closing of the valves.
by the outward movements resultThe higher the speed of the motor,
The Cylinders which Revolve Within an Eccentric Track. design of the aeroplane motor shown in Fig. 4 illustrates another
method
of obtaining a rectilinear motion of a piston relative to a cylinder. The six cylinders are formed in one solid casting and rotate within eccentric annular tracks A which extend around
both side walls of the casing.

nions supported
The
by
A.
ball bearings B.
pistons are carried by trunThere are two of these

free to
ball bearings for each piston,
and they are
run on the
annular
carries
of tracks
tracks
it
is
with
cylinder casting revolves, it the pistons and the ball bearings; as the center offset relative to the axis about which the cylinder
When
the
rotates, the pistons are given
an inward and outward motion
pins upon which the pistons are mounted carry guide shoes that reciprocate in slots formed in
relative to the cylinders.
The
the cylinder walls for about half the length of the cylinder.
These guide shoes are intended to steady the action of the piston and reduce wear on the cylinders. The action of the motor will be more apparent by noting the
67
For instance, position of each piston relative to its cylinder. the piston shown at C is at the inner end of its stroke as it is
opposite that part of the annular tracks which is nearest to the axis about which the cylinders revolve. When the motor is in the charge of compressed gas is fired at approximately operation,
this position,
direction, the piston
and then, as the cylinders revolve in a clockwise moves outward from this point while the
Fig. 4-
Cylinders revolving within an Eccentric Track, which imparts a Reciprocating Motion to Pistons
ignited charge of gas is expanding, as indicated by the arrow extending between radial lines 2 and 3. This charge is then exhausted and a new charge is drawn in and compressed as the
cylinder and piston pass between radial lines in the illustration.
and
2,
as indicated
Rack and Gear Combination.

spur gear or pinion
is
A rack connecting with a used to change rotary motion commonly
68
Ordinarily, the spur gear
is
to rectilinear motion, or vice versa.

is
the driver, but this order
is
sometimes reversed and a rack
given a reciprocating movement for revolving a pinion. The driving mechanism of a planer, shown in Fig. 5, Chap. IV, represents a typical example of a rack and gear combination.
The rack L
is
attached to the bed or platen of the planer, and
" bullmeshing with this rack is a large gear M, known as a wheel," which receives its rotary motion through a train of gearing connecting with a shaft upon which the driving pulleys B
Fig. 5.
Crank Mechanism
for
Doubling the Stroke
are mounted.
These pulleys are driven by open and cross belts which are alternately shifted from loose pulleys to a central pulley which is keyed to the shaft. The point of reversal is
controlled
table for varying the length of the stroke. rests in V-shaped ways or guiding surfaces
by dogs K which may be adjusted along the side of the The planer table
which cause
it
to
move
link
in a straight line.
Crank Mechanism for Doubling the Stroke. mechanism is shown in Fig. 5 which makes
A
it
crank and
possible to
69
obtain a rectilinear motion approximately equal to twice the throw of the driving crank. This mechanism is shown applied to an air pump for use on automobiles, either for the inflation
of tires or in connection with engine starting apparatus requiring
compressed air. The crank proper is of the center type with a bearing on each side. The connecting-rod is attached to the
yoke A which is mounted on the main crankpin. The opposite end of this yoke is pivoted to link B which is suspended from a
pin attached to the compressor casing.
tates, this link oscillates
As the crankshaft roand so controls the position of yoke A
view to the
that the stroke of the piston is approximately doubled. The left shows the piston at the lower end of its stroke.
in a counter-clockwise direction,
As the crank turns
link
swings to the right so that the right-hand end of yoke A is forced downward and the left-hand end upward, as indicated
by
the right-hand illustration which shows the piston at the
top of its stroke. The advantage of this crank mechanism is that it enables a comparatively large capacity to be obtained from a small compact pump.
Crank-driven Pinion Engaging Upper and Lower Racks. Another method of doubling the stroke when a crank of relatively
small size is necessary, owing to a limited space, or desirable, in order to obtain a compact design, is by means of a fixed and a
movable rack having a crank-driven pinion interposed between them. The pinion is pivoted to the end of the crank connectingrod so that
crank revolves.
pinion,
to roll along the stationary rack when the As the result of this rolling movement of the the movable rack is given a rectilinear motion equal to
it is free
twice the stroke of the crank, or twice the diameter of the path described by the crankpin. This mechanism has been used for
driving the beds of cylinder presses. modification of the plain gear-driven crank
6
is shown in Fig. A which illustrates the bed motion of a two-revolution pony press. The driving and driven gears A and B are of the elliptical form in order to compensate for the motion derived from a crank ro-
tating at uniform velocity. The driven gear crank which, in turn, transmits motion to pinion
revolves the
of
C by means
the connecting-rod shown. This pinion is rolled in first one direction and then the other along the stationary rack D, and
imparts a rectilinear motion to rack E and the press bed. The that the press bed moves a distance equal to twice the distance
axis of gear
C moves, or four times the radius of the driving crank.
The
located relative to elliptical gears are so proportioned and the crank as to give a more uniform motion to the press bed than could be obtained with a crank rotating at uniform velocity.
crank, whatever part
rest,
is
With an ordinary
motion
until it
starts
given a rectilinear
increases toward the center of the stroke
and the velocity gradually and then decreases becomes zero at the opposite end of the stroke. again
from a state of
Fig. 6.
Crank-driven Pinion engaging Stationary and Movable Rack for Doubling Stroke
With
the elliptical gearing shown, as the pinion C approaches either end of its stroke and the crank advances toward the " " dead-center position, the long side or radius of the driving comes into engagement with the driven gear and increases gear
its velocity,
and
also the velocity of the crank.
stroke begins, the velocity of decreases, because the radius of the working side of the driving
As the return and crank gradually the driven gear
gear gradually diminishes; the result is that, when the crank is at right angles to the line along which the axis of pinion C moves and is in a position to impart the maximum velocity to pinion
C, the speed of the crank is slowest, because it is then driven by the shortest radius of the driving gear. As the crank moves

away from
this central position at right angles to the center-line
of motion, the speed is gradually accelerated again so that pinion
down as it would with a crank rotating at uniThe reversal of the heavy press bed is assisted by " means of " air springs or cushions, the same as on cylinder in general. This mechanism is intended for small presses. presses The toggle Single- and Double-stroke Toggle Mechanism. mechanism previously described in connection with Fig. n,
does not slow
form speed.
often utilized for changing a rotary to a rectilinear motion, especially when a powerful squeezing action is required.
Chapter
I, is
Fig. 7.
Diagrams showing Action

.
of Single-
and Double-stroke Toggle
Mechanism
An
arrangement of this kind chines, such as are employed
used on some cold-heading mafor forming heads on bolts, rivets,

is
etc.
The diagram A,
Fig. 7, illustrates a crank-driven toggle
mechanism which
gives a forward and return stroke for each revolution of the crank. When the links of the toggle are straightened, as indicated by the heavy lines, the punch which
forms the head on the work
is
at the end of its stroke,
and
it is
then withdrawn as the crank makes another half revolution.
This form of drive as applied to a cold-header is known as the " two-cycle type," because two revolutions of the crankshaft
72
are necessary to complete a rivet or bolt requiring two blows of the punch.
work cannot be done satisfactorily with a single stroke, owing to the amount of metal that must be upset in order to form the head of a bolt or rivet. A design of toggle mechanism which is extensively used on double-stroke machines is illustrated by the diagram J?, Fig. 7. With this arrangement, two blows are obtained for each revolution
Many
classes of
of
the
the crank
crank connecting with the toggle. The location of is such that the links of the toggle are straightened
before the crank has
made
is
when
the half revolution
one-half revolution; consequently, completed, the links of the toggle
are carried beyond the center-line, as indicated by the diagram, which causes the ram and die to be withdrawn preparatory
to
making a second
stroke.
As the crank continues
to
re-
volve and the toggle is again straightened, a second working stroke is made and then the ram and die are withdrawn; this
cycle of operations is repeated for each revolution of the crank. The two strokes which are obtained for each revolution of the
crank
be of unequal length, as shown by the diagram, or of equal length, depending upon the position of the crank relative
may
to the line of the straightened toggle.
A cold-header having this

"
form of drive
shaft.
is
known
as a
"
one-cycle
machine, since
it will
impart two blows to the work
for each revolution of the crank-
One way of arranging Toggle Mechanism of Drawing Press. the toggle mechanism of a drawing press is illustrated in Fig. 8. When a press of this kind is in operation, the sheet of metal
pressed firmly down upon the die face by a blankholder, while the drawing punch forces the metal into or through the die. The blank-holder prevents the sheet stock from buckto be
drawn
is
ling,
should remain in the downward position while the drawing punch is at work. Toggle mechanisms are employed on
it
and
large
drawing presses to operate the blank-holder. The toggle mechanism illustrated in Fig. 8 is operated from crank H on the main crankshaft. This crank connects with link A, the lower end of which is attached to yoke B. The upper end of

guided by link E, which is pivoted to the frame of the press, and the lower end is guided by another link C pivoted at D. These two links C and D compel the yoke to move in prac-
yoke
is
tically
crank H.
a vertical straight line when it is traversed by the action of Attached to the yoke are two other links connecting
with bellcranks
and
of the press frame.
The
which, in turn, are pivoted to the side outer arms of these bellcranks are
connected by long links or rods with cranks on the ends of two
Fig. 8.
Application of Toggle
Mechanism
to a
Drawing Press
rockshafts
J and K, at the front and rear of the press, respectively.

is
From
holder
these rockshafts, motion
transmitted to the blank.
by means
of
arms
L and links M
The dotted lines on one

and
its
side indicate the action of the rockshaft
connecting link
when
in the extreme
and G, together shafts / and K form a toggle mechanism which is straightened out at the same time that the driving crank H is passing its
y
upper position. The bellcrank levers F with the links connecting them with the rock-
74
center and the arms
L and
links
M are in
line.
This central or
straight-line position for the toggles occurs while the
blank
is
being held for the drawing operations; the blank-holder dwells or remains down long enough to enable the drawing punch to complete its
work before the sheet metal stock is released by the blank-holder. The slide to which the drawing punch is attached receives its motion from the main crankshaft.
movement
When a relatively slow but powerful a reversing screw may be employed for required, changing rotary motion to rectilinear motion. Broaching maReversing Screw.
is
chines of the horizontal type, which operate by pulling long broaches through holes in castings and forgings, are equipped with the reversing screw type of drive. As the broaching is done by
a series of cutting teeth which gradually increase in size in order to produce a hole of the required shape progressively, considerable
power
is
especially
when
required for pulling the broach through the work, cutting hard tough metal. Therefore, the drawis
given a rectilinear movement by means of a screw which does not revolve but is moved in a lengthwise direction by a nut. The screw passes through
head to which the broach
attached
is
is held against endwise movement, and,- with one rotated from the driving shaft through suitable gearing. design, This gearing is so proportioned that a comparatively slow motion
this
nut which
is
is
faster
imparted to the nut and screw for the cutting stroke and a movement for the return or idle stroke. The nut which
is
alternately connected with these two combinations of gearing by means of a clutch that is shifted by adjustable tappets or dogs that control the length of the stroke.
engages the screw
Some
of the smaller broaching
machines intended
for lighter
belt pulleys that revolve about the screw in opposite "directions, and are alternately engaged with a central clutch
work have
which transmits motion to the draw nut on the screw. Worm and Rack Drive. A worm or short screw which meshes
with a rack represents another form of reversing screw drive. This arrangement, which is often referred to as the " spiral gear," " " or Sellers drive, has been applied to a limited extent to
planers for transmitting motion from the driving shaft to the
75
planer table. Motion is transmitted from the driving shaft, through bevel gears to a shaft which extends under the bed diagonally and carries the spiral pinion or worm that meshes with a rack attached to the under side of the table. The diagonal
position of the worm-shaft or its angle relative to the rack is such that the meshing or working side of the worm will be in
alignment with the rack teeth. Smoothness of action is the principal advantage claimed for the worm and rack drive.
If a gear rotating continuDouble Rack and Shifting Gear. in one direction is located between parallel racks, so that ously it can be engaged with first one rack and then the other, these racks will be moved in opposite directions. For instance, if the top side of the gear moves one rack to the right, the lower Some flat-bed side will move the other rack toward the left. are equipped with this double-rack and shiftprinting presses ing-gear mechanism for driving the bed in first one direction and then the other. With mechanisms of this class, one rack is first traversed past the gear; when the gear and rack are entirely
disengaged, the gear is shifted axially far enough to align it with the other rack. While this shifting movement takes place, the
of the bed is arrested, and it is reversed by some auxiliary mechanism which moves it far enough to bring the other rack into engagement with the driving gear. Press bed motions of this general type differ principally in regard to the method of moving the press bed at the ends of the stroke, at the time when the driving gear and rack are disengaged. An ingenious Crank Type of Reversal for Press Bed Motion. mechanism of the double-rack and shifting-gear type is shown
motion
diagrammatically in Fig. 9. This design is applied to Miehle In the operation of presses of this flat-bed or cylinder presses. the sheets to be printed are carried around by a general type,
so that contact is made with a flat form on revolving cylinder the press bed which moves horizontally beneath the cylinder. This cylinder makes one revolution during the printing stroke
and a second revolution while the press bed is being returned. In order to avoid contact between the cylinder and the bed or form during the return stroke, the cylinder is raised slightly by
76
The
rotation of the cylinder is continuous imperative that the cylinder and press
a suitable mechanism.
in one direction
and
it is
bed move exactly in unison.
The circumferential velocity of the cylinder should equal the linear velocity of the bed, because any relative motion would cause slurring on the printed sheet and
would be impossible to obtain sharp clean-cut impressions. As the cylinder revolves at a uniform speed, obviously the mechanism for driving the bed must be designed to give a uniform motion while the impression is being made. In order to propit
Fig. 9.
Double-rack Shifting-gear and Crank Combination for Traversing Bed of a Printing Press
erly time the
motion
of the cylinder
and bed, the cylinder
is
connected by gearing and suitable shafts with gear A, which
must be designed
transmits motion to the bed; therefore, the press bed motion to reverse the movement of the bed without
reversing the motion of gear A, since this gear rotates in unison with the cylinder or continuously in one direction. This driving gear A is mounted between parallel racks B and
C, both of which are attached to and travel with the bed. The distance between the pitch lines of these racks corresponds to the pitch diameter of the driving gear A. The racks are not

directly in line,
77
so that,
but are
offset as
shown by the end view,

it will clear
when the gear is The lateral movement

and C means of a by
racks
in mesh with one rack,
the other one.
is
of gear A for aligning it alternately with derived from cam Z), which transmits motion
and yoke engaging the gear hub. When the press is in operation, the bed is moved in one direction by the engagement of gear A with rack B and in the opposite
lever
direction
by meshing gear
with rack C.
in a clockwise direction while in
mesh with rack
and the press bed (the motion of which is When the press is in motion, this will move toward the left. movement toward the left continues until the rack is entirely
;
revolving C, the latter constrained by guides)
If gear
is
out of mesh with gear A just before the disengagement of gear A and rack C, the crankpin E, which is provided with rollers, comes around and enters between the parallel faces of a fixed
The
reversing shoe F and a swinging or movable reversing shoe G. fixed shoe is rigidly attached to the press bed and rack
frame, whereas the movable shoe is pivoted and free to swivel. This swinging reversing shoe has a pin on its lower side (not shown) which engages a slot or cam that controls its swinging
movements.
for shoe
As soon
as rack
has
to clear the crankpin,
moved far enough to the left the cam swings the shoe inward
so that crankpin
is
confined temporarily between the faces of
shoes
G and F, which form a vertical guide or slot. As the crankits
pin passes
roller
on
it
lowest position and begins to move upward, the " " bears against the face of G and the load picks up
of
as gear
moves out
mesh with rack
C.
When
crankpin
arrives at the position
shown
in the illus-
tration, the motion of the press bed is reversed, because a roller on the crankpin then engages the face of shoe F thus moving the driven member toward the right. The motion continues to
be derived from the crank independently of the disengaged gear and rack, until the crankpin has passed the top quarter or
and the highest position; then gear A enters the upper rack motion is transmitted entirely through the gear and rack until
stroke.
the crank again comes into action at the opposite end of the At this end, the crankpin is again confined between a
79
and a fixed shoe /. After rack B has moved swinging shoe out of engagement with gear A crankpin E, which is now in its and continues highest position, comes into contact with shoe
,
the
movement toward
and
the right while making a quarter turn, then reverses the motion as it swings downward against
While crankpin E is controlling the motion and gear A is entirely out of mesh, this gear is shifted by cam D out of line with the rack B which it just left, and into line with
the face of shoe /.
rack C.
ingenious feature of this mechanism lies in the provision and locating the fixed and swinging of two rollers for crankpin shoes in different vertical planes. With this arrangement, each
An
roller is free to revolve in opposite directions as the
crankpin
moves along the vertical faces of the shoes. The momentum of the bed is gradually checked at the points of reversal, by air
cushions or
"
air springs." air is
plunger enters a cylinder at each
end of the stroke and

and, by when its motion
expanding, this air assists in accelerating the
compressed to arrest the movement, heavy bed
is reversed. Provision is made for regulating the air cushion or pressure according to the speed of the press. The air cushion is a feature common to flat-bed or cylinder presses
in general.
Reversal of Motion by Reciprocating Pinions. The mechanism illustrated in Fig. 10 is similar, in some respects, to the press bed motion just described, in that the parallel-rack and shiftinggear construction is employed. The method of operating the press bed at the ends of the stroke, however, is entirely different
from that shown in Fig. 9, as reciprocating pinions are used to pick up the load and reverse the motion. The uniform motion of the bed is derived from pinion A which is constantly in mesh with gear D carried on the main driving shaft. Pinion A is located between parallel racks B and C which are attached to the These racks are offset, as in the design shown in press bed. so that the pinion will clear one rack while in engagement Fig. 9,
with the other one.
The
shifting of the pinion is controlled
by
cam
F.
which transmits motion to the pinion by means of lever The pinions for reversing the motion of the bed are located
8o
at
G and
H.
The
are connected to
upon which these pinions are mounted a heavy yoke / which has a vertical slot or
shafts
groove in which a swiveling block attached to the crank This crank is rotated by the main driving shaft, and operates.
a rectilinear motion transmits to yoke J and pinions G and to the throw of the crank. This is a harmonic motion, as equal
yoke
/ and
ciple as the
well-known Scotch yoke.
the sliding crank-block operate on the same prinThe outer ends of yoke J
are supported by horizontal guides, and the pinions G and are constantly in mesh with short racks and L along which
the pinions roll as the crank moves them to and fro. The action of the mechanism will be apparent by considering
the various
stroke.
movements which occur during a forward and return The side view of the assembled mechanism shows the
press
come
left
bed in the position where the driving pinion A has just into engagement with the lower rack C. As this pinion rotates in a clockwise direction, the bed will be driven to the
with a uniform motion.
(The relative positions of pinion
A and racks B and C are clearly shown by the end view.) When the bed has moved so far to the left that pinion A is about to
out of mesh at the right-hand end of rack C, pinion (7, which, meanwhile, has been moving along its rack M, comes into enroll
gagement with another short rack

to the bed.
(see also
end view) attached
insure the proper engagement of pinion G with rack P, the action of crank relative to the motion of the bed is so timed that pinion G is rolling to the left when rack which
To
comes into engagement with it. As moving pinion A leaves rack C, pinion G, which is then in mesh with P, continues the movement of the bed toward the left until crank is in the position shown by the diagram in the lower left-hand corner of the illustration, which represents the end of the printing
is
also
to the left
stroke.
Further rotation of crank
K in
the direction indicated
by the arrow causes a reversal of the and starts the press bed toward the
mitted from
occurs,
rolling
right,
motion of pinion G motion being trans-
G to pinion A is
rack P.
While
this reversal of
movement
being shifted by
cam
into alignment with
the upper rack B.
81
has moved a quarter revolution from the position it occupies at the extreme end of the stroke, pinion A comes into mesh with the upper rack B and the short rack P
When
crank
The view at the lower right-hand corner of 10 shows pinion A about to enter rack B and pinion G leaving Fig. rack P. As the rectilinear motion of yoke / is harmonic, the
leaves pinion G.
movement
gages
of the
point of reversal
its rack,
bed is uniformly retarded as it approaches the and is then accelerated until pinion A enthe motion
is
when
uniform.
When
pinion
derived from crank
enters at the end of either rack, the velocity of the movement and the reciprocating pinion corresponds
is
from the driving pinion A so that there no abrupt change of motion as the load is being transferred from the reversing pinion to the driving pinion A As the press
to the velocity obtained
,
.
bed approaches the opposite end of its stroke, pinion comes into engagement with rack Q and continues the movement for
a short distance each side of the point of reversal or while pinion A is out of mesh with either rack and is Being shifted, the action being the same as previously described. When a gear or pinion is Napier Motion for Press Beds. in mesh with a single rack and rotates in one position, obviously
both the gear and rack must reverse their direction of motion at the end of each stroke. The gear, however, may rotate
continuously in one direction if it is arranged to engage the upper and lower sides of a rack designed especially to permit such engagement. A mechanism of this type, known as the Napier
motion and also as " mangle gearing," has been extensively used for imparting a rectilinear motion to the tables of flat-bed printing presses. The principle of the Napier motion will be
apparent by referring to Fig. n. The rack A is attached to a frame B which is secured to the table of the printing press.
The rack
teeth are of such a form that the gear

sides.
C may mesh
The
shaft
Z),
with the rack on either the upper or lower
upon which the gear C is mounted, is rotated through a universal coupling, which permits it to swing in a vertical plane so that the gear may pass from the upper side of the rack to the lower
side,
and
vice versa.
The
gear shaft
is
made
to
mdve
in a vertical
82
plane
is
by a
stationary slotted guide
E having a vertical slot that a sliding block mounted on the shaft. Sphericalengaged by shaped rollers F are mounted at each end of the rack, and the
gear has a socket or spherical depression formed in it for engaging the rollers, each time the gear moves around the end of the rack when passing from one side to the other. Opposite each
end
of the rack, there are guide plates
which are concentric with the
rollers at the
having curved surfaces ends of the rack.
Fig. ii.
The Napier Motion
for Flat-bed Printing Press
The gear C
reversal.
also carries a roller
which engages these curved
guides as the gear
moves upward
or
downward
at the points of
The
upper
action of the
side of the rack, as
mechanism is as follows: If the gear is on the shown in the illustration, and it is re-
volving to the left or counter-clockwise, the rack will be driven to the right with a velocity equal to the motion at the pitch circle of the gear. As soon as the gear engages the roller F on
the end of the rack,
plane, because
its
it
motion
begins to move downward in a vertical is constrained by guide E. When
the gear
is
in mid-position so that its axis coincides with the

center-line of the rack, it will
83
have made a quarter turn, thus the center of roller F farther to the right, a distance equal moving Farther movement of the to the radius of the pitch circle.
gear downward causes the rack to reverse and move toward the left; the gear then operates on the under side of the rack until the roller at the right-hand end of the rack is engaged, when
the
upward movement
of the gear takes place
and there
is
another reversal of motion.
The total length of the stroke is equal to the distance between the centers of the rollers on the rack, plus the pitch diameter of the gear. The length of the rack must equal the pitch circumference of the gear or some multiple of it, so that the rollers at the end will engage the socket or depression in the gear at the
points of reversal. If a gear is used having two roller spaces located 180 degrees apart, the length of the rack or the center- to center distance between the rollers may be some multiple of
half the pitch circumference.
The
teeth on each side of the
rack incline from the horizontal at the same angle as the gear axis when in its upper and lower positions, to obtain a full con-
The gear also has a plain cylindrical tact of the gear teeth. shoulder on the inner side, which rolls upon a plane surface /
at the base of the rack, to give a smoother action than would be obtained from a gear supported entirely by tooth contact. This
arrangement of gearing imparts a uniform motion to the press table, excepting any variable movement resulting from a universal joint,
of
and gives a gradual reversal of motion at the ends the stroke. The Napier motion may be designed for any
length of stroke, although the stroke remains constant, as there
no way of making an adjustment. The fly frames used in the Variable Reciprocating Motion. manufacture of cotton goods are equipped with a mechanism
is
for traversing the rovings or slightly twisted slivers of cotton
make
as they pass between the rolls of the fly frame, which is used to the rovings more slender and give them a twist. The
reason for traversing the roving as it passes between a steel and a leather-covered roll is to prevent wearing the leather covering at one place. On some machines, this reciprocating or traversing
motion
is
is
obtained from a crank or a cam.

distributes the
is
rangement
wear but,
uniform, the tendency
This simple arthe length of traverse for the leather covering to wear the
if
most at the points of reversal. In order to distribute the wear more evenly, the mechanism shown in Fig. 12 was designed. With this arrangement, the length of traverse gradually increases until it reaches a maximum and then decreases until
the shortest length of traverse is obtained; the gradual increasing and decreasing of the stroke are then repeated.
The diagram A
illustrates graphically the action
obtained with
a crank motion, and diagram
illustrates the variable stroke
Fig. 12.
Double Gear and Shifting Eccentric Combination

matically varying Traversing
for Auto-
Movements
derived from the mechanism to be described.

C, which extends the
posite each
is this
The guide-bar
and
it
full
length of the
rolls,
has small holes op-
roll
section through which the rovings pass,
guide-bar which receives the reciprocating motion.
The
automatic variation of the traversing movement is derived from two eccentrics D and E, which revolve at different rates
of speed.
These eccentrics are formed on the hubs of gears F and G, which are adjacent to each other, and are both driven by one worm H as shown by the end view. The motion of the

eccentrics
85
transmitted to guide-bar C through rods and the bracket L. One of the gears meshing with
is
/ and worm
K H
has one more tooth than the other, which causes the gears to rotate at a varying speed. The result is that the eccentrics
formed on the two gear hubs are continually changing their position relative to each other, which automatically varies the length of traverse for guide-bar C. For instance, at one period
/ and
during the cycle of movements, both eccentrics will move rods in the same direction, and, at another period, one ec-
centric rod will be
moving backward while the other
is
moving
forward, thus reducing the stroke of the guide-bar. The connections between the eccentric rods and the bracket are adjustable;
an adjustment
is
also provided
where the bracket

traversing
is
attached
to the guide-bar, so that the
maximum
movement
may
be varied.
known
What is Reciprocating Motion from Epicyclic Gearing. " " as a wabble gear is used on mowing machines for im-
parting a rapid reciprocating motion to the cutter bar. The arrangement of this gearing and the other parts of the mecha-
nism
it
is
shown
in Fig. 13.
is
The
internal gear
C is so mounted
that
on a universal gimbal D. The gear B which meshes with one side of C is mounted joint on the main shaft which connects with the driving wheels. The frame / is rigidly connected to gear C and is pivoted in the revolving part H. By this means, gear C is given an oscillating or
cannot rotate but
free to oscillate
wabbling movement, so that the entire gear 'describes or follows a circular path. This circular motion causes the teeth of gear
to
mesh with those
of gear
all
around the circumference
for
turns on a fixed shaft each rotation of the part H. This part E and acts somewhat as a flywheel to maintain steadiness of action besides constraining gear C to follow a circular path.
In this case, gear

teeth; therefore,
if
has forty-eight teeth and gear B, forty-six gear B were free to turn on its shaft, it would
be displaced two teeth for each rotation of part
H or each time
gear C completed a circular movement. Consequently, twentyand a like number of oscillations of three revolutions of part frame / would be required to turn B one revolution. Tracing
86
the motion in the opposite direction, it will be noted that one rotation of gear B, which acts as the driver when the mechanism
is
in operation, will cause twenty-three oscillations or
wabbling
movements of gear C and a like number of rotations for part H. The frame / is connected to the cutter bar by the ball joint at K, so that one turn of the driving wheels which are mounted on shaft
A will traverse the cutter bar twenty-three times. This combination of gearing makes it possible to use a gear B having only two teeth less than the number in gear C, which would be practically impossible with gears having teeth parallel to the axis of
Fig. 13.
Epicyclic or
"Wabble" Gearing
for
Producing a Rapid
Reciprocating Motion
the shaft.
With the usual forms
of epicyclic gearing, in
which a
high velocity ratio is obtained, the efficiency of transmission is low on account of the excessive tooth friction, but, in this case,
is said to be nearly as high as that obtained with a train of spur gears having the same velocity ratio. The mechanism Epicyclic Gear and Crank Combination.
the efficiency
illustrated in Fig. 14
is
applied to an electric coal-puncher.
One
of the difficulties encountered in designing coal-punchers, excepting the solenoid type, has been in changing the rotation of the motor into a reciprocating motion for the drill. If the blow is

directly
87
dependent upon the motor, the
latter causes trouble,
springs are utilized they are liable to break. Types having separate motors and flexible shaft connections have also been tried in order to avoid some of these difficulties, but compick,
if
owing and
to the vibrations
and
strains incident to the blows of the
plications were introduced
which at
least partially offset the
benefits derived.
The coal-puncher of which the mechanism shown in Fig. 14 forms a part uses both compressed air and electricity. Power for
operating the coal-puncher is obtained from a motor and the compressed air gives the blow. There is no direct connection
between the motor and striking pick, so that the vibrations are cushioned. The illustration shows the mechanical means by
which the rotation of the motor armature
ciprocating motion
is
changed to a
re-
for driving the air-compressing piston.
small pinion attached to the armature shaft engages a large driving gear (not shown) which has a solid web carrying the stud d upon which the crank pinion e is mounted. This crank pinion
has 33 teeth and meshes with internal gear / which is rigidly fastened to the frame of the machine and is concentric with the
main driving gear which surrounds
it.
The pitch diameter of the
crank pinion e is just one-half that of the internal gear/ which has 66 teeth. The crankpin g is attached to the pinion e and engages
cross-head h which
is
mounted
is
motion as pinion
e revolves
to the cross-head, there
and receives a rectilinear around the internal gear. Attached a piston-rod a which enters the airin guides
compressing cylinder and has a piston secured to its forward end. When the main driving gear is revolved by the motor, the crank pinion stud d describes a circular path, as indicated by the arrows, thus causing pinion e to revolve about the stud and around
When the pin d has moved one-quarter of a be in the position shown by the illustration to revolution, the right, and pin g attached to cross-head h will be in the center At the completion of one-half a revolution, of the internal gear.
the internal gear.
it will
pin g will have moved in a straight line a distance equal to the pitch diameter of the internal gear, and will be at the righthand end of its stroke. Similarly, at three-quarters of a
6A
88
revolution, the pin will again be in mid-position, and at the completion of a full revolution, it will be at the starting point,
as
shown by the view

as
it
to the
left.
In this way, the crank
revolves around the internal gear, transmits to pinion, and the attached cross-head h a rectilinear forward and pin g backward movement. The cross-head is mounted in guides,
Fig. 14.
Epicyclic
Gear and Crank Combination from which Reciprocating Motion is derived

line
but pin g would follow a straight not used.
even though guides were
compressed and utilized to impel the pick-carrying piston forward, all in one cylinder, will be described. A sectional view of the air cylinder is shown at C in
in
The way
which the
air is
The air cylinder contains two pistons j and k. The rear piston j is attached to rod a connecting with the cross-head. The front piston k has no connection withy, but it is attached to
Fig. 14.

the
drill
89
by the rod /. The first stroke of the pick mechanical. The rear piston j moves forward, pushing purely the front piston k. During this stroke, air is drawn into the cylinder behind the piston j, through the main inlet valve o.
or pick socket
is
On
the return stroke, this air
is
compressed and at the same time
the front piston k is drawn back by the partial vacuum created by the piston j, air being admitted in front of k through a port p.
When
the return stroke is completed, the rear piston has passed the by-pass opening q in the cylinder, which opening is between the two pistons at the time. This allows the compressed air
to force the front piston forward, exactly as in
air drill.
In
this
is,
made; that
any compressed way, the first real stroke of the machine is the mechanical stroke previously mentioned is
or
On the forward starting from rest. stroke of the piston k, the air in front escapes through the port p, but after the piston has passed and, therefore, closed this
made only once
when
port, a sufficient
amount
of air remains to cushion the
blow and
prevent damage
air
to the front cylinder head.
This cushion of
insufficient supply
may
leak somewhat,
and
to prevent
an
remaining, which would have the effect of creating a partial vacuum in this space and holding the piston on the return stroke,
a small inlet valve
r is
This allows
port
is
air to flow in
placed in the forward part of the cylinder. under these conditions before the open
the front piston k has
air
passed.
When
made
its
forward
stroke, the rear piston follows, mechanically driven as before,
and would compress the
which has just made the stroke
of
the front piston, were it not for the so-called vacuum valve s which allows all air between the pistons above a certain pressure
to escape to the atmosphere.
This action prevents the two piston
from coming together. A mechanism operating on the same general principle as the one shown in Fig. 14 has been applied to printing presses of the flat-bed type, for imparting a rectilinear motion to the bed.
faces
This mechanism has the advantage of giving a long, gradually increasing and decreasing motion with a short crank and without
the use of a connecting-rod or a slotted cross-head; therefore, it can be applied to some classes of mechanisms when there would
9o
not be sufficient room for a connecting-rod or in preference to the slotted yoke, because of mechanical objections to the latter.
In designing this mechanism, the center of pin g should exactly coincide with the pitch circle of the internal gear; then, if the
internal gear has twice as
many
teeth as the revolving gear, the
WORKING POSITION
OPEN POSITION
Fig. IS-
Mechanism
for Shifting Reciprocating Part
from Working
Position Automatically
center of g will move in a straight line, even though its motion not constrained by means of guides.
Shifting Reciprocating Part
is
machine shown
in Fig. 15 is used in a certain
from Working Position. branch
The
of the
leather business to press a leather product between a pair of dies A by a series of reciprocating motions given to the lower die, which is afterwards withdrawn to the " open position " shown at the right, to allow the removal and insertion of the work. The

mechanism
91
to be described serves to automatically locate the
lower die in the open position when the driving belt is shifted to " " the loose pulley, and into the working position as eccentric./,
which imparts motion to ram G,

to the tight pulley.
turns in the
is rotated by shifting the belt The shaft to which this eccentric is keyed direction shown by the arrow. The upper half of is
the eccentric strap

carries
an arm there were nothing
to
which
and pivoted to the connecting-rod at is attached the long spring B. If

it,
the spring would evidently tend to pull the joint In over, as shown by the right-hand view. this position, with the belt on the loose pulley, the machine is
to prevent
ready to receive the work.
The
lugs
K are attached to a leather
band friction, bearing on an extension of the eccentric surface, and shown in dotted lines behind the eccentric strap. A finger screwed to the lower half of the strap and projecting between the lugs serves to keep the brake in position. If the machine is
started
by throwing the
belt onto the tight pulley, the brake
overcome the slight and joint D is moved back to the central working position, where buffer E has reached its seat on the connecting-rod. As the shaft continues to turn, the brake slips on its seat and the eccentric gives the desired movement to the
grips the eccentric with sufficient force to
tension of spring B,
ram.
When
the operation
is
completed, the belt
is
shifted to the
and spring B turns the shaft, eccentric, and strap backward until the machine is again in the open position with the
loose pulley,
ram lowered
for driving a
sists of
to allow a change of work.
Rectilinear Motion from Revolving Pawls.

is
The mechanism
This conveyor con-
conveyor a pair of endless chains between which the conveyor buckets are carried. These buckets are hung on pivots, so that
they are kept in an upright position by gravity. The chains are equipped with wheels which run on tracks. The chains and buckets are propelled along the tracks as indicated by the arrow,
shown
in Fig. 16.
by a system
of rotating pawls
which receive
their
motion from a
large gear D.
Each pawl,
in turn, engages one of a series of
pins on the chain and, after having pushed the conveyor ahead, the pawl is raised by cam C and the next pawl repeats the oper-
as at A is passing through the lowest arc of the conveyor is propelled forward. The pawl shown at B has passed the lowest point, and it gradually lags behind the conveyor, so that the end of the pawl is readily lifted out of
ation.
When a pawl,
its travel,
engagement without interference. As will be seen, the inner end of pawl -B is in contact with the cam surface which controls
its position.
Adjustable Rectilinear Motion.
The mechanism shown
in
Fig. 17 is for traversing the table of a grinding
machine along the
Fig. 1 6.
Arrangement
for Obtaining Rectilinear
Motion from Revolving
Pawls
bed.
This machine, which is of a comparatively small size, intended for internal and external grinding operations; thus
necessary to provide
the table.
is
it
is
means for readily changing the stroke With the mechanism illustrated, any variation
of in
stroke can be obtained from zero to the
maximum
while the
machine
is
operating.
The motion
for the table is derived
from
a heart-shaped cam C mounted on a vertical shaft which is driven through a speed-changing mechanism. This cam engages a roll
attached to the lower side of an oscillating arm A having on its upper side another roll B which can be adjusted relative to the

pivot
93
P about which the arm oscillates. This upper roll operates between the parallel faces of yoke D, and the latter is attached to a rod E located beneath the table of the machine. On the
under side of the table and extending throughout its entire length is a dovetailed slide-way in which is fitted a block that is attached
and moves with the reciprocating rod E. By means of a suitable lever, this block which fits into the dovetailed slide-way,
to
can be clamped in various positions for changing the location of

the table.
The
action of the
mechanism
is
as follows
When
the
cam C
is
rotating,
arm
oscillates
about pivot
P and, through
Fig. 17.
Cam and
Slotted Cross-head Combination with Adjustment

for Varying Stroke
roller
B, transmits a rectilinear motion to yoke
Z>,
rod E, and the

is
table.
The length
of this
movement
or stroke
governed by
the position of roll B relative to pivot P, which may be varied by means of a screw that is connected through a universal joint
is mounted. with a shaft upon which handwheel When roll B is moved inward until it is directly over pivot P, no movement will be imparted to yoke D or the table.
The dropMotion of Drop-hammer Lifting Mechanism. hammers used for making drop-forgings are so designed that the hammer head is raised by rolls which run in opposite directions
94
and bear against opposite sides of a board attached to the hammer head. Front and side elevations of a drop-hammer lifting mechanism are shown in Fig. 18. The board A passes between
the rolls
other one
drawn
of the
a fixed position and the the board and then withalternately pressed against from it, when the hammer is in operation. The pressure
roll rotates in
is
and C.
One
movable
is
roll is
it
released for allowing
applied for raising the hammer head and to drop upon the work. The roll that is
usually the front one which has an eccentric bearing so that a slight rotary movement will cause the roll to release
withdrawn
Fig. 18.
Board Drop-hammer
Lifting
Mechanism
As the hammer drops and approaches the bottom of its stroke, it engages some form of trip or latch which holds the eccentric roll in the outward position so that the roll moves in
the board.
against the board
;
the
hammer is
then immediately elevated pre-
paratory to striking another blow.
As the hammer approaches
the top of its stroke, the eccentric roll is again automatically withdrawn, thus stopping any further upward movement. The hammer will then fall and repeat the cycle of movements and will
continue to run automatically, provided the board clamps at The position of these clamps are not allowed to grip the board.
is
controlled
by a
foot-treadle.
When
this treadle is released,
95
starts to
the clamps grip the board as it reaches the top of its stroke and move downward, so that the hammering action discontinues until the foot- treadle
is
again depressed. This mechanism for transmitting the rotary motion of the rolls to board A, which has a rectilinear movement, is similar in principle to the rack and
is transmitted entirely by frictional means of teeth which give a positive drive. by The piston Combined Rectilinear and Rotary Movements. of the pump shown in Fig. 19 has, in addition to a rectilinear movement, a rotary motion. This pump was designed for
pinion, except that
motion
contact instead of
pumping water or other
liquids containing foreign materials,

etc.,
such as weeds, pieces of rope, paper,
which might enter the
Fig. 19.
Piston having Combined Rectilinear and Rotary
Movements
pump
cylinder.
Instead of using suction or discharge valves

is
which would become clogged and cause trouble, the opening and
closing of the ports
controlled
by the rotary movement
of
and any foreign materials of the kinds mentioned are by the edges of the ports. The rectilinear motion of the piston is obtained from a crank. A miter gear keyed to the end of the crankpin meshes with a mating gear keyed to the end of the connecting-rod, so that, as the piston is moved in and out,
the piston,
sheared
off
The piston is of the trunk type also given a rotary motion. with an opening at both ends and a partition in the center. The head end at the left of the partition contains a port which alit is
96
ternately registers with the suction and delivery ports. When the piston is in the position shown, both ports are closed, but,
as soon as the
pump
rotates in the direction indicated
by the
arrow, the suction port begins to open. When the crank has moved 90 degrees, the piston port will be exactly over the suction
port and,
will again
when
be closed.
the opposite dead center is reached, both ports When the crank is on the bottom quarter
or at the center of the return stroke, the piston port will be
opposite the delivery port.
CHAPTER
IV
A REVERSAL of motion is essential to the operation of many difMachine parts having a rectilinear movement, and many rotating parts also revolve first in one direction and then the other. The reversal in some cases is applied to a single shaft or slide and, in other instances, an entire train of mechanism is given a reversal of motion. The types of reversing mechanisms vary considerably, both as to principle of operation and as to form or design. Some are so arranged that the reversal of
ferent forms of mechanism.
or straight-line motion must,
of necessity, reverse their
motion occurs at a fixed point in the cycle of movements, whereas, with other designs, the point of reversal may be changed by means of adjustable dogs or tappets which are attached to the movable
part and control the action of the reversing mechanism.
is
The
adjustable type length of the stroke made by a cutting tool or machine table so that the stroke will conform to the length of the work. Reversing mechanisms also differ in that some are hand-controlled crank-driven slide and others are operated automatically.
required on machine
tools for varying the
might be regarded as a form of reversing mechanism, since the member having a rectilinear movement reverses its motion at
the end of each stroke.
reversing mechanism
illustrated
In this chapter, however, the forms of and described will be those
intended primarily for reversing motion. A simple Intermediate Spur Gears for Reversing Motion. method of obtaining a reversal of motion by means of spur gears is shown at A and B in Fig. i, where the reversing gears used
on some designs of lathe heads tocks are illustrated diagramThe two intermediate gears b and c are mounted on matically. a swiveling arm which can be adjusted for engaging either one When the gears of the intermediate gears with the spindle gear.
97
are in the position shown at A the drive is from a through c to d. the arm carrying the intermediate gears is shifted as
,
When
indicated at Bj the motion is transmitted through both intermediate gears or from a through b and c to d, thus reversing the This mechanism, as applied to a lathe, direction of rotation.
is
used for reversing the rotation of the lead-screw when cutting left-hand threads, in order to make the tool carriage travel from
left to right.
Another method of obtaining a reversal of rotation by means of an intermediate gear is illustrated by diagram C, Fig. i. In this case, there are two sets of gearing between the driving and
Fig. z.
Common Methods
of Obtaining a Reversal of
Motion
is
driven shafts.
e to /.
For the forward motion, the drive

the rotation of the driven shaft
is
from gear
When
is
to be reversed,
and into mesh with the intermediate shown by the dotted lines, so that motion is transmitted through e, g, and h. This general arrangement for obgear e gear
shifted to the left
g,
as
taining a reversal of rotation is applied extensively to the transmission gearing of automobiles.
Bevel-gear Type of Reversing Mechanism.

of three bevel gears, as illustrated
combination
i, is
by diagram D, Fig.
applied
to
many
different classes of
mechanisms
for obtaining a reversal
of motion, especially
99
when the reversing action is automatically With the usual arrangement, gear j is the driver and it is constantly in mesh with the bevel pinions / and k. These bevel pinions are loose upon the driven shaft and have
controlled.
a clutch
m interposed between them.
This clutch
is free
to
move
endwise along the shaft, but it slides along a key or feather which compels it to revolve with the shaft. Each bevel pinion has
teeth corresponding to the clutch teeth, so that the engagement of the clutch with either pinion locks it to the shaft. Since these
bevel pinions revolve in opposite directions, as indicated by the arrows, the rotation of the driven shaft is reversed as clutch
is
shifted
from one gear to the other.

"
neutral
"
position,
it
When
the clutch
is
in
the central or
does not engage either gear,
and no motion is transmitted to the driven shaft. Many of the reversing mechanisms which are equipped with this bevel gear combination differ in regard to the method of operating the For instance, clutch m might be shifted by the direct clutch. action of a slide or table having a rectilinear motion, or an auxiliary mechanism might be utilized to give the clutch a more rapid
movement
at the point of reversal. features will be referred to later.
Some
of these auxiliary
On Two-speed Reversing Mechanism of Bevel-gear Type. some classes of machinery, it is desirable to have a relatively slow motion in one direction followed by a rapid return movement, in order to reduce the idle or non-productive period. One design of reversing mechanism of the bevel-gear type, by means of which a slow forward speed and a rapid return speed may be
obtained,
is
illustrated at
in Fig.
i.
In this case, there are
two driving as well as two driven gears. The larger driver n is made cup-shaped so that a smaller driver o can be placed inside.
When
fast speed is obtained, and,
the clutch engages the smaller driven gear p, the when the clutch engages gear q the
y
speed of the driven shaft
is
reduced an amount depending upon
the ratio of the slow-speed gearing. Reversing mechanisms of this general type are not adapted for reversing the motion of
heavy
slides
or
work
because of
the
excessive
tables nor for fast-running machinery, shocks and stresses incident to a
100
of high velocities or
sudden reversal of movement in case

loads.
heavy
is
Reversal of Motion with Friction Disks.
When motion
by
is
transmitted between shafts located at right angles to each other the type of frictional transmission shown at B in Fig. 14,
Chapter
I,
a reversal of rotation
is
easily obtained.
As
disk c
is
shifted inward along the face of disk J, the velocity ratio
gradually reduced, and when disk c passes the axis of disk d, the direction of rotation is reversed. This form of transmission has
been applied to the feeding mechanisms of certain types of machine tools, and to other classes of machinery, especially where
simplicity of design
sential factors.
and ease of operation and control are esOne method of arranging this form of drive, as
member on a
applied to an automobile transmission, is to mount the driving sliding shaft which enables the driving and driven disk to be readily disengaged, thus combining in one simple mech-
anism the clutching, speed-changing, and reversing functions. Reversal from Open and Crossed Belts. Shafts are often
connected with open and crossed belts for permitting a reversal
of rotation. in Fig.
i.
The arrangement
is
illustrated
central pulley
There are three pulleys / is keyed or attached to the
by the diagram F on the driven shaft. The

shaft,
whereas the
outer pulleys s and u are loose and free to revolve upon the shaft. When the " open " belt r is shifted onto the tight pulley /, the
driven shaft revolves in one direction and
its
rotation
is
re-
versed
when
the crossed belt
replaces the open belt on the
tight pulley.
sometimes modified by having two pulleys on the driven shaft and a clutch interposed between the pulleys, so that either of them may be made the driven member.
is
This form of drive
Thus, when the clutch is engaged with the pulley connecting with the open belt, the rotation is the reverse of that which is
obtained
belt.
tools
when the clutch engages the pulley driven by the crossed The countershafts for engine lathes and other machine which may require a reversal of movement are commonly
Open and
crossed belts are also apmotion of the platen
arranged in this manner.
plied to belt-driven planers for reversing the
REVERSING.
or
ÔTAN^SM;
^>
A
IO I
work
table.
Many
planer drives have pulleys which are so
common proportioned as to give a rapid return movement. is to place a central or tight pulley on the driven arrangement
shaft which has
is
two steps or diameters, the smaller one
of
which
for obtaining a fast return motion.
in place of gearing, for reversing
Incidentally, belt drives of the type referred to are often used heavy or fast running parts,
slip
because the belts
somewhat if the load becomes excessive, due to the stopping and starting at the points of reversal, and this slipping action automatically protects the mechanism from
injurious shocks or stresses.
When a reversal of motion Operation of Reversing Clutches. depends upon the action of a clutch which is shifted from one
gear to another revolving in an opposite direction, it is essential to operate the clutch rapidly and to secure a full engagement of
against disengagement of the clutch as the result of vibrations incident to the operation of the machine. There are two common methods
of controlling the clutches used in connection
the clutch teeth.
Provision should also be
made
type of reversing
mechanism illustrated at
D in Fig.
with the bevel-gear i One form

.
of control may be defined as the swinging-latch type and the other as the beveled-plunger type. The general principle of operation is the same in each case, and is as follows: When the
work
end
table, or
of its
whatever part is to be reversed, approaches the stroke, a spring is compressed, and then a latch or trip
allows this compressed spring to suddenly and rapidly throw the Reversing mechareversing clutch from one gear to the other. " " nisms of this general design are often called the load-and-fire type, because the spring is first loaded or compressed and then
of
tripped to secure a rapid movement of the clutch and a reversal motion at a predetermined point within close limits. The
action of the compressed spring also insures a full engagement of the clutch teeth and prevents the clutch from stopping in the
central or neutral position,
not used and the
momentum
which might occur if a spring were of the part to be reversed were
insufficient to carry the clutch across the space intervening be-
tween the two reversing gears.
IO2
.MOVEMENTS
The reversing Latch Type of Reversing Clutch Control. mechanism illustrated in Fig. 2 is a bevel-gear type equipped with the swinging latch form of clutch control. This mechanism
is
applied to a cylindrical grinding machine for reversing the motion of the work table, and is located at the rear of the machine.
The
rockshaft
extends through to the front of the machine
Fig. 2.
Spring and Latch Type of Reversing Clutch Control
and has attached to it a lever which is engaged by dogs on the work table, the distance between these dogs being varied according to the length of stroke required. At the rear end of rockshaft H there is a lever G which, by means of link /, transmits motion to the reversing mechanism. As the work table approaches the end of its stroke, lever G swings either to the If the motion is to the left, right or left as the case may be. tappet A, connected to link /, compresses spring L on rod
and
forces block
103
of latch B.
Continued movement
against a square shoulder on the lower side of tappet A to the left causes
the beveled side of
A
is
to
lift
which, with rod
M,
thrown rapidly to the
latch B, thus releasing block D, left under the im-
pulse of the compressed spring L. After the movement of shaft

latch
M to
the
left,
the shoulder on
on rod also and with it the reversing clutch F which is keyed to this shaft. The motion which prior to reversal was transmitted through bevel pinion P to the main gear R is now from pinion Q to R so that the movement of the work table is reversed. When the work table approaches the end of its stroke in the other direction, tappet A is moved to the right, thus compressing spring 5*. Then latch C is lifted by the beveled edge on A and the parts are quickly shifted to the right N, and
drops in behind block E.
to the left
The
fork
throws shaft
by spring S, thus again reversing the motion. If the operator desires to stop the traversing
movement
at
the end of the stroke, this may be done by the movement of a knob located in the center of the table-traversing handwheel at
the front of the machine.
This knob
is
connected with a plunger
which, by pressing the knob, may be held under pressure against the reversing clutch F. When this clutch is shifted at
by springs L or S, plunger T drops into a groove in clutch F, thus holding it in the central or neutral
the end of the stroke either
The knob previously referred to may be set at any part of the stroke to stop the traversing movement at the end of that The withdrawal of the knob again starts the traversing stroke. movement without requiring any further action on the part of the operator. The shaft connecting with bevel gear R extends
position.
front of the machine and, through suitable gearing, transmits a rectilinear motion to the work table of the grinding
to the
machine.
Beveled Plunger Control for Reversing Clutch.
An example
of the beveled plunger type of clutch control for a reversing
mechanism
is
shown
in Fig. 3.
This design
is
also intended for a
cylindrical grinding machine.
The point
of reversal is controlled
by the tappets
7A
which are adjusted along the work table to vary
IO4
These tappets alternately engage the length of the stroke. lever B at the ends of the stroke and, by swinging this lever about its pivot, shift bar C which transmits motion to the reversing clutch. If the work table is moving toward the right, the tappet at the left engages lever B as the table approaches the
of the lower end of reversing the beveled plunger downward, thus compressing a spring that is located beneath it. When the point of the V-shaped end of lever B has passed the point of
end
of its stroke.
The movements
left forces
lever
towards the
plunger D, the latter
is
suddenly forced upward by the com-
îiiiiiiiyiiiiiiiiiiiMiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiyiiiiiiiiiiiiuiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiyiiiiiiiiiiii
C/
Fig. 3.
Spring and Beveled Plunger Control for Reversing Clutch
pressed spring and lever B, rod C, and the reversing clutch are
shifted rapidly.
There is a certain amount of lost motion between the studs E on bar C and the reversing lever B. As the result of this lost
motion, the clutch is not entirely disengaged until the V-shaped point of the reversing lever has passed the point of plunger D; the reversing clutch is withdrawn slowly from the bevel pinion
which
it
to shift rapidly into The clutch is held in
engages until the sudden action of plunger D causes it engagement with the opposite bevel pinion.
by
engagement until the next reversal of motion upward pressure of the plunger against the beveled end of the reversing lever B. With the particular design illustrated,
the
105
the point of reversal can also be controlled by hand lever F which is connected to rod C; by placing this lever in a central position,
the clutch
is
shifted to neutral
and the movement
of the
work
table discontinued.
The Controlling Point of Reversal by Special Mechanisms. points of reversal for a reciprocating slide are usually controlled
trip dogs mounted directly on the slide and adjusted to give the required length of travel or stroke. It is not always conFor venient, however, to control the reversal in this way.
by
instance, if the operating slide is at the rear of a machine where the trip dogs cannot be adjusted readily, some form of mechanism which operates in unison with the slide may be used to per-
mit locating the

simple
trip
dogs at the front of the machine.
method
of controlling the points of reversal

is
from the
front of the
slide travels
of stroke is
applied to Landis grinders. The wheel at the rear of the machine and the length along ways regulated in accordance with the length of the work
machine
by two
trip
of the machine.
dogs mounted on a wheel or circular rack at the front The shaft carrying this wheel extends through
is
the machine and
lating or turning
other,
connected by gearing, so that it has an oscilmovement in first one direction and then the which movements correspond to, and are in unison with
on the periphery
those of the wheel carriage at the rear. Worm teeth are formed of the trip-dog wheel and the dogs are held in
position by worms which may be lifted out of engagement when the dogs are to be adjusted considerably. The dogs alternately
strike a tappet or lever
which controls the movements
of the
reversing clutch.
Another method
slide is
of controlling the reversing points of a rear
by means
of a shaft
reciprocating slide
connected through gearing with the and having at the front end a pinion meshing
trip dogs.
with a sliding rack carrying the

it
As the
rear slide
turns the pinion shaft in first one direction and then operates, the other, which imparts a reciprocating motion to the rack. The trip dogs attached to the rack, by engaging a lever, cause a
reversal of
motion by means
of a clutch-and-gear type of reversing
mechanism.
io6
indirect or independent
An
chine
method
of controlling the points of
reversal
is
Sharpe automatic bevel gear cutting maThe cutter-slide A must be set at illustrated in Fig. 4.
on a Brown
&
an angle corresponding to the inclination of the gear teeth to be cut, so that it would be difficult to have the trip dogs attached To avoid such an arrangement, a sliding directly to this slide. rack B is employed. This rack meshes with a pinion C which
rotates in unison with the feeding of the cutter-slide, since this
Fig. 4.
Independent Method of Controlling Reversal of an Adjustable Slide on a Bevel Gear Cutting Machine
pinion and the slide derive their motion from the same shaft. As pinion C rotates in first one direction and then the other, it
traverses the rack B, which,
controls the action of the reversing
With this be made less than the
by means of the adjustable dogs E, mechanism enclosed at F. the traversing movement of the rack can arrangement,
travel of the cutter-slide,
if
this is desirable
because of limited space.
On
the other hand,
if
the traversing
essential to
of
movement
reverse
it
of the slide is to
be very short and
it is
at a given point within close limits, the
movements
107
compared with the motion
the reverse controlling rack can be increased considerably as of the cutter-slide.
Mechanism
and crossed
for Shifting
belts illustrated
Open and Crossed by diagram F,
Belts.
The open
are shifted
Fig.
i,
automatically for obtaining a reversal of motion, when used to drive such machines as planers, broaching machines, or other
classes of
ation
mechanisms which are designed for continuous operand equipped with this form of drive. A side elevation
Fig. 5.
Reversing Mechanism of a Belt-driven Planer
and plan
is
of the automatic belt-shifting device used
on a planer
illustrated in Fig. 5.
are
mounted
shaft on which the belt pulleys transmits motion to the planer table A through
The
a train of gearing which gives a suitable speed reduction.
In
order to reverse the motion of the work table, this entire train of gearing is reversed by alternately shifting the open and
crossed belts onto the central pulley, which is attached to the shaft. The length of the stroke is governed by the distance
io8
between the two dogs
K which may be adjusted

The
along a groove
at the side of the table.
position of each belt is controlled
at the end through which the These two guides or shifters, which are in the belt passes. form of bellcranks, are pivoted and the inner ends carry small
rollers that
by a guide C having an opening
plate or lever
is
engage a groove in the cam-plate D. This campivoted at E and is connected by a link F with the arm
which
is
pivoted at H.
in operation, the table
is
When
the planer
is
depending upon which belt
movement has continued
far
moves in a direction on the tight pulley. When this enough to bring one of the dogs
Fig. 6.
Diagram showing Arrangement of Epicyclic Gearing Obtaining Forward and Reverse Motions
for
into contact with arm G, the latter is pushed over about its pivot, thus imparting a swinging movement to the cam-plate D. The groove in this cam-plate is so formed that the belt on the tight pulley is shifted to the loose pulley and the other belt is moved
over to the driving position on the tight pulley. At the end of the return stroke, the other dog engages arm G, thus swinging the cam-plate in the opposite direction and again reversing the
motion.
train Reversal of Motion through Epicyclic Gearing. of epicyclic or differential gearing may be designed to give a This form of transmission has been applied reversal of motion.
to
I0 9
principle governis
some automobiles
6.
of the smaller sizes.
The
ing the operation of one of the earlier designs
shown by the
diagram, Fig.
Two
sets of differential gears, indicated at
A and
B, are mounted inside of drums.
These drums
may
be
revolved independently for obtaining the slow forward speed and a reverse motion, or they may be locked together so as to revolve as a unit with the crankshaft for obtaining the direct highis
speed drive. The central gear a is the driver in each case, and keyed to the crankshaft. The slow forward speed is obtained To obtain a reduction of with the combination illustrated at A
.
Fig. 7.
Another Arrangement of Epicyclic Gearing which gives Forward and Reverse Motions
of a
speed, the internal gear b is held stationary by the application brake-band to its periphery; the pinions c carried by the driven member are then forced by the driving gear a to roll
around inside of the internal gear, thus transmitting a slow rotary motion to the driven member attached to the pinions. In order
to obtain a reversal of
motion through the combination
of gear-
ing illustrated at B, the disk carrying the pinions is prevented
from rotating by the gripping action of another brake-band, so that the pinions merely revolve on their studs and rotate the
110
In this case, the internal
internal gear in a reverse direction.
gear
is
the driven
member and
transmits motion to the driving
sprocket. reversal of motion
may
also
be obtained with the train of
In this case, there is no interepicyclic gearing shown in Fig. 7. nal gear. Gear A is mounted on the sleeve of sprocket Ai gear D is keyed to shaft K, and gear F is attached to the extended hub of drum H. The three gears, B, C, and E are locked together and revolve upon a pin carried by drum G. A duplicate set is also located on the opposite
y
side of the
drum, as the
illustra-
tion shows.
When
this
drum
is
held stationary gear A
by a brake-band, and sprocket A\ are driven
at a slow forward speed through

gears D, C,
Fig. 8.
will
Ratchet Mechanism which
Automatically Reverse after making a Predetermined Number of Revolutions
and B, gears D and A revolving in the same direction. m, The direct high-speed drive IS ob-,.
.
-\
-\
i_
ing as a unit with shaft K. a brake-band, gear causes gear to revolve about the stationF in a direction opposite to the rotation of D\ conseary gear
when clutch J is engaged, mechanism then revolvWhen drum H is held stationary by

tained
A . , ,
..
the whole
same direction in which drum G and the planetary gears B, C, and E are moving, thus reversing the motion of gear A and the sprocket. Automatic Ratchet Reversing Mechanism. The simple deof ratchet reversing mechanism illustrated in Fig. 8 enables sign
quently, gear
is
forced to follow in the
a ratchet wheel to be automatically reversed after making a predetermined number of revolutions, and the arrangement is
such that the time of reversal or the number of revolutions
made
will
by
the driven ratchet prior to reversal
may
be varied at
is
throughout a wide range.

oscillating
The double pawl A
carried
by an
ratchet B.
arm (not shown), and this pawl engages the driven Mounted concentrically with B there is a smaller
controlling ratchet C which is normally restrained from rotating by suitable frictional resistance. The larger diameter of ratchet
III
B prevents
pawl
from engaging the smaller ratchet C, except
when the deep notch D is reached by the pawl which then drops down into engagement with C. The reversal of motion is effected by the engagement of the The number extension on pawl A with one of the trip dogs E. of revolutions made by r "tenet B prior to reversal depends upon the number of deep notches D and the position of the trip dogs E. When this mechanism is in operation, ratchet B receives an
intermittent motion from the oscillating pawl A and the controlling ratchet C remains stationary until one of the deep notches then ratchets B and C rotate together is engaged by pawl A
an amount depending upon the motion

ling ratchet
is
engaged.
of the pawl. Controlthen remains stationary until another deep notch The repeated movements of ratchet C each time the
finally bring
pawl drops into a deep notch,
one of the trip dogs

latter is
into contact with the projection

its
on the pawl; the
opposite end engages ratchet B the direction of rotation is reversed. The and, consequently, time of reversal may be controlled by varying the distance be-
then swung around so that
tween the
trip
dogs and by having one or more deep notches in
the driven ratchet.
Combined Reversing and Feeding Movements.
Some
re-
versing mechanisms are so designed that the longitudinal movement of a reversing rod is accompanied by a rotary motion for
imparting a feeding movement at the time reversal occurs. A reversing device of this kind, as applied to a Richards' sideplaning machine, is illustrated in Fig. 9. The saddle A is traversed along the bed B by means of a screw, the rotation of which is reversed by open and crossed belts that are alternately
shifted
The two
from loose pulleys to a tight pulley attached to the screw. projecting arms C which are bolted to A strike dogs D
its
mounted on rod E, which, by

lengthwise direction,
following manner:
tailed view.
it is
longitudinal
movement,
ac-
tuates the belt-shifting mechanism.
When
rod
E is
is
shifted in a
also given a rotary
motion in the
a bushing
Within the bearing

cut into
it,
there
having cam grooves
as
These grooves receive
shown by the enlarged derollers carried by a pin that
112
With
this
passes through the rod E.
arrangement, any endwise

resulting
movement
of rod
E is accompanied by a rotary motion

rollers
with the helical grooves in the fixed bushings of bearings F. This rotary movement is transmitted through bevel gears to a rod G which imparts a
feeding movement to the feed-screw of the toolslide, through the medium of ratchet gearing. Automatic Control of Spindle Reversal. Fig. 10 represents a sectional view through the bed of an automatic screw ma-
from the engagement of the
downward
chine, beneath the headstock,
and
illustrates
the mechanism
Fig. 9.
ing
Reverse Controlling Mechanism so arranged that Motion of ReversRod is accompanied by a Rotary Movement for Feeding Tool
for automatically controlling the reversal of the spindle rotation.
This machine
stant speed.
is
driven
The
various
by a single belt pulley rotating at conmovements of the machine, other
than revolving the spindle, are derived from a shaft at the rear which rotates at a constant speed. On this shaft is mounted a
series of automatically-controlled clutches
which are similar in
action to those used on punch-presses. These clutches control the feeding of the stock, the opening and closing of the chuck,
the revolving of the turret, the reversing of the main spindle and the changing of the speed from fast to slow, or vice versa. This back-shaft is connected by change-gearing through a worm
drive,
with a slow moving camshaft

for the turret
at the front on which are
mounted the cams
and
cross-slide
movements and
a series of dog carriers
B carrying tappets or dogs which control the action of the different clutches on the back-shaft. The ratio
of the change-gears previously referred to determines the du-
ration of the cycle of operations and, consequently, the length of time it takes to make a given piece of work. The main spindle is reversed by a clutch located between two
clutch
members revolving
in opposite directions.
The
carrier
Fig. 10.
Arrangement
for Automatically Controlling Spindle Reversal
shown at C
has an annular T-slot in which adjustable dogs like the one on lever are mounted. These dogs engage a tappet
E, the rear end of which carries a screw F, the cylindrical point of which enters a cam groove in clutch G. This clutch is
mounted
loosely
on shaft
is is
plan view of the cam
The cam groove

side
H which revolves continuously. A shown in detail above the end view. exactly the same on the other side as on the
shown, the clutch being arranged to engage each half revolution and then automatically disengage. The normal position
114
of the pin
of the groove
F is in the recess at a. When it is lowered entirely out by the action of dog C on tappet D against the
pressure of spring /, this releases clutch G, which is forced forward by a spring coiled about the shaft, until it engages a
mating member O, fastened to shaft H, and begins to revolve. Meanwhile dog C has passed tappet D, allowing pin F to drop into
the
cam groove
again.
The
clutch G, as
it
revolves, brings in-
clined face b of the groove (or a similar incline on the opposite side) into contact with F, and the continued revolution of G,
through the action of this inclination on the pin, forces the clutch teeth out of engagement, stopping G again with the pin in position a as at the start. A cam P, also loose on the shaft H, is
keyed to G.
This
cam engages a
roll
on the end
of
lever
K, which operates a clutch fork, main spindle clutch. When it

spindle, another
is
controlling the position of the is time to again reverse the
dog
C is set in the proper position, and the clutch
tripped, revolving for a second time a half revolution and and the spindle clutch to stopping, thus operating lever the direction of the spindle rotation. This represents change the normal procedure in cases where the time taken to make
one piece
is is
is
short enough so that the rotation of dog carrier
reasonably rapid. For many pieces, however, this movement so slow that dog C does not come out from under tappet in
tune to allow pin F to drop into the cam groove before the clutch has made the required half revolution. In such cases, incline b would pass without disengaging the clutch and pin F
could not enter until the next recess came around and the next
incline
ft;
revolution instead of a half revolution.
hence the clutch would be stopped at the end of one This difficulty has been
very simply overcome by the following means:

is pivoted to lever E as shown, and is forced back a shoulder to the position indicated, by a spring against located in a drilled hole and pressing against a plunger bearing
Tappet
on D.
This spring
is
of such strength as
that the
first effect of
dog C, when
it strikes
compared with spring D, is to move the
backward without raising lever E. When D has been pressed so far back that it strikes the shoulder at the left, furlatter
ther
115
pin F is withdrawn and the latter is allowed to on the shaft H, and starts to revolve. engage fixed member A cam surface c is provided on G which, immediately after the clutch begins to rotate, strikes pin F and depresses it still further, thus raising tappet D clear above the point of dog C, and allowing it to swing back to its normal position against the
movement being
impossible,
E is raised,
from the cam
slot in the clutch G,
shoulder at the right under the influence of spring M. Lever is then ready to drop instantly, as and C are entirely clear of
each other.
As soon as the end of cam projection c passes, F into the groove and the rotation of the cam is arrested after drops a half revolution, as required. When it is known that shaft
of
revolves at 120 revolutions per minute, so that the half revolution G occupies but one-fourth second, it will be seen that the device has a difficult duty to perform, but operates in a very
satisfactory manner. Automatic Variation in Point of Reversal.

interesting
One
of the
many
mechanisms found on textile machinery is the one on fly frames for controlling the winding of the roving employed on the bobbin. The way the bobbins are driven at a decreasing
rate of speed as the diameter increases is explained in connection with Fig. 13, Chapter VIII, which shows diagrammatically the relation of the different parts. As mentioned in connection
with that
bobbins not only revolve but are given a vertical reciprocating motion, in order to wind the roving onto them in successive helical layers. This winding of the roving
illustration, the
onto the bobbin involves, in addition to decreasing the speed as the diameter increases, a decrease in the traversing speed of the bobbin and a gradual shortening of the bobbin travel as one layer
of roving is
wound upon
another.
The bobbin should move a
distance equal to the diameter of the roving while it rotates " " a distance equal to one revolution; thererelative to the flyer as the bobbin speed gradually diminishes, it is also necesfore,
sary to decrease the rate of traverse, so that each layer of the roving will be coiled closely. The change in the point of reversal in order to shorten the stroke as the bobbin increases in diameter
is
required in order to form conical ends on the
wound bobbin
n6
and a firm winding that will not unravel and cause trouble, such as would be the result of attempting to wind each layer the These changes occur simultaneously, full length of the bobbin.
although they "
will
be referred to separately in describing the

illustrated diagrammatically in Fig.
builder motion
"
n.
engage a screw A, which has a right-hand plates thread extending along one-half its length and a left-hand thread, along the remaining half.
The
and
These plates and the screw

are
traversed
vertically
with the bobbin carriage.
The
ries
vertical shaft
car-
having two arms located 180 degrees

a dog
apart.
At each end
of
the stroke, shaft makes a half turn which motion

is
utilized
for
reversing
the
motion, for shifting the cone belt slightly in

decrease
the
also for short-
order to
speed, and
ening the stroke of the bobbin. As the plates B
and C move vertically, one end of the tumbling dog E bears against them until
it
Fig.
ii.
slides
off
at one end.
Varying Point of Reversal and Speed of Rotation

for
Mechanism
Prior
to
the
disengage-
ment
of the
dog with one
of the plates, gear
a space on the rim of gear
on the cone-pulley shaft revolves idly in G where the teeth are omitted.
There are two of these spaces located 180 degrees apart, as the illustration indicates. One of the projecting pins on the disk
H at
the lower end of shaft

it
is
in
engagement with a lever

slides off
which has attached to
a spring that holds the lever against a
pin and tends to turn shaft D.
When dog E
one end
of a plate, shaft
17
is
spring and
lever
to bring gear
turned far enough by the action of the G into mesh with pinion F\ con-
sequently, gear G is revolved one-half turn or until pinion F engages the space on the opposite side where there are no teeth.
The
shifts the reversing gears through partial rotation of shaft a connection at the lower end and starts the bobbin carriage and
and C in the opposite direction. As the opposite end plates of the tumbling dog swings around, it engages one of the
plates
and again causes a
reversal of
motion as
it slides off of
the
opposite end.
The
for
on the cone-pulley at each reversal, gradually decreasing the speed as the bobbin winding inshifting of the belt
is obtained by connecting rack with shaft the pinion and the train of gearing shown. This through rack has a fork attached to it that connects with the cone-
creases its diameter,
and it is traversed slightly each time dog E slides off a The replate and allows shaft D to turn one-half revolution.
belt,
duction in the length of the carriage traverse is obtained by revolving screw A at each reversal and thus shortening the distance between the plates B and C. This rotation of the screw
is
effected by pinion P which engages rack and transmits motion through the other gears shown to the extension Q on the screw, which is made square and is free to slide through the gear hub as the carriage moves vertically. As the plates B and C are
moved toward each

move
other, the tumbling gear

it is
E has a shorter sur-
face to traverse before
disengaged. the same distance, so that the point of reversal decreases at each end and the bobbin is wound conical at both ends.
These two plates both
The roving delivered by the slackened by engaging pinion

shown.
front roll
is either tightened or with one of the three gears
Reversal of Motion after Predetermined

tions.
Number
of
Revolua driven
With the mechanism
illustrated in Fig.
12,
may be reversed after making any predetermined number of revolutions from i to 100,000 and the motion may be disconshaft
tinued entirely after the shaft has made any given number of This mechanism was applied to a textile reversals up to 10,000.
n8
1 2
.
o
fe
fe
11
s
>,
A)
-*-
C/)
machine.
shaft
1 19
The reversing shaft shown through either one
is
driven from the vertical
of the miter gears
which
re-
volve in opposite directions and are alternately engaged with the shaft by the sliding clutch C. The reversal of rotation after
a predetermined number of revolutions

of ratchets
is
and pawls.
is controlled by a system Another ratchet-and-pawl mechanism
also utilized for stopping the rotation of A after a given number of reversals, by placing the shifting clutch C in the central or neutral position.
has a cam which engages the rollers on gear the upper ends of bars E. The lower ends of these bars oscillate the rockers F which carry two sets of pawls, G\ and G2 The
.
The lower miter
set of four
pawls
d
,
at the left
is
in the operating or
position, as
shown
in the illustration.
working There are four pairs
of ratchets #1,
The teeth of each pair of z z , and ratchets are cut oppositely and the four pawls on one side of the ratchet shaft are for engaging the ratchets which control
the
H H
H.
number
of revolutions
made by
shaft
in one direction,
whereas the four pawls on the other side of the shaft are for operating the reverse motion ratchets. These ratchets operate
progressively and transmit motion to disks /i, /2, /8 and 74 These disks have projections or cam surfaces /, which serve to shift the reversing clutch C after shaft A has made a predeter,
.
mined number
of revolutions, which number is regulated by the ratchets before the mechanism is put into operation. adjusting This system of cam disks and ratchets will be referred to as the " combination."
Each
tooth of ratchet
ratchet has 20 teeth with one deep cut or tooth. Each 4 is equivalent to 8000 revolutions of shaft A
each tooth of ratchet

tooth of ratchet
is
2,
equivalent to 400 revolutions; each 20 revolutions; and each tooth of ratchet HI
HZ
is
equivalent to one revolution of shaft A. The mechanism is set for a given number of revolutions by turning each ratchet so that the deep tooth is away from the operating pawl a certain
number number
8A
of teeth, the
number depending,
in each case,
upon the
For
after
of revolutions of
represented
by each
tooth.
instance, to set the combination for a reversal of
motion
120
shaft
makes 49,763
revolutions, ratchet
H*
is
so located that
there are six teeth between the operating pawl and the deep tooth; these six teeth are equivalent to 48,000 revolutions of
A.
1 60
Ratchet HZ
is
then set at four teeth, representing 1600
revolutions of
ratchet
is
set at eight teeth, equivalent to
revolutions of A, and, finally, ratchet teeth, representing three revolutions of A.
HI
is
set at three
is
The mechanism
now
set for
a total of 48,000 -f 1600
160
+3
49,763 revodescribed, its
lutions.
After the mechanism has been set in the

action
is
manner
is
as follows:
The pawl G\ which
actuated once for
every revolution of gear D, drops into the deep tooth or notch of ratchet HI after engaging three teeth on HI, since, in this particular case, this ratchet was adjusted so that there were three
teeth between the pawl and the deep tooth. As soon as this deep tooth is engaged by the pawl, the ratchet HZ is turned a distance equivalent to one tooth; ratchet Hz then remains station-
ary until HI has made a complete turn and its pawl again drops into the deep tooth, when Hz is again moved one tooth. The
pawls are so located that the first one must engage the deep notch before the next successive pawl can engage its ratchet at is the same. Ratchet all, and the relation between the other pawls
Hz continues
revolution of
to
be moved a
single tooth for
each complete
HI until it has moved eight teeth, in this particular instance. The pawl of Hz then drops into a deep tooth and ratchet HZ is moved one tooth. Ratchet Hs now remains stationary until Hz, by the continued action of HI, makes a complete After H3 has revolution, when HZ is moved another tooth. moved a distance equivalent to four teeth, its pawl, in turn, drops into the deep notch, and ratchet H* is turned one tooth. A T4 another tooth and, when complete revolution of HZ turns HI has moved six teeth, in this case, the shaft A will have made
a total of 49,763 revolutions. This result will be verified in order to more clearly show the acAs previously mentioned, each ratchet tion of the mechanism. has 20 teeth. Each tooth of HI represents one revolution of
shaft
and the movement
of three teeth prior to
engagement
with the deep notch equals three revolutions.
for a
121
Since
is set
movement
of eight teeth,
HI
will
have to make eight com-
plete turns,
which will be equivalent to 160 additional turns of the four complete turns of HI necessary for moving H$ four teeth require 4 X 20 X 20 or 1600 additional turns of A,
Now
H^
giving a total of 1763 revolutions. Finally, the movement of six teeth requires 6 X 20 X 20 X 20 = 48,000 additional turns of A, so that the total number of revolutions made by A
prior to reversal equals 49,763,

set as previously described.
when
the ratchet mechanism
is
The progressive action of the ratchets gradually revolves the cam disks preparatory to shifting the reversing clutch. The cam / on disk /4 first engages and lifts the floating lever KI at
the left-hand end and the lever
one-half as
Jf
,
much.
When
the
upon KI and 2 these levers, together with are lifted the full amount and spring balls in L cause it part L, This clutch to be thrown quickly into mesh with the clutch C.
other
disks act
is
cam
of part L.
threaded and two threads are also formed on the upper side As levers KI, Z) and part L are contained in a car-
riage
M,
all
are constrained to
move
parallel to the axis of shaft
because of the action of the screw threads on clutch C.
This
results in
breaking the combination; that
is,
the floating levers
removed from the cams, the four pawls G\ are disengaged from their ratchets, and the idle set of pawls GI comes into action, thereby reversing the rotation of the controlling mechanism. is completed, which requires As soon as the travel of carriage
are
all
i^ revolution of the clutch, the latter is constrained to act along the threads on L while making one revolution, until feathers atthe tached to the clutch over-ride the spring balls in shaft A out of mesh with one bevel gear clutch is then instantly thrown and into mesh with the other, thereby reversing the rotation of
;
shaft
the
cam on
Just as the clutch starts this rapid shifting movement, on part L and engages one of the rollers gear
throws the levers

the clutch.
all
down and
the threads on
L out of mesh with
The rotation of shaft A is stopped after a predetermined number of reversals by means of a separate mechanism which
122
arrests the
movement
it is
of carriage
M midway of
its travel.
The
worm
threads on clutch
the clutch until
engage on the other. drops into a groove m'M after the four ratchets P, having ten teeth, are properly aligned as regards a deep notch in each
ratchet.
and withdraw out of engagement on one side and cannot is stopped by a pin which Carriage
then act upon part
These ratchets are operated consecutively by a stepped four-fingered pawl on R through the medium of a pin connecting
three diagrams in the lower part of Fig. 12 illustrate the systems of gearing controlled by the mechanism described in the
with If.
The
The requirements, as illustrated by these three diagrams, are as follows: i. That a reversing gear shall drive two others continuously in the same direction but in opposite 2. That a reversing gear shall directions re|ative to each other.
foregoing.
drive one of the two gears continuously in the same direction and the other in the same direction as that of the reversing gear. 3. That a reversing gear shall drive one gear continuously in the
two others alternately in the arrows and the full circles on these diagrams belong together, and likewise the broken or dotted lines and arrows. The full lines connecting the centers indicate that those gears are linked, whereas the broken lines denote spring connections. The movement of the reversing driver and
same same
direction
and
shall drive
direction as
itself.
The
full
the friction of the links swing the idler gears. When a machine Reversing Motor Drives.
electric
is
driven
by an
motor, the direction of rotation may be reversed in the case of a direct-current motor by reversing the current in either
the armature or the field. The motors used for street railway work are usually reversed by changing the direction of the current flowing through the armature, the flow of the field current remaining the same. If a motor is running, a resistance should be inserted in the armature circuit before reversing the current
flowing through the armature, and the speed of the motor should preferably be reduced considerably before reversing the current.
Some motor-driven
of
motion
for the
work
planers are so arranged that the reversal table is obtained by reversing the motor
123
instead of employing shifting belts. When the planer is in operation, the point of reversal is controlled by dogs similar to
those on a belt-driven planer. With one type of equipment, at the instant of reversal a pilot switch is thrown by one of the
dogs and the controller short-circuits the armature through suitable resistance, thus causing the motor to act as a generator,
and, consequently, as a powerful electric brake for arresting the motion of the planer table. As soon as the speed of the motor
has been reduced a predetermined amount, the armature current is reversed and with it the rotation of the motor and the move-
ments
of the
belt-shifting
work table. The pilot switch takes the place of the mechanism on belt-driven planers. The reversal of
in
motion at the end of each stroke is entirely automatic. When motion is derived from an induction motor, a change
the direction of
involves reversing the rotation of the If the motor revolving magnetism set up by the field windings. is two-phase, the current in either one of the phases may be re-
movement
versed to change the direction of rotation, which is accomplished by interchanging the connections of one of the phases with its terminals on the motor. For a three-phase motor, a reversal of
rotation
is
obtained by interchanging the connections of any two
of the line wires with the
motor terminals.
CHAPTER V
the type used for cutting metals, are equipped with a driving mechanism which gives a rapid return movement after a working or cutting stroke, in order to
MANY machines, especially of
For instance, shapers, slotters, and are so arranged that the tool, after making the cutting planers stroke, is returned at a greater velocity, thus increasing the
reduce the idle period.
efficiency
and productive capacity
of the machine.
of obtaining this rapid return varies with different types of
chine tools.
is
In some cases, motion for the obtained by using two belts which alternately come into the
The method mareturn movement

at two rates of
driving position and rotate the driven
member
employed with belt-driven planers, the speed. belt for the return movement of the table connecting with pulleys
is
This method
rapid return movement for is obtained by transmitting motion a different combination of gearing which is automatithrough The term cally engaged at the end of the working stroke. " as applied to machine tools, quick-return motion," however, generally relates to a driving mechanism so designed that the
having a higher speed ratio. some other types of machines
The
increased rate of speed for the return movement is obtained through the same combination of parts which actuate the driven member during the forward or working stroke.
A simple form of quick-return Crank and Oscillating Link. mechanism which has been applied extensively to shapers is shown diagrammatically in Fig. i. The pinion A drives gear C at a uniform speed, and this gear carries a swiveling block
which engages slotted link L. The lower end of this link is pivoted at D and the upper end connects by means of a link
with the ram of the shaper. As the crankpin or swiveling block B revolves with gear C, it slides up and down in the slot of link
124
125
L and
its
causes the latter to oscillate about the fixed pivot at lower end. The ram of the shaper is mounted in guides or
it is
given a rectilinear movement. is obtained with this form of drive quick-return to the fact that the crankpin B moves through an arc a owing
ways so that
movement
during the cutting stroke, whereas, for the return stroke,
it
moves through a much shorter arc
b.
As gear C
rotates at
uniform speed, obviously the time required for the return stroke, as compared with the cutting stroke, is in the same proportion
as the lengths of the arcs a
and
b.
The
radial position of block
Fig. i.
Quick-return Motion from a Revolving Crank and Oscillating Slotted Lever
B may be varied in order to change the length S of the stroke. This mechanism imparts a variable speed to the ram, the speed increasing toward the center of the stroke and then diminishing.
The
1 80
angle
made by
the crankpin for the forward stroke equals
the angle degrees through which slotted link L moves; for the return stroke, the crankpin moves through an angle equal the angular movement 6 of the slotted link. to 1 80 degrees
The
by
sine of one-half angle B equals the radius of the crank divided to the center of the gear C. the distance from pivot
126
Whitworth Quick-return Motion. motion that has been widely used in
type of quick-return
il-
slotter construction is
lustrated in Fig. 2. This mechanism, which is known as the " Whitworth quick-return," is similar in principle to the crank and oscillating link combination previously referred to, although
the construction
is
entirely different.
The pinion
drives gear
at a uniform velocity,
and
this gear carries
a block
which
engages a slot or groove in part D, which is connected by a The line xx represents link E with the tool-slide of the machine. The gear C revolves tool-slide. the center-line of motion for the upon a large bearing F which is a part of the machine frame.
Fig. 2.
Whitworth Quick-return Motion
The
slotted
member
D has a bearing G, within F, and

is offset
the center
about which
rotates
with relation to the center of
driving gear C; consequently, the crankpin or block B moves through an arc a during the cutting stroke and through a shorter arc b for the return stroke, so that the latter requires less time
in proportion to the respective lengths of arcs a
and
b.
The
which
stroke
is
varied
by changing the
radial position of the pin
connects with link E.
So
far as the principle of operation is concerned, the chief
difference
between the Whitworth motion and the crank and

is
slotted link
that, in the former case, the bearing for the slotted

is
or driven
member
inside of the crankpin circle, whereas, with
127
the crank and slotted link combination, the pivot is outside of the crankpin circle. As the result of this difference in arrangein Fig. 2 has a continuous rotary motion, whereas the slotted link L, in Fig. i, swings through a definite angle. With the Whitworth quick-return, the ratio of the time required
ment, part
for the
forward and return strokes
is
not varied by changing the
Fig. 3.
Crank-operated Quick-return Motion designed to give a
Uniform Forward Speed
length of the stroke. With the crank and oscillating link, a change of stroke does affect this ratio, the latter increasing as the length of the stroke is increased.
Modification of Whitworth Motion.
nism that
is
a modification of
mechathe Whitworth motion combined

is
A quick-return
with the slotted link and rotating crank
illustrated
by the
128
This form of drive has been applied to a
sectional view, Fig. 3.
shaper in order to secure in addition to a quick return a cutting
speed that
is
practically constant throughout the working stroke.
The
driving gear
transmits
swiveling block A to a ring On the opposite side of this ring there is a second swiveling block Bj which drives the crank-disk G, on which is mounted
rotary movement through a which turns about an eccentric C.

its
the
main crankpin block
that, in turn, is
engaging the vibrating arm or link connected with the ram. The eccentric C is
,
offset
with relation to the center of the driving gear
and
it
remains permanently in a fixed position; therefore, the circular path of the eccentric ring blocks A and B is not concentric with
the path described by the main crankpin H. In other words, the circle which these blocks describe as they are driven around by gear F has a constantly varying radius from the center of
the gear, which compensates for the irregularity of speed obtained by a plain slotted link, and gives a practically constant movement during the working stroke.
Quick Return from Elliptical Gearing. Elliptical gearing has been used to obtain a quick-return motion, although such gearing is difficult to cut without special attachments, and comparatively few mechanisms requiring a quick-return motion have this type of drive. The driving and driven gears are of
the same proportions and size as shown in Fig. 4, and each gear revolves about one of its foci as a fixed center. The distance
between the shaft centers
common major axis.

point of contact.
If
is made equal to the length of the The angular velocity ratio varies according
to the respective radii of the driving
is
and driven gears at the the driving shaft and it rotates at a
uniform speed, the angular velocity of shaft B will increase during the first half revolution from the position shown in the
illustration,
and then decrease during the remaining
half revo-
the gears are in the position shown, the angular velocity of the driven shaft B is minimum, because that side of the driver having the shortest radius is in contact with it; as
lution.
When
the driver revolves, the radius at the point of contact gradually increases, and, consequently, the angular velocity increases until
tooth
129
the angular velocity is maximum. When point C representing the longest radius of the driving gear has passed the point of contact, the angular velocity gradually
is
in mesh,
when
diminishes until
it is
again at a minimum.
of revolutions
The
actual
number
made by each
shaft in a
and the driving and driven is, gears both require the same time to complete the half revolution between the two positions representing the minimum and maxigiven time
of course, the same,
mum
angular velocities. The variable motion of the driven gear, however, may be utilized to give a quick-return movement to a driven tool-slide or other part. When two shafts are to
elliptical gearing, either
be connected by
the
maximum
or the
Fig. 4.
Elliptical
Gearing arranged to Return Driven Part quickly
minimum
angular velocities may be selected at will, but, when has been determined, the other is fixed; the driver is asone sumed in all cases to have a constant or uniform angular velocity.
This type of quick-return motion has been applied to shapers

in order to return the tool quickly after the cutting stroke.
The
connected to the ram by a link. The bolt or crankpin on the gear which connects with the link may be adjusted along a groove for varying the distance from the center
driven gear
is
of the driven shaft
and the length
of the stroke.
Elliptical
gearing has also been used for operating the slide valve of a steam stamp, such as is used for crushing rock. In this case,
the variable motion obtained from the gearing is utilized to so control the motion of the valve as to admit steam above the
130
piston throughout almost the entire downward stroke, whereas, on the upward stroke, just enough steam is used to return the
stamp
shaft, in order to reduce
steam consumption.
Eccentric Pinion and Elliptical Gearing for Quick Return.
The combination of eccentric and elliptical gearing, in conjunction with gears mounted concentrically, as illustrated in Fig. 5, has been utilized to secure a quick-return motion. The pinions A and B are keyed to the driving shaft. The smaller
Fig. 5.
Eccentric Pinion and Elliptical Gear for Accelerating Return
Movement
pinion
and meshes with a half spur gear F. The larger pinion B is eccentrically mounted on the shaft and is in line with a half elliptical gear H, the two gear segments on the driven shaft being offset as shown by the end and plan views.
is
concentric with the shaft
In the operation of this gearing, the semi -circular gear
is
driven by the small pinion A and the elliptical gear by the eccentric pinion B. The elliptical gear makes one-half revolution
to each complete
revolution of
its
eccentric
driving pinion,
If the
131
driven shaft is revolving in a counter-clockwise direction, the eccentric pinion will be the driver from C to D. At the latter point, the elliptical gear segment leaves the eccentric pinion and the smaller pinion A comes into mesh with the half
spur gear and continues to be the driver through the remaining half revolution of the driven shaft, or until the elliptical gear
again conies around into mesh with the eccentric pinion. Owing to the difference in the diameters of the half spur gear and its
pinion A, the latter must
make two
revolutions before the ec-
centric pinion can again engage the teeth of the elliptical gear. At the point C where the eccentric pinion again becomes the
driver, the radius of pinions
of the load
from
to
A and B is equal, and the transfer B does not cause an abrupt change of speed
member. As the eccentric pinion, however, begins to swing the elliptical gear around, the speed of the driven shaft is increased until the maximum radius of the eccentric
for the driven
pinion
is
is
speed
opposite the minor axis of the elliptical gear. The then at maximum and, as the movement continues,
the speed gradually decreases until the load is transferred to the concentric pinion A which imparts a uniform velocity to the
driven member.
With the
eccentric-elliptical
combination
of
is
described, one revolution of the driven shaft
gearing just obtained for
every three revolutions of the pinion driving shaft, two revolutions of the concentric pinion A being required for a half
revolution,
and one revolution
of the eccentric pinion
for the
remaining half revolution.
applied to a slotter or other machine requiring a similar movement, the cutting stroke will occur while pinion A is the driver, because a relaIf this
is
mechanism
tively slow
and uniform speed
is
imparted to the driven
shaft.
the eccentric pinion starts the drive, the speed of the driven shaft is gradually accelerated and, after reaching the maximum, is reduced to the cutting speed, so that the tool-slide is rapidly
As
returned to the starting position ready for the next cutting stroke. The ratio of the quick return to the cutting speed should
not be too great, because a jerky motion and excessive vibrations in the machine will result. It has been found, by experiment,
132
i is
that a ratio of 2 to tory operation.
about the highest that
will give satisfac-
When
laying out gearing of this kind, there are a few funda-
mental points which must be observed in all cases: i. The long radius AB of the eccentric pinion from the shaft center to the
pitch line should equal one-half the distance between the centers 2. The short radius of the driving and driven shafts. of the
AC
eccentric pinion should equal one-half the diameter of the conof the elliptical gear centric pinion. 3. The major axis
CD
Fig. 6.
Independent Quick-return Movement

Turret-slide
for
Screw Machine
should equal twice the distance between the shaft centers, minus twice the short radius AC of the eccentric pinion. 4. The minor
axis of the elliptical gear, or twice the distance
EG, should equal

5.
the distance between the centers of the shafts.

tical gear,
The
ellip-
assuming that it were complete, should have twice the number of teeth that there are in its eccentric driving pinion, and the number of teeth in both the elliptical gear and eccentric
pinion should be even. 6. The shaft hole for the elliptical gear should always be located at the intersection of the major and
minor
axes, or in the center of the gear.
This type of gearing
is
133
employed when it is especially desirable to secure a uniform motion during the entire cutting stroke.
On the Brown & Independent Quick-return Movement. Sharpe automatic screw machine, the quick-return and advance
movements
of the turret-slide are controlled independently of
cam by means of a crank. The turret A (Fig. 6) is carried by a slide that moves horizontally along the machine bed. The movements of the turret-slide are derived
the turret-slide feed
from two
the slide
different sources.
is
When
the turret tools are at work,

lever B,
operated by a lead
cam through
which has
teeth at its upper end meshing with rack C.

is
While the turret
being indexed, it is withdrawn rapidly and then quickly advanced to the working position again, by the action of crank E
which
revolved once for each indexing movement. The rack transmits motion to the turret-slide through connecting-rod
is
F, which is pivoted to crank E on the turret-slide. This crank " dead center," as shown in the illustration, while the is on the tools are cutting; when the turret is to be indexed to bring the
next successive tool in position, it is first withdrawn far enough for the tool to clear the work, and then the shaft carrying crank
turned one revolution, through suitable gearing, by the engagement of a clutch the action of which is controlled by a
is
trip dog.
When
the crank revolves,
it
allows spring
to
draw
back the turret-slide without rack C, while making one-half turn, and then advance it during the remaining half turn, the rate of movement being increased by the motion derived from cam Aj
which
is
laid
out to suit the work.
This quick-acting crank
operates while the roll on the lower end of lever B is passing from the highest point of the cam lobe to the point for starting the next cut.
CHAPTER VI
frequently necessary for machine parts to operate intermittently instead of continuously, and there are various forms A toolof mechanisms for obtaining these intermittent motions.
IT
is
given a feeding movement at regular intervals is an example of a part requiring an intermittent movement. Automatic indexing mechanisms which serve to rotate some
slide
which
is
member, periodically, a definite part of a revolution, after the machine completes a cycle of operations, represent other apThe usual requirements plications of intermittent movements. of an intermittent motion, when automatic in its action, are that the motion be properly timed relative to the movement of parts operating continuously and that the member receiving the intermittent motion be traversed a predetermined amount each time it is moved. When the machine part which is traversed intermittently must be located in a certain position with considerable accuracy, some auxiliary locating device may be utilized in conjunction with the mechanism from which the The spindle carriers of intermittent motion is obtained.
multiple-spindle automatic screw machines are so arranged that the carrier is first rotated to approximately the required
position
by an intermittent motion, and then it is accurately with the cutting tools by some form of locating device. aligned Ratchet Gearing. One of the simplest and most common
of obtaining intermittent
methods
movements
is
by means
of
ratchet gearing. This type of gearing is arranged in various ways, as indicated by the diagrams in Fig. i. In its simplest form, it consists of a ratchet wheel a (see diagram A), a pawl &,
and an arm or
c
lever c to
which the pawl
is
attached.
The arm
tional part of a revolution, as indicated

134
swings about the center of the ratchet wheel, through a fracby the full and dotted
lines
135
ment
which represent its extreme positions. When the moveis toward the left, the pawl engages the teeth of the ratchet wheel so that the latter turns with the arm. When the arm swings in the opposite direction, the pawl simply lifts and slides over the points of the teeth without transmitting motion
to the ratchet wheel.
If
a load must be sustained by the
Fig. i.
Different Arrangements of Ratchet Gearing
d, is
ratchet gearing, a fixed pawl located at some point, as indicated at used to prevent any backward rotation of the ratchet wheel.
With gearing
of this general type, the faces of the ratchet teeth
against which the end of the pawl bears should be so formed that the pawl will not tend to fly out of mesh when a load is
In order to prevent such disengagement, the teeth should be so inclined that a line at right angles to the face of
applied.
of the ratchet
the tooth in contact with the pawl will pass between the center wheel and the pivot of the pawl. If the face of 9A
136
such an angle that a line at right
this tooth should incline at
angles to it were above the pawl pivot, pressure against the end of the pawl would tend to force it upward out of engagement with
the ratchet wheel.
When a single pawl is used as Multiple Pawls for Ratchets. shown at A Fig. i the arm which carries it must swing through
, ,
least one tooth of the ratchet wheel; hence the pitch of the teeth represents the minimum movement for the wheel. If two or more pawls are used, a relatively small motion of the arm will enable successive teeth to be engaged without
an arc equal to at
decreasing the pitch of the ratchet wheel.

illustrated
The
principle is
instead of
which shows two pawls in position by diagram one. As will be seen, one pawl is longer than the other
one-half the pitch of the ratchet teeth. the movement of the arm may equal
by an amount equal to With this arrangement,
only one-half the pitch, if desired, the effect being the same as though a single pawl were applied to a wheel having teeth re-
duced one-half in pitch. By using three pawls, each varying in length by an amount equal to one-third of the tooth pitch, a still finer feeding movement could be obtained without actually decreasing the pitch of the teeth
and thus weakening
them.
A simple method Reversal of Motion with Ratchet Gearing. of obtaining a reversal of motion is illustrated by diagram C,
Fig.
i A double-ended pawl is used and, in order to reverse the motion of the ratchet wheel, this pawl is simply swung from one side of the arm to the other, as indicated by the full and
.
dotted
lines.
Reversible ratchet wheels
must have
motion
teeth with
bearing faces for the
pawl on each
is
side.
is
Another method
D.
of obtaining a reversal of
shown at
pawl
is
The pawl,
is
in this case,
in the
form
of a small plunger
which
backed up by a
spiral spring.
One
side of the
beveled so that the pawl merely slides over the teeth on the backward movement of the arm. When a reversal of movement
is
required, the pawl is lifted and turned half way around, or until the small pin / drops into the cross-slot provided for it, thus reversing the position of the working face of the pawl.
Frictional Ratchet
137
of ratchet gear-
Mechanisms.
The types
ing previously referred to all operate by a positive engagement of the pawl with the teeth of the ratchet wheel. Some ratchet
mechanisms are constructed on a different principle in that motion is transmitted from the driving to the driven member by frictional contact. For instance, with one form, the driving
member
encircles the driven part
which has cam surfaces that
are engaged by rollers. When the outer driving member is revolved in one direction, the rollers move along the inclined
cam surfaces until they are wedged tightly enough to lock the driven part and cause it to turn with the operating lever. When the driver is moved in the opposite direction, the backward motion of the rollers releases them. This general principle has been
applied in various ways.
to impart a
Double-action Ratchet Gearing. It is sometimes desirable motion to the ratchet wheel during both the forward
of the ratchet
and backward motions
arm
or lever.
This result
may
be obtained by using two pawls arranged as illustrated by diagram .E, Fig. i. These pawls are so located relative to the
pivot of the arm that, while one pawl is advancing the ratchet wheel, the other is returning for engagement with the next successive tooth.
Variable Motion from Ratchet Gearing.
Ratchet gearing,
especially when applied to machine tools for imparting feeding movements to tool-slides, must be so arranged that the feeding motion can be varied. A common method of obtaining such variations is by changing the swinging movement of the arm
that carries the operating pawl. In many cases the link which operates the pawl arm receives its motion either from a crank or
a vibrating lever, which is so arranged that the pivot for the rod can be adjusted relative to the center of rotation for changing
movement of the operating pawl and the rate of feed. One method of adjusting the motion irrespective of the movement of the operating pawl is illustrated at F in Fig. i The pawl
the
.
oscillates constantly
through an arc
a,
and
this angle represents
the
maximum movement
is
for the ratchet wheel.
When
re-
duction of motion
desired, the shield b is
moved around
so
138
that the pawl
is lifted
out of engagement with the ratchet wheel
and simply
slides over it during part of the stroke. Thus, when the shield covers three of the teeth as shown in the illustration
the motion of the ratchet wheel
is
reduced the same as though
the swinging action of the pawl lever had been diminished an amount corresponding to three of the teeth. With the particular
means
arrangement illustrated, the shield is held in any position by of a small spring plunger c that engages holes in a stationary plate d. Ratchet Mechanisms for Releasing Sprockets. Some inratchet mechanisms have been applied to the sprocket genious wheels of bicycles to permit the pedals to remain stationary while
coasting
down a grade
in Fig.
sively used is
design that has been extenillustrated in principle by the detailed sectional

or
hill.
view at
to the inner
2. The sprocket wheel is not attached directly member which is shown in section, but motion is
transmitted from one part to the other through frictional contact. The inner ring has a series of recesses equally spaced about
the circumference.
steel roller or ball,
slightly.
Each of these recesses contains a hardened and the bottoms of the recesses are inclined
pushed up these inclined
sur-
The
rollers are lightly
faces
ative motion of the inner
by blocks behind which are small spiral springs. Any reland outer members of the sprocket
causes these steel rollers to either roll up the inclined surfaces and lock the two parts together or to move in the other direction and release the driving and driven members, the action depending upon the direction of the relative movement. For instance,
all of
if the outer sprocket is revolved in a clockwise direction, the rollers are immediately wedged in their recesses. If the motion of the outer sprocket is suddenly arrested and the
inner
member
continues to revolve, the rollers are immediately
released.
An
entirely different type of ratchet
use on
the sprockets of bicycles is
inclusive,
which
illustrate its
mechanism designed for shown by diagrams B to F, method of operation. The exterior
sprocket recessed on the inner side for the reception of a crescentshaped piece a, which acts as the pawl. The depth of the recess
is
and the shape
b
;
139
of part a are such that the teeth
on the inner ring
can pass freely when moving in the direction indicated by the arrow at B with motion in this direction, part a simply is given a rocking movement in its recess to allow the successive teeth to
is in the opposite direction, as C, the teeth on the inner member swing by diagram part a around in its seat, as shown by the successive diagrams, until it is finally wedged firmly between the two parts as shown " " mechanisms were subsefree-wheel at F. These so-called
pass.
When
the relative motion
indicated
quently replaced by an arrangement operating on the same
Fig. 2.
Ratchet Mechanisms for Releasing Sprockets
general principle so far as the releasing mechanism was concerned, but so designed that a backward movement of the pedal also applied a brake.
The action Automatic Disengagement of Ratchet Gearing. of ratchet gearing can be stopped automatically after the ratchet
wheel has been turned a predetermined amount, by equipping the wheel with an adjustable shield which serves to disengage the pawl after the required motion has been completed. This
form of disengaging device, as applied to the cross-feeding mechanism of a cylindrical grinding machine, is shown in Fig. 3. This mechanism is used to automatically feed the grinding wheel
in
toward the work
for taking successive cuts,
and
it is
essential
140
to
it
have the mechanism so arranged that
feeding
movement when
the diameter of the
can be set to stop the work has been re-
duced a predetermined amount. When the pawl A is in mesh with the ratchet wheel B, the grinding wheel is fed forward an
amount depending upon the position of screws (not shown) which control the stroke of pawl A. The automatic feeding movement continues at each reversal of the machine table, until
is attached to head D, intercepts the pawl from engaging with the ratchet wheel, thus stopping the feeding movement. The arc through which the ratchet
the shield C, which

it
and prevents
Fig. 3.
Ratchet Gearing arranged to Disengage Automatically after a Predetermined Movement
wheel
turned before the pawl is disengaged from it, or the extent of the inward feeding movement of the grinding wheel,
is
depends upon the distance between the tooth of the pawl and the end of the disengaging shield. With the particular mechanism illustrated, a movement of one tooth represents a diameter reduction of 0.00025 inch, so that the amount that the wheel
moves inward before the feeding motion is automatically disengaged can be changed by simply varying the distance between the shield and the pawl. To facilitate setting the shield, a thumb-latch E is provided. Each time this thumb-latch is
141
pressed, the shield moves a distance equal to one tooth on the ratchet wheel. For instance, if the shield is at the point of
disengagement and the latch

will move
is pressed sixteen times, the shield a distance equal to sixteen teeth. As each tooth represents 0.00025 inch, a feeding movement of 0.004 inch will be ob-
tained before the pawl is automatically disengaged. This mechanism prevents grinding parts below the required size, and makes it unnecessary for the operator to be continually measuring
the diameter of the work.
It
is
located back of a handwheel
(which
is
partly
shown
in the illustration) that is used for
hand
and
adjustment. is held in
The pawl is kept in contact with the ratchet wheel the disengaged position by a small spring-operated
plunger F.
Escapements.
of ratchet
for
An escapement may be considered as a form mechanism having an oscillating double-ended pawl controlling the motion of the ratchet wheel by engaging suc-
cessive teeth. Escapements are designed to allow intermittent motion to occur at regular intervals of time. The escapement of
is illustrated in Fig. 4. As applied to a pendulum clock the escapement serves two purposes, in that it governs the movement of the scape wheel for each swing of the pendulum and also
a clock
gives the
pendulum an impulse each time a tooth

will receive
of the scape
wheel
is
released.
An escapement should be so arranged that the
pendulum
part of
curs.
its
an impulse for a short period at the lowest swing and then be left free until the next impulse ocrequired for a
The time
is
if
pendulum
to swing through small
arcs
practically independent
of the length of the arc.
For
a stationary pendulum receives an impulse, the time instance, for its outward and return movement will be approxinecessary mately constant regardless of the impulse and arc of swing,
within ordinary limits. Thus, if the impulse is of considerable magnitude, the pendulum starts with a relatively high velocity,
but the distance that it travels counteracts the increase of speed so that the time remains practically constant for any impulse
or arc of swing. pendulum that is swinging freely will adapt the length of its swing to the impulse it receives, and any interference which might be caused by the locking or unlocking of
142
the escapement will affect the regularity of movement less if it occurs at the center of the swing rather than at the ends. As the
arc of swing increases, there is a very slight increase in the time required for the movement, and, therefore, it is desirable that the impulses given to a pendulum should always be equal.
One
"
of the earlier forms of
escapements was known as the
anchor
"
or
"
recoil
"
escapement.
With
this type, the pen-
dulum was never
free,
but was controlled by the escapement

throughout the swing. To avoid this effect, the Gra-
ham " dead-beat " escapement, illustrated in Fig. 4, was designed and has been
When extensively used. the escapement is in action,
the pallets
and
alternately engage the teeth of the scape wheel,
which revolves intermittently in indicated
the
direction
by
the arrow.
With
the
Fig. 4.
the mechanism in
position
illustrated,
Escapement for Controlling Action of Clockwork
the point of tooth
is
about to
slide across the
inclined
impulse face
"
"
as
pendulum an impulse
strikes the
or end of the pallet A, thus giving the When tooth it swings to the left.
J5, the motion of the scape wheel will be arrested until the pendulum reverses its movement and
dead face
"
of pallet
swings far enough to the right to release tooth Z>; as the point of slides past' the inclined end of B, the pendulum receives another
impulse, and this intermittent action continues indefinitely or until the force propelling the scape wheel around, which may be from a spring or weight, is no longer great enough to operate the mech-
anism.
In designing an escapement of this type, the pallets are so located as to embrace about one- third of the circumference of
the scape wheel.
One
of the features of the dead-beat escape-
ment
is
143
the effect which friction has on
its
operation.
During
each swing of the pendulum, there is a rubbing action between the points of the scape wheel teeth and the surfaces of the pallets,
so that the
of friction.
is is
retarded constantly by a slight amount however, instead of being a defect, a decided advantage, because, if the driving force of the clock increased so that the impulse on the pallets becomes greater,
pendulum
This
is
friction,
the velocity of the

is
pendulum tends
to increase,
but
this effect
counteracted by the f rictional retardation caused by a greater pressure of the teeth of the scape wheel on the faces of the pallet.
If the driving force
be increased, the
fractional retardation in-
creases relatively in a greater proportion than the driving effect and, up to a certain point, the time of vibration of the pendulum diminishes. If the force or weight propelling the clock mecha-
continually increased, a neutral point is finally reached, beyond which a greater force causes the time "of vibration to increase instead of to diminish. In the design of clock mechais
nism
nisms,
it is
that
it
desirable to have a driving power of such magnitude neither accelerates nor retards the motion of the pendu-
modifications of the escapement previously rehave been devised to meet special requirements. The escapements of watches and of some clocks and portable timekeeping devices have a balance wheel instead of a pendulum to
lum.
Many
ferred to
regulate the period of the intermittent action, but
all of
these
escapements operate on the same general principle. An interesting form of Crank and Ratchet Combination.
ratchet
mechanism
is
This mechanism
is
used on moving picture cameras and also for feeding films through " " claw printing machines. It is commonly referred to as a
mechanism or movement.
The claw
or hook
is
double and
engages evenly spaced perforations that are along each edge of the film. When this device is applied to a moving picture camera, the film is drawn, from a roll in the film box, down in
front of the lens
and then passes to a
reel in the receiving box.
The film remains stationary during each exposure and is drawn downward between successive exposures which are made at the The hook A, which engages the film rate of sixteen a second.
144
and moves it along intermittently and with such rapidity, receives its motion from a crank and cam combination. The two B and C revolve in opposite directions. Gear intermeshing gears B has a crankpin upon which the hook is pivoted. An extension of this hook has a curved cam slot that engages a pin on gear C. As the two gears revolve, the hook is given a movement corresponding approximately to the D -shaped path indicated by the dotted lines. While this mechanism is shown in a horizontal
position in the illustration, it would normally be vertical with the hook uppermost, when in operation. Some of the other claw mechanisms in use differ from the one shown in regard to the
arrangement of the operating crank and the cam or curved
slot
Fig. 5.
Crank and
Cam
of
Combination for Operating Claw Mechanism
Moving Picture Camera
For instance, the cam, in some cases, is a separate part that is placed between the crank and the film hook, a pin on the hook lever engaging the cam slot. Another type of claw mechanism derives both the downward motion for moving the film and the in and out movements of the film hook from separate cam surfaces. Automatic Reduction of Intermittent Movement. The mechfor
modifying the crank motion.
anism to be described
for
applied to a Bryant chucking grinder automatically reducing the cross-feeding movement and depth of cut, as the diameter of the part being ground approaches
is
the finished
size.
The head which

on
this
carries the grinding wheels
machine) is given a recipromotion on the bed of the machine, and the work-spindle cating
(three or four wheels are used
head
is
145
mounted on a bracket that can be
set at
an angle
relative
to the
motion
shaft which
of the wheel-carrying slide for taper grinding. The transmits motion to the cross-feed mechanism shown
in Fig. 6 derives its
member
of the wheel-head reversing
motion from a cam surface on a swinging mechanism, which is of the
uH
jlr^n^r
-- -ft -_
Fig. 6.
Ratchet Feeding Mechanism arranged to Automatically Diminish the Feeding Movement
bevel gear and clutch type controlled

device.
The
motion to
screw
load-and-fire shifting 2 transmits universally jointed telescopic shaft the cross-feed mechanism at whatever angle the
by a
swiveling bracket and work-spindle
may
be
set.
2
The
cross-feed
has mounted on
it
a handwheel
and a spur gear
2.
146
is
This spur gear

reversing ratchet wheel
for
connected with ratchet wheel

lever
,
by a tumbler
thus provides
by and disengaging the feeding movement. The is operated by a pawl 2 pivoted to lever G2 This which, in turn, receives its movement from rockshaft F2 movement is positive in the direction which operates the ratchet wheel H2j and through it the cross feed. In the other direction, motion is derived from a spring R2 until the point of plunger S2 As the position of brings up against the adjustable stop T2
,
gear arrangement controlled
/2 which
T G
2,
governs the extent of the movement of the swinging of lever a greater or less cross feed is effected at each stroke. The
,
position of stop T2 and the amount of feed, In the first place, the knurled nut things.
to its
feed.
is
2
governed by two furnishes a check

of cross
it
backward movement, and thus regulates the rate

Screwing
this
nut out increases the feed
screwing
back decreases it. In the second place, the feed is controlled by cam V2 which is adjustably clamped on the shaft of ratchet and revolves with it in the direction of the arrow. wheel 2 As the feeding progresses, the lower edge of V2 comes into contact with the left-hand end of stop T2 gradually limiting its move,
ment from that permitted by
the adjustment of 2 until finally, in the position shown, the swinging of lever G2 is stopped altoThe diminishing depth gether, thus stopping the cross feed.
of cut thus provided for, as the desired finished diameter is approached, tends to improve the work in regard to accuracy and
finish.
It will
be noted in the plan view that there are three stop cams
T"2 ,
2,
.
three stops
and three feed adjusting nuts

latter
and plungers
S2
Any
one of these three
may
be pressed down into
working position, thus giving a separate cross-feed stop and rate of feed for each of three operations. When a shaft which rotates conIntermittent Gearing.
tinuously
is
to transmit
determined intervals,
motion to another shaft only at preintermittent gearing is sometimes used.
Gearing of this type is made in many different designs, which may be modified to suit the conditions governing their operation, such
as the necessity for locking the driven
member
while idle, the
inertia
of the driven part,
some forms
of intermittent gearing,
or the speed of rotation. With the driven gear rotates
through a fractional part of a revolution once for each revolution of the driver, whereas, with other designs, the driving gear
transmits motion to the driven gear two or
more times while

of times that the
is
making a single revolution.

driven gear stops before
it is
The number
turned completely around
varied
Fig. 7.
Gears
for
Uniformly Intermittent Motion
in each case according to the requirements;
the periods of rest
may
The design of intermittent gearing illustrated by diagram A, Fig. 7, is so arranged that the driving gear, which has only one tooth, revolves fourteen times for each revolution of the driven gear. Each time the tooth of the driver engages one of the tooth spaces in the
also be uniform or vary considerably. Gears for Uniformly Intermittent Motion.
driven gear, the latter is turned through an arc a. The driven gear is locked against rotation when the driving tooth is not in mesh, because the circular part of the driver fits closely into the
concave surfaces between the tooth spaces as they are successively
148
The
radius of the driver should be
turned to this position.
small enough to insure adequate locking surfaces between the tooth spaces, but not so small that sharp weak points will be
formed at the edges of the tooth spaces.
Counting mechanisms
are often equipped with gearing of this general type. In order to vary the relative movements of the driving and driven gears,
the meshing teeth may be arranged in various ways. For instance, if a second tooth were added to the driver on the opposite side as indicated by the dotted lines, the driven gear would
receive motion for each half revolution of the driver.
The
dia-
gram at
illustrates
another modification.
In this case, the
driven gear has a smaller number of rest periods, and it is turned farther for each revolution of the driver, as the latter
has three successive teeth.

Variable Intermittent Motion from Gearing. With some forms of intermittent gearing, the driven gear does not move the same amount each time it is engaged by the driver, the motion
being variable instead of uniform or equal. The diagram A Fig. 8, shows an example of the variable motion intermittent
t
The driving gear has four driving points around its circumference with numbers of teeth at each place varying from one to four. The tooth spaces on the driven gear are laid out
type.
to correspond so that the motion received by the driven gear is either increased or decreased progressively depending upon'the direction of rotation of the driver. Gearing of this general
type
may be
arranged in
many
different
of
ways and
it
suit the particular
mechanism
which
is designed to forms a part. After
laying out gears of this kind, it is often advisable to templets in order to ascertain by actual experiment are properly formed and give the required motion.
illustrated
make
if
brass
the gears
Intermittent Gearing for High Speeds. The design of gearing diagram B, Fig. 8, is considered preferable to the by
forms previously described, where the driving member revolves at a comparatively high speed. With this gearing, the driven
member is stationary during one-half revolution of The latter has a stud a or roller which engages radial
driven gear while passing through the inner half of
the driver.
slots in the
its circle of
travel.
149
The
flat
spring illustrated at c
is
used to hold the driven
wheel in position so that the driving roller will enter the next successive slot without interference. The projections or teeth on the driven gear may have semi-circular ends as shown, or all
of the ends
b.
may
If the semi-circular
be concentric as indicated by the dotted line at ends are not provided, there should be
some form
of positive locking device to insure alignment
between
The corners the radial slots and the driving pin or roller. should also be rounded to facilitate engagement of the roller.
Fig. 8.
(A) Gearing for Variable Intermittent Motion; Intermittent Gearing
(B) High-speed
Another form
shocks
Fig. 9.
is
of intermittent gearing designed to eliminate
when operating at relatively high speeds is illustrated in The speed ratio between the driving and driven members
i,
each revolution of the driver turning the driven wheel one-quarter revolution, or 90 degrees. The driver A has a cam
4 to
groove
motion of the driven wheel and retarded at the beginning and end of its movement. This groove is engaged by rollers D on the driven wheel. The rollers enter and leave the cam groove
is
C which
so shaped that the
is
gradually accelerated
150
through the open spaces at E, and when the driven wheel is stationary, two of the rollers are in engagement with this groove,
thus effectually locking the driven member. The illustration at the left shows the driven wheel at the center of its movement,
and the view
to the right
shows the relative positions
of the
two
is parts after the movement is completed. As the roller at revolved 45 degrees from the position shown, the following roller enters the cam groove through the left-hand space E.
Intermittent Motion of
rapid intermittent motion
is
Moving Picture Projector. required on moving picture
very
project-
Fig. 9.
Another Form of Gearing designed to Eliminate Shocks at High Speeds
ors.
The
on
is
film is not
moved
continuously, but each view or posi-
tive
it is
shutter
drawn down to the projecting position while the closed, and the film remains stationary for a fractional
part of a second while the picture is exposed on the screen; then, while the shutter is again closed, the next successive view is
moved
to the projecting position. It is apparent, therefore, that moving pictures are, in reality, a series of stationary pictures thrown upon the screen in such rapid succession that they
are, in effect,
pears continuous.
blended together and any action or movement apIt is important to give the film a very rapid
151
intermittent motion, because, it is necessary to have the shutter closed when this movement occurs; and the length of time that
the shutter
shutter
is
is
closed, should
be reduced to a minimum.
it
This
has a fan-shaped section which passes the projector lens while the film is being In order to avoid flicker on the screen, the shutter has shifted.
in the
form
of a
wheel or disk, and
two additional fan-shaped
sections.
With
spaced sections, the light is
not only shut
off
these three equally from the screen
movement
during each successive film movement, but twice between each at uniform intervals. By closing the shutter twice
is
while the picture
on the
screen, the flicker that
would be
visible
and annoying
film
is
the shutter were only closed while moving the multiplied to such an extent that it becomes almost conif
tinuous and
is
practically eliminated as far as the observer is
concerned, assuming that the projector is operated at the proper The width and area of that section of the shutter which is speed.
passing the lens
when
the film
is
being
moved
is
governed by the
time
required for the film
movement.
Theoretically, the area
segment of the shutter should be equal, alin practice, the two extra sections are made of somewhat though, smaller area than the main one, in order to increase the open space
of each section or
and the percentage of area left for the passage of light. There is an important relation between this shutter wheel and the intermittent motion or gearing of the projector. This is due to the fact that the shutter must be closed while the film is being shifted. With the mechanism to be described, the film movement is very rapid so that the shutter blades may be proportionately reduced in area, thus leaving more open space for the The intermittent motion referred to is shown in Fig. 10 light. This and is used on the Power moving picture projector. mechanism is composed of a disk or wheel A having an annular flange or ring B, which has two diagonal slots across it as shown; this wheel, which is the driver, imparts an intermittent motion to the follower H, which carries four equally spaced pins or rollers that engage the ring B on wheel A. Each time this wheel makes one revolution, the follower H is turned onequarter revolution and in the same direction, as indicated by
,
10 A
the arrows.
by the
slots
The follower is stationary except when it is engaged or cam surfaces formed on one side of ring B. Dur-
ing this stationary period, the ring B simply passes between the four pins on the follower, two of these pins being on the outside
and two on the
inside of the ring.
quarter-turn movement is obtained in the following manner: When the projection or cam surface G on the revolving wheel A strikes one of the pins, the rotation of the follower
begins,
The
and the pins are so spaced that one on the outside moves through a diagonal slot in ring B while a pin on the inside moves
Fig. 10.
Rapid-acting Intermittent Gearing of Moving Picture Projector
outward through the other slot. For instance, if the pins C and D are on the outside and E and F on the inside, pin D will first be engaged by cam surface G and, as the follower revolves,
pin C will pass in through one diagonal slot while pin E is moving to the outside of the ring through the other slot. At the completion of the quarter-turn movement, pins C and F will be on
the inside and
and
to revolve, ring
on the outside. As wheel A continues simply passes between these closely fitting
pins which lock the follower against movement until projection G again comes around and strikes the next successive pin on the follower.
153
The follower operates a toothed wheel or sprocket which connects with the film and moves it downward each time the shutter is closed.
Above and below the intermittent gearing
there
are other sprockets which rotate continuously, and these are so timed that a loop of film is formed above the intermittent gearing
that
is
is is
one film movement, which equivalent to the length of one view or positive. As the film drawn down rapidly by the intermittent mechanism, a loop
is
just large
enough
to provide for
is taken up by the lower sprocket as the lower receiving reel. The normal speed of wheel A is sixteen revolutions per second, and it has been operated at two or three times the normal speed. The time required for turning the follower one-quarter revolution is it
formed below
is
which
the film
wound upon
approximately one-sixth of the time for a complete revolution,

or
motion
-^ second, when running at normal speed. With the Geneva (illustrated in Fig. 12), which has been applied to many
therefore, the shutter blades
projectors, approximately one-quarter of the time is required

for the intermittent action;
must
be of
larger,
area than
when the
film
movement
occurs in one-
Notwithstanding this increase of speed, the mechanism shown in Fig. 10 is claimed to be superior to the
sixth of the time.
Geneva motion
in that there
is less
tendency to subject the film
The locking of the follower during the stationary period is also more secure, especially at the critical time when near the operating point. The three holes drilled in the ring B are to compensate for the slots on the opposite side
to injurious stresses.
and
to balance the wheel
Intermittent Gear with Swinging Sector.
The
gearing
illus-
trated in Fig. ii operates on a different principle from the gearing previously described. The driven gear has one period
of rest for each revolution of the driver;
the latter has a sector
B which is free to swing in the space provided for it, but is normally held in the position shown by a spiral spring D. The driver revolves at a uniform speed in the direction shown by the
arrow and, when the sector
comes into engagement with the

is
driven gear, the latter stops revolving while the sector ing across the open space or until side B strikes side F,
when
swingthe
154
driven gear
released
is
again set in motion. As soon as the sector is the driven gear, the spring draws it back to the by position shown in the illustration, preparatory to again arresting the movement of E. The resistance to motion offered by gear
should be great enough to overcome the tension of spring Z), as otherwise the sector would not swing away from the position
In order to avoid shocks, this gearing would have to be revolved quite slowly; while the design is not to be recommended,
shown.
the principle
may
Geneva Wheel
be of some practical value. for Intermittent Motion. The general type
of intermittent gearing illustrated in Fig. 1 2 is
commonly known
Fig. ii.
Intermittent Motion derived from a Swinging Gear Sector
Geneva wheel/' because of the similarity to the wellknown Geneva stop used to prevent the over-winding of springs in watches, music boxes, etc. Geneva wheels are frequently used on machine tools for indexing or rotating some part of the maas the
"
chine through a fractional part of a revolution. The driven wheel shown at A in the illustration has four radial slots located
90 degrees apart, and the driver carries a roller k which engages one of these slots each time it makes a revolution, thus turning
the driven wheel one-quarter revolution.
b engages the concave surface c
The
concentric surface
of slots before
between each pair
155
the driving roller is disengaged from the driven wheel, which prevents the latter from rotating while the roller is moving around to engage the next successive slot. The circular boss b
on the driver
is
cut
away
at d to provide a clearance space for
the projecting arms of the driven wheel.
The Geneva wheel illustrated by diagram B differs from the one just described principally in regard to the method of locking the driven wheel during the idle period. The driven wheel has
Fig. 12.
Geneva Wheels which vary

Driven
Member
in regard to Method of Locking during Idle Period
four rollers g located 90 degrees apart and midway between the radial grooves which are engaged by the roller of the driver.
on the driver having a radius equal to the center-to-center distance between two of the rollers This circular groove eng, as measured on the center line xx.
There
is
a large circular groove
gages one of the rollers as soon as the driving roller h has passed out of one of the grooves or radial slots. Each time the driver
makes one
revolution, the
two
rollers
on the center
illustration
line
xx are
engaged by the locking groove.
The
shows the
156
driving roller about to enter a slot and the locking roller at the point of disengagement. When the driven wheel has been
moved 90 degrees from the position shown, the roller which is now at the lowest position will have moved around to the lefthand
side so that it enters the locking groove as the driving
roller leaves
the radial
slot.
When
12, it is
designing gearing of the general type illustrated in Fig. advisable to so proportion the driving and driven mem-
bers that the angle a will be approximately 90 degrees. The radial slots in the driven part will then be tangent to the circular path of the driving roller at the time the roller enters and leaves
the
slot.
When
the gearing
is
designed in this way, the driven
Fig. 13.
Intermittent Gearing for Shafts at Right Angles
wheel
is
started gradually from a state of rest
and the motion
is
also gradually checked.
Intermittent Gearing for Shafts at Right Angles. When and driven shafts are at right angles to each other, indriving
termittent gears which are similar to bevel gears in form, but constructed on the same general principle as the spur gearing illustrated in Fig. 7, may be employed. The smooth or blank
member
space on the driving gear for arresting the motion of the driven corresponds to the pitch cone and engages concave
locking surfaces formed on the driven gear. Owing to the conical shape, such gearing is more difficult to construct than the spur-gear type.
157
of intermittent gearing for shafts at right angles to each other but not lying in the same plane is illustrated in Fig.
13.
form
The
driving
member
is
in the
form
of a cylindrical
cam and
has a groove which engages, successively, the rollers on the driven wheel. Diagram A shows the cam in the driving or operating
position,
and at B the driven wheel is shown locked against rotation during the period of rest. The locking action is obtained by parallel faces on the cam which fit closely between the rollers
and are located in planes at right angles to the axis of rotation. This mechanism was designed for a high-speed automatic machine requiring an accurate indexing movement and a positive
locking of the driven
member during
the stationary period.
Fig. 14.
Modification of the Type of Gearing
shown
in Fig. 13
The gearing operated
per minute, and was used in preference to the Geneva-wheel type of gearing previously described. The curvature of the operating groove on the driving cam is such that the driven wheel is started slowly
and, after the speed is accelerated, there is a gradual reduction The driven wheel has no lost motion for any posiof velocity.
successfully at a speed of 350 revolutions it was because of the speed that this design
and the mechanism operates without appreciable shock or vibration, and is practically noiseless. Another form of intermittent drive for shafts located at right angles but not lying in the same plane is illustrated in Fig. 14. This mechanism operates on the same general principle as the
tion
one just described, but differs in regard to the form of the drivmember or cam. This cam B is attached to the end of the
ing
driving shaft
carried
width to the diameter of the
and has an annular groove corresponding rollers on the driven wheel

This annular groove
is
in
by
shaft C.
not continuous as
there are inclined openings on both sides. When the cam revolves in the direction indicated by the arrow, the inclined surface
pushes
roller
over to the
left,
thus causing disk
to
SHAFT
TO REVOLVE CONTINOUSLY.
SHAFT B
TO MAKE ONE-THIRD REVOLUTION, INTERMITTENTLY,
TO ONE REVOLUTION OF SHAFT A

.
Fig. 15.
Intermittent Bevel Gears provided with Auxiliary Locking
Device
turn; at the
posite side
same time, roller EI enters the opening on the opand is pushed over to the central position by cam
This
roller
surface G.
EI remains in the groove until the cam
has
made one
rotation. side
revolution, thus locking the driven wheel against This locking roller then passes out at the opposite
and another roller is engaged by the groove. The ratio of which was used to provide a feeding movement on an automatic machine, depends upon the number of rollers on
this gearing,
the driven wheel.
159
Auxiliary Locking Device for Intermittent Bevel Gears.
The
intermittent bevel gearing illustrated in Fig. 15 is provided with auxiliary locking plates which regulate the motion of the driven gear and hold it stationary while disengaged from the
driver.
The
driving gear
is
on shaft
and revolves continu-
ously.
It is only provided with
enough teeth to rotate the
driven gear and shaft B one-third revolution to one complete revolution of the driver. This mechanism is used to actuate
feeding rolls requiring an intermittent motion. Formerly the gearing was used without the locking device to be described, but there were slight variations in the movements of the driven
shaft so that the gears did not always mesh correctly, which caused them to break, and also interfered with the timing of
the feeding movement. These defects were eliminated by applying locking plates to the shafts A and #, one plate being located
plate on shaft B has three equally spaced flat sides or edges and the plate on shaft A is cut away to provide a clearance space for the protruding sections of the
just
back
of
each gear.
The
plate on shaft B when this shaft is in motion. As the plan view shows, the flat side of the plate on shaft B, during the idle period,
is
intercepted by the plate on A so that the driven shaft is not only locked but its motion is limited to one-third revolution for
each complete turn of the driving shaft. The fast and slow Two-speed Intermittent Rotary Motion. motion of the pattern cylinder of a certain type of loom is derived from the reversible intermittent gearing shown in Fig. 16.
The
and
motion either through the segment gear and crank combination B or through a similar combination C, these
large gear receives its
is
mounted on the pattern
cylinder shaft,
two combinations being used to reverse the direction of rotation. Gear D is the driver for this train of mechanism. Whether the motion is transmitted from gear D to the pattern gear A through the crank and segment gear combination B or through combination
mittent fast and slow motion
depends upon the position of a sliding key F. An interis obtained with either combination.
locks the crank and gear B to the shaft, the pattern rotated at a relatively slow speed when the segment
When key F
wheel
is
i6o
pinion
is
acting as the driver,
and at a
faster speed
when
the
crankpin
the gears
E comes around into engagement with one of the radial

When
this direct drive is
slots in the pattern gear.
employed,
and
combination C.
revolve idly with the upper crank and gear When a reversal of motion is required, sliding
key F is pushed in to engage gear H, which then drives gear G and the combination at C. Intermittent Feed Mechanism. The solution of an interesting problem in design is indicated in Fig. 17. The requirements were that for every one and one-quarter revolution of
Fig.
1 6.
Two-speed Reversing Intermittent Gearing
a continuously rotating shaft A a second shaft L in alignment with the driving shaft must rotate intermittently, with equal
velocity and in the same direction as shaft A one- twelfth revoluAn eccentric bushing C tion or through an angle of 30 degrees. is keyed to the driving shaft A. is loosely 96-tooth gear
,
mounted on
eccentric bushing C,
but
Z>,
is
prevented from rotating

is
by
lever E', the pitch-line of gear
however,
to the pitch-line of the i2o-tooth gear
F and to
always tangent that of the plan-
etary pinion G.
This pinion
is
carried
by a double arm
which
is
161
keyed to the driving shaft A. As arm B traverses the pinion around gear Z), gear F is revolved on shaft A in the ratio of 1 20 to 96 or 1.25 to i. The end of arm B opposite the pinion
also
and roller / which runs on a flange of gear F until a depression in the periphery allows the roller to drop and permits to engage ratchet wheel / which is keyed to shaft L; pawl
carries a link
each time the pawl engages the ratchet wheel, the latter is turned forward until roll 7 runs up on top of the flange again. As gear F advances one-fifth revolution for each revolution of the arm and
pawl, and since 30 degrees equals one-twelfth revolution, the
Fig. 17.
Mechanism
for Rotating Driven Shaft Intermittently
and
at
same
Velocity as Driver
opening or depression for the
roll
must be shortened
of
30 degrees, or to 29 J degrees. Constant Intermittent Motion

feeding
movement
of a planer tool,
each return stroke, is first one direction and then the other, the number of revolutions
The from Variable Motion. the end of which occurs at derived from a shaft which revolves in
depending upon the length of the stroke which is adjusted to The simple mechanism to be described makes it suit the work.
possible to obtain the same rotary movement for operating the feed-screw of the tool-slide, regardless of the number of revolutions
made by
the shaft which drives the feeding mechanism.
l62
is
The arrangement
such that a feed disk or crank at the end of
the driving shaft turns part of a revolution and then remains stationary while the shaft continues to revolve.
of securing this fractional part of a turn and then the motion of the feed disk is illustrated at A in Fig. 18. stopping The link / connects the crankpin of the feed disk with a rack
One method
which, through suitable gearing, transmits motion to the feedscrew. The main pinion shaft of the gear train for driving the
planer table has attached to
its
which forms one part of a friction clutch.
end the cup-shaped casting a, The crank disk b has
Fig. 18.
Mechanisms for Deriving an Unvarying Rotary Movement from a Driving Shaft regardless of the Number of Revolutions made by the Shaft
a hub
other
c,
which
fits
member
into the tapering seat in part a and forms the of the clutch. If this friction clutch is engaged
is
when
the planer
started, the crank disk b revolves until one of
the tapered projections d strikes a stationary taper lug, thus forcing part c out of engagement with a against the tension of spring
e.
The crank disk then remains stationary until part a and the driving shaft reverse their direction of rotation at the end of the stroke. This reversal of motion disengages the tapering surface
d or
di,
as the case
may
be,
and allows the
friction clutch to
reengage; the crank disk is then turned in the opposite direction, until the other tapering projection strikes a second lug which
163
again stops the motion of the feed disk. This intermittent action in first one direction and then the other is continued as
long as the planer is in operation, and the feed disk oscillates through the same arc regardless of the length of stroke or the number of revolutions made by the driving shaft.
Another planer feed mechanism which operates on the same general principle as the one just described is illustrated at B, In this case, the hub g is keyed to the shaft and the Fig. 18.
flange formed
on
this
hub
is
between plates h and
j.
This
flange does not come directly into contact with the plates, as there are leather washers on each side as indicated by the heavy
black
lines.
The
plates h
and j are held
in contact with these
washers by three bolts / having springs under the heads. The hub g is surrounded by a band which is split on the lower side
and has lugs n into which
when
it strikes
the hub.
is fitted a pawl of such shape that, a fixed stop, the band is opened and released from This releasing of the band occurs after the crank disk
has turned far enough to give the necessary feeding movement. The crank is held in position while the driving shaft continues to
revolve,
by the
friction
washers previously referred

of the stroke, the
between plates h and j and the leather to. When reversal occurs at the end
hub g
it
the
band again
grips
revolves in the opposite direction and until the pawl of lug n strikes the oppo-
site stop.
Adjustable
action
Intermittent
Motion.
The
intermittent
feed
mechanism shown
in Fig. 19 is so arranged that the intermittent
be varied according to requirements by means of a " " device. A pitman connecting with skipping simple form of crank B transmits an oscillating movement to lever A. This
may
lever carries a stud
a fiber pawl C.
disk
lever
is
D
A
on its force or upper end upon which is pivoted This pawl engages the smooth periphery of and turns the latter a fractional part of a revolution when
is
moving to the left, unless the engagement of the pawl prevented by the mechanism to be described. The pawl is formed of two pieces attached to opposite sides of a diamond-
shaped block F. This block is within the slot and, being slightly thinner than the bar, causes the projecting sides C to frictionally
164
engage the lower side of the bar. Any motion of lever A towards the right causes the pawl to turn to the position shown so that
it
dears the disk
D for the return stroke.
The
reverse motion of
changes the position of block F so that the ends C grip the disk Dj which is given the required feeding movement. The skipping of the feed is accomplished by a train of change-gears
lever
and a cam G.
lever
This cam serves to
lift
the pin
is
H clear of its seat,

is
so that the bar carrying
pawl C
is
free to slide horizontally as
A moves
to the left;
the result
that the pawl
not
Fig. 19.
Feed Mechanism with Skipping Device Intermittent Motion
for Varying the
turned by frictional resistance to the gripping position, and
it
simply makes an idle stroke. The cam G is pushed in when it strikes dog K and is suddenly thrown outward by a spring
after passing the dog;
this
it
sudden release disengages pin
from
drops again upon the return of bar E. The number of feeding strokes before an idle stroke are governed by the ratio of the change-gears.
its seat,
into which
The mechaAutomatic Variation of Intermittent Motion. nism described in the following is somewhat complicated as it is
designed to turn a driven shaft through a small arc for every
165
other revolution of the driving shaft and according to the following requirements: The feeding movement of the driven
by small amounts until a maximum feed is obtained; the feed then decreases to a minimum, again increases to a maximum, and at this point instantly begins at the minimum again. If a line is drawn representing these movements
shaft
is
to increase
graphically, it will readily be seen that there are two periods of increasing feed and one period of decreasing feed for every cycle
of
movements.
It
was necessary
to derive the feeding motion
from a shaft running at twice the desired speed. The principle upon which this mechanism operates
partly in diagrammatical form, in Fig. 20.
is
shown
carries
The arm C
a sliding block which is connected to lever L by a pitman K. Block D is fed to or from the center of B by screw E, working in a divided nut. On the upper end of C are two intermittent mo-
and G, of six teeth each, with their planes at right angles. Wheel F is pivoted on the side of C, and G is fastened onto E. Wheel F has three projecting pins FI, F%, and F3 placed on alternate teeth and denoted in the illustration by
tion star-wheels
,
black dots.
Suppose star-wheel
.
F is
by the
straight lines)
If
that tooth
is
rotated one tooth (denoted one of the three with the
will be rotated projecting pins on the side, wheel G and screw one-sixth revolution. if the tooth on F has no Conversely, projecting pin, G will not rotate. This method gives the alternating
feed through
of B.
K and L, as the
arm C
revolves about the center
F revolves about B in a path as shown by the which passes midway between the two circles at H. line, These circles represent the controlling star with six teeth or
The
center of
broken
points (denoted
block
by straight lines). A pin (not shown) upon the caused to engage two teeth of Z7, on two successive revolutions before it is retracted. This is done only when the slide is at the upper end of its travel. Star-wheel merely
is
Three projecting points (denoted by black dots) after point of F as it comes around. engage point Suppose it is or that engage with F. Then, by reason of s projections HI their being on the outer side of the center of F, star-wheel F must
operates star F.
i66
it
volve
revolve in an opposite direction to that in which if HI were the projection engaging F, because
inner side of the center path of F. It is now apparent that block
2 is
would reon the
D moves up
the action of
H upon F and F upon G; H
(or down) through and the motion takes place
reaches only for every other revolution of B. When block the outer limit, the pin upon the block is released as mentioned, two teeth before it is retracted, thereby which, in turn, revolves
Fig. 20.
Diagram
of
Mechanism
for Automatically Increasing
and
Decreasing Intermittent Motion of Driven Shaft
of
engaging the opposite side of F, reversing the direction of rotation F and G, and returning D toward the center. Pin H$ is now
brought into action and
goes outward again to the extreme is rotated as before, returning position. into action to open the split nut HI to position and bringing at screw E, which allows a spiral spring in / to return the block
The
controlling star
and pitman K instantly to the center, thus completing one cycle. Through link K, lever L, and pawl M, ratchet A is roA star N is carried by L which is operated by the hinge tated.
167
and which is provided with three projecting pins to tappet lift the eccentric pawl from the ratchet every alternate stroke
of L.
Automatic Indexing Mechanism.

of circular
The indexing
or dividing
work requiring equally spaced grooves milled across the periphery may be controlled automatically by the dividinghead illustrated in Fig. 21. In addition to the transverse and
longitudinal sections shown, there are three detail views which
illustrate
important features.
The mechanism
for controlling
the indexing automatically derives its motion from a spindle L from a special pulley carried on a driven through coupling
bracket attached to the bed of the milling machine.

(see detail view)
The
clutch
on spindle
locks
worm
when
by a spring pressed against the clutch H, acting through rod / and finger /. This engagement with clutch occurs when lock-bolt B is withdrawn from plate C, so
the
is
worm
to the spindle
that worm-wheel
is free
is
to revolve.
The movement
of plate
at each indexing
controlled
by a counter mechanism con-
sisting of a dividing-plate C having teeth on the periphery which which engage the teeth of disk N, thus rotating stop-plate
controls the
engagement indexing movement.
of lock-bolt
and the extent

this
of the
The
table of the milling
machine on which
mechanism
is
used should be arranged to return automatically. When one groove has been milled across the work, the table returns and,
when near the end of the return stroke, lock-bolt B is withdrawn by a suitable mechanism (not shown in the illustration). When this bolt is disengaged from dividing-plate C, the wormwheel E is free to revolve. The pressure of spring H forces rod
to the left, the worm engaging clutch /, finger /, and worm on spindle L which is constantly revolving. As worm and worm-wheel E revolve, rotary motion is transmitted to dividingplate C, and also to spindle G through epicyclic gearing consisting of bevel pinions T mounted on pins U attached to part V which is keyed to the spindle G. The indexing movement con-
tinues until bolt
The movement
of
worm-wheel
enters one of the succeeding holes in plate C. is then arrested and the worm,
i68
as it continues to revolve, disengages itself from clutch

dividing-plate stops rotating. the number corresponding to the number of its holes.
this plate is set in
M and
c,
The
has a number of teeth
Whenever
motion, these teeth engage disk
and turn
Fig. 21.
Automatic Indexing or Dividing Mechanism
the counter 0.
solid portion of this counter is thus
placed
in front of lock-bolt 5,
which prevents the bolt from reengaging
with plate C until a rotation equal to the required number of One of the concave notches in holes has been completed. counter O then releases bolt B which engages plate C. The
169
number of teeth in plates C and N and the notches in counter O depend upon the number of divisions required. This dividinghead may be used the same as the hand-operated design. The
hand-operated indexing movements, as well as the automatic movements, are transmitted to spindle G through the train of
epicyclic gearing previously referred to. Indexing Mechanism of Screw-slotting
Machine.
The
automatic machine to which the indexing mechanism shown in Fig. 22 is applied mills the screw-driver slots across the heads of
The screws to be slotted are placed in a slowly revolving from which they are conveyed by a chute to the workhopper holder or turret M, which, in turn, locates each successive screw
screws.
beneath the narrow cutter or saw, which mills the screw-driver
The work-holding and cutter-feeding movements are derived from a camshaft at the back of the machine which is
slot.
connected with the main driving pulley through change gearing so that the rate of operation may be varied to suit the size of the work.
Fig. 22 is a plan
nism.
view showing the turret operating mechaAfter a screw is released from the chute, it falls into the
shown at A where it is held between a seat in bushing and spring C, which is attached to escapement lever D. This escapement permits the blank to fall into position in the workholding turret and also holds the screw blank in place in bushing B. The lever D receives its motion from cam E on a camshaft at the rear of the machine, which is driven through changeAt F is a vertical shaft extending down through the bed gears. of the machine, which is driven through bevel gearing from the This vertical shaft carries shaft on which cam E is mounted.
position
a revolving
arm G
and
raises it
from the
that strikes locking lever in which it slot in disk
H pivoted
is
at /,
All of
seated.
these parts are shown by dotted lines, as they are located beneath the turret or work-holder of the machine. As arm G
continues
star-wheel
its
movement,
it strikes it
L and
revolves
against one of the teeth of one-sixth revolution. When this
indexing
movement has been completed,
locking lever
again
drops into a slot in K, thus locking the turret in position.
turret carries six equally spaced bushings B, although only one is shown in the illustration. The slotting saw (not and the screw shown) is located on the side opposite bushing
The
blanks, after being placed in the work-holder at A, are indexed around to the saw by the intermittent action of the indexing mechanism, which movement occurs after each screw-head is
slotted.
As the screw blanks
leave position
loosely in place in the bushings
by guard
which
they are held may be ad-
justed in or out to agree with the body
diameter of the screw

blank.
As each screw
arrives at the operat-
ing position beneath the slotting saw, it is held firmly against its
seat in the bushings
by
the inner end of
lever 0.
receives
This lever
its
motion
left-hand
from the
face of
cam E.
not
This
bear
cam
does
against the end of the lever 0, but acts through the

directly
intermediate lever
Fig. 22.
Automatic Indexing Mechanism of a Screw-slotting Machine
which is adjustable by means of the thumb-
screw shown.
It is thus possible to regulate the -pressure with
which
bears against the work, the adjustment being varied according to the size of the screw blank.
The slide carrying the slotting saw moves vertically and is fed downward by a cam as each successive blank is located beneath it. After the slot is milled, the saw is moved upward rapidly
by a
spring action,
and
lever
releases the slotted screw

If the
which
drops through a chute and into a receptacle.
screw blank
171
does not release readily, the continued rotation of the turret brings it into contact with the curved edge of the ejector 5. Incidentally, the bushings B are provided with a number of
by simply turning these seats the bushings are adapted for holding screws of a number outward, of different sizes. The indexing mechanism is so arranged that
any inaccuracy which may occur is in a direction lengthwise of the screw slots and not at right angles to the face of the saw, so that the centering of the slot in the head of the screw is not
affected.
seats in their periphery so that,
The autoCombined Indexing and Locking Mechanism. matic indexing and locking mechanism illustrated in Fig. 23 was designed for a multiple-spindle automatic screw machine.
The motions
machine are all controlled by cams on a camshaft which transmits motion for indexing by means of a chain and sprocket gearing. The sprocket wheel A on the camof this
shaft
is
directly connected
by a chain with a sprocket wheel
head B. Sprocket wheel A is normally loose on its seat on cam C, but it is engaged with the cam for indexing by means of a dog D contained in a slot in the cam. One end
fast to the spindle of this
wheel
dog is arranged to engage a recess inside the hub of sprocket and the outer or projecting end is in position to be acted
upon by stationary cam E. Normally the dog D is out of engagement with the sprocket wheel, but for the indexing movement, cam E throws the dog into engagement, thus revolving the sprocket and the spindle head to a new position. As there are five spindles in \he head, in this case, the spindle head must
be revolved one-fifth revolution at a time.
movement
As
it is
is
completed,
cam
After the indexing disconnects the dog from the
sprocket automatically.
necessary on machines of this class to locate the spindle head very accurately each time it is indexed, some form of auxiliary locating and locking mechanism is employed. In this case, the locking bolt is at G, and is forced into its seat by the spiral spring shown. The action of the bolt is controlled by a lever
H and cam F.
This
cam
is
as the indexing motion
allows the bolt to drop in place as soon completed. The conical point of bolt
172
engages a seat of corresponding form, in whichever plug
is
in position.
periphery
bolt
of.
These plugs are spaced equidistantly about the the spindle head. The tapered seat for the end of
formed partly in the plug and partly in the bushing through which the plug passes, as indicated by the detailed
is
With this arrangement, the location of the spindle head does not depend upon the closeness of the fit of the cylindrical part of the locking bolt in bushing J.
view.
Fig. 23.
Indexing and Locking Mechanism for Spindle Multiple-spindle Automatic Screw Machine
Head
of
to be described
Action of an Adding Mechanism. The adding mechanism is applied to a machine which is a typewriter
and adding machine combined. With this machine (the Ellis), debit and credit accounts may be written down indiscriminately; each set of items added, and the total amount printed beneath each vertical column. The writing is done on the typewriter in the regular way, and the figures are set up and printed with the adding mechanism at the same time that the reading matter is written. Two adding mechanisms or " accumulators " are required, one being for the debit and the other for the credit column. This machine may also be used in various other ways. For instance, a list of items may be printed in a series of vertical
173
columns and these columns added to obtain the total amount in

both horizontal and vertical directions; finally, these totals, both horizontal and vertical, may be added together to obtain
the grand total. Discounts may also be reckoned, amounts may be subtracted from each other, and many other operations per-
formed in connection with commercial work.
The adding keyboard is composed of nine vertical rows of nine keys each. The lower key of each row is numbered one, the next
two, and so on up to nine. Of the nine vertical rows, the first on the right is for units, the next, for tens, etc., or, since the reckoning is usually in dollars and cents, the first row is for cents, the
next, for dimes,
Figs. 24 and the machine along the 25 show diagrammatical sections through line of any one of the vertical rows of adding keys, which are
for dollars.
and the succeeding rows,
shown at G.
rack A, the type sector F,
Other important parts of the mechanism are the by means of which the numbers are
printed on paper carried by roller K, and the accumulator wheels B, by which the addition is performed. These parts, as well as
the other
moving mechanism shown, are duplicated
for each one
rows of keys, there being nine racks, nine type bars, nine sets of accumulator wheels, etc., in all.
of the nine
A.
The adding mechanism is operated by the movement of rack This movement takes place under the influence of spring
whenever stop
is
swung back as shown
in Fig. 25
by the
movement which
by
keys G.
for instance,
operation of the handle of the machine. thus gives to rack spring

If the figure $476.34 is set
The
length of the
is
determined
up on the keyboard,
key
"
"
will
be depressed in the cents column,

will
and,
when
is
the
movement
of the rack takes place, the rack teeth
beneath the accumulator wheel

This
G is
have moved four spaces. where each of the keys shown to be mounted on a stem which carries a stop at the
more
clearly seen in Fig. 24
the keys are depressed, these stops come into line with corresponding steps formed at the left-hand end
lower end.
When
A.
These steps are so proportioned that when key depressed, for instance, the rack is allowed to move one tooth before striking its abutment. When key 2 is depressed,
of the rack
i is
174
it
175
moves two
teeth
and so
on, as
at the lower part of the illustration.
indicating zero, then a stop is movement of the rack. When key 9 is depressed, the rack takes the full movement of nine teeth allowed by the striking of the
shown by the numbered arrows When no key is depressed, interposed which prevents any
projections on the under side of the rack against supporting
bar/.
Each rack A has cut in it a slot engaging pin C in sector D. Each sector is, in turn, connected by link E with the type bar F having numbers from o to 9. Whenever a key (key 4, for instance) is depressed as shown in Fig. 25, and the rack is allowed to move four teeth backward under the influence of
spring 0, the type bar
The throwing forward

It is
F is thereby set at the corresponding figure. of lever L to which the type bar is pivoted
"
"
then prints this figure
on paper wrapped about roll K. important to remember that rack A and type bar F are posiIt should, perhaps, be tively connected under all conditions.
4
simply provide for more accurate alignment of the type in printing than would otherwise be possible. Just before the printing stroke takes place, arm
mentioned that the teeth in sector
carrying a plate which enters the corresponding tooth space in each one of the nine sectors D, aligning all the figures on type bars F and giving a good, evenly printed number
W swings up,
on paper. The Accumulator Mechanism. by means of which the adding
The accumulator mechanism,

is
done on the machine previously referred to, will now be described. There are ordinarily nine accumulator wheels for each of the nine racks. This particular machine, however,
set being
above rack
is
has two sets of nine wheels each, one (see Fig. 25), and the other below it.
the
is
The upper one

debit column
credit column.
the debit accumulator for addition in
and the other
the credit accumulator for the
be considered.
Only the upper or debit accumulator will now This set of nine accumulator wheels, of which
only one is shown at B, may be swung into and out of engagement with the teeth of racks A at will. These accumulator
t
wheels have 20 teeth each; they could have ten, except for the
I 76
fact
177
that
is
wheel
to
it.
it would make them inconveniently small. Each provided with a two-tooth ratchet positively pinned This ratchet spans ten of the wheel teeth between its
points.
and
adapted to engage the teeth of ratchet M, connected with the mechanism by means of which the tens are carried from one column to another (that is, from one
is
is
Pawl
accumulator wheel to another) as will be described later. Order of Operations for Adding. Figs. 26 and 27 show, in
diagrammatical form, the method of procedure followed in the
simple problem of adding 4 to 9, and obtaining the sum 13. At " A, Fig. 26, the machine is shown clear," that is, with the ac-
cumulator wheels at zero, which means that one tooth of the two-tooth ratchet is up against the hook of the pawl. Key 4,
corresponding to the number to be added, in this case, into the accumulator wheel, is now depressed and the operating handle
of the
is
machine
is
that the rack
pulled over. is allowed to
shown at
is
(see also Fig. 25).
thing that takes place four teeth to the right, as In this position, the number " 4 "
first
The move
printed.
Next
(as
shown at
in Fig. 26) the
mechanism
automatically throws the accumulator wheel down into engagement with the rack. Then as the operator allows the handle
to the zero position again as the accumulator wheel with it a space of carrying four teeth from its zero position. The mechanism then disento return, the rack
moves back
shown at
Z),
gages the accumulator wheel, leaving the machine ready for the next operation with the 4 added into the accumulator, as shown
atE.
To add 9
handle.
as
to the 4, key 9 is depressed and the operator pulls the This results in a movement of nine teeth of the rack
shown at
in Fig. 27.
is
The
figure 9 is then printed.
The
is
accumulator wheel
next engaged, as at G.
Then
the rack
returned to the zero position as at H, and the accumulator wheel is disengaged as at I. This evidently moves the accumulator
wheel 9
it.
+4=
13 teeth as
shown at H.
lifts
In doing
it
this,
one of
the teeth of the two-tooth ratchet
the pawl as
passes under
This raising of the pawl operates a spring-loaded mechanism, which shifts the next accumulator wheel (that for the tens col-
i 78
iimn) one tooth, when the wheels are returned from engagement " This operation corresponds to that of in operation /. carry" when adding with pencil and paper, except that it is done ing automatically. This carrying mechanism will not be described
in detail as the parts are small
and rather complicated, although
MACHINE CLEAR,
A < ACCUMULATOR
IWHEEL AT ZERO
u
f
PRESS KEY "4,"
MOVE RACK TO
POSITION,
AND PRINT
ENGAGE ACCU1
MULATOR WHEEL
RETURN RACK TO
ZERO POSITION, AND ADD 4 INTO ACCU-
MULATOR WHEEL
DISENGAGE ACCU-
MULATOR WHEEL
Fig. 26.
Diagrams
illustrating Principle
Governing Action of Adding
Mechanism
the action
clearly
of
is
simple.
by considering them in the accumulator, from cents up

set at 9
The mechanism may be understood more the actions of the wheels when every one
to the millions of
dollars, is
Now
is, when they are set up for 9,999,999.99. suppose that one cent is added, so that the first wheel is
that
179
moved beyond
will
that
is,
to o.
The
tooth of the ratchet
then pass under the first pawl, raising it. When the accumulator wheels return from engagement, this raising of the first pawl releases a spring-loaded mechanism which moves the
next wheel from 9 to
o.
This, in turn,
moves the next wheel from
9 to o and so on until each one of the row has been advanced one This operation is tooth, setting the whole row at 0,000,000.00.
done so rapidly that one cannot distinguish between the successive operations, but each one is dependent upon the preceding
one.
/,
operations required for finding a total are shown at The first thing the operator does is to Fig. 27. " " the credit total depress key at the left of the keyboard, the sum having been added into the upper or credit accumulator.
The
K, L, and M,
He
then pulls the operating handle, and the accumulator wheels are engaged with the racks as shown at /. The next operation is the release of the racks so that the springs move them toward
the right. There are, in this case, no keys depressed in the keyboard, so that the racks would move the full distance of nine
were it not for the fact that they have to carry the accumulator wheels with them, and the ratchets on these wheels come in contact with the pawls, thus arresting their movement
teeth,
and stopping the movement
of the racks.
adding 9 to the 4 in the wheel set " units wheel three teeth beyond the point of the ratchet, " and the tens wheel," one tooth beyond the point of the ratchet.
operation of
the "
The previous
the units rack will be evident, then, that in operation move three teeth and the tens rack one tooth. This " " and the tens type will evidently set up the unit type bar at 3 " i." bar at On the return of the handle, the printing mecha" " to the paper. The nism is operated, transferring the total 13 accumulator wheel will then be released, and the rack will be
It
is
allowed to
This allowed to return to the zero position as shown at leaves all the accumulator wheels back in the zero position, with
.
the teeth of the ratchets back against the pawls, leaving the " " chine clear and ready for the next operation.
It
ma-
might have been desired to print a sub-total instead of a total; that is, a total for the addition as far as it had proceeded,
i8o
KEY "9,"
[PRESS
F
<\
MOVE RACK TO
[POSITION,
AND PRINT
(ENGAGE ACCUi
MULATOR WHEEL
CARRY 10
RETURN RACK TO ZERO, ADD 9 TO 4 IN ACCUMULATOR WHEEL = 13 (OR 3 AND CARRY 10)
(DISENGAGE ACCU-
MULATOR WHEEL
ENGAGE ACCUMULATOR
WHEELS FOR TOTAL
RACK TO
POSI-
TION AGAINST ACCU-
MULATOR WHEEL STOP, AND {MOVEPRINT TOTAL (13)
DISENGAGE ACCU-
J
I
MULATOR WHEELS
AT ZERO POSITION
TO (RETURN RACK ZERO POSITION,
(MACHINE CLEAR
Fig. 27.
Continuation of Diagrams illustrating Operation of Adding
Mechanism
but not to
set
181
clear the machine, thus permitting more figures to be and printed and added into the same sum. Sub- totals up can be printed at any point in the adding up of a line of figures, as required, by a simple change in the operation shown at /, K, in Fig. 27. This consists simply in allowing the L, and wheels to remain in engagement at L, so that the racks, when they return in operation M, will bring the wheels to the same position as they had in J, thus leaving the totals still set up in the accumulator. Since there are two independent accumulators, it is evident that a number can be added into either one or both of them; or a total or sub-total can be taken from one of them and added into the other all depending upon the manipulation of the keys and the time of throwing the accumulator wheels into and out of action. " This adding machine has what are known as controlling keys." " " " These are named debit add," debit sub-total," non-add,"
"debit total," "credit add," "credit sub-total," " credit total,"

error." The pressing down of the non-adding the printing of a number without adding. In other key permits words, this keeps the accumulators permanently out of engage-
"
repeat,"
and "
ment with the racks. The debit and credit add keys permit a number to be printed and added into the corresponding accumulator,
even though the carriage
is
not set in the proper position
for that accumulator.
The use
flexibility to the
machine
of these keys, therefore, gives which is necessary for special oper-
ations such as horizontal adding. The debit and credit subtotal keys take and print a total from either the debit or credit
accumulators without clearing the accumulators. The debit and credit total keys, on the other hand, take the total from
either the debit or credit accumulators, as the case
clear the
may
The
be,
and
accumulator after the total
is
printed.
pressing
key holds in the downward position whichever of the number keys have been depressed, allowing the same number to be repeatedly printed and added as many
of the repeat
down
times as the operating handle is pulled. This is useful in additions and for other similar uses. multiplying by repeated
The
pressing of the error key will release every other key
on
182
the keyboard, both of the number keys and of the operating keys as well. The keyboard is provided with an interlocking mechanism
connected with the controlling keys of the machine and with the operating lever. This mechanism, among other things, prevents the keys from being pressed down or changed after the
operating lever movement is started. The keyboard also has a connection with an error key, the pressing of which releases all
the keys that
may
be depressed at the time.
Means
are also
Fig. 28.
Flying Lever Connection between Operating Shaft and
Accumulators
of
Adding Mechanism
provided for automatically releasing and returning the keys after each operation.
Accumulator Controlling Mechanism. The engagement of the accumulators with the racks, and their release, in the operation of the adding mechanism previously described, is effected as follows: The sector (see Fig. 28) is directly connected with
the operating shaft L controlled by the operating handle. It is provided with connections with both accumulators, although
this illustration
cumulator.
only shows the connections with the debit acis connected with the debit acFlying lever
cumulator by means
of links Oi
and bellcrank Q.
Member
183
P is simply a spring detent to locate Q for either the engaged or disengaged position of the accumulator wheels. starts on its stroke toward the dotted position, As sector
flying lever
is
carried with
the end of the latter
owing to the resistance which meets with against abutment R. When

it,
K has gone
off
far
R, the lever
enough so that the end of the lever has dropped becomes free. The movement has been
however, to move accumulator lever Q to position Q\ which throws the wheels into engagement. If it had been desired to throw the wheels into engagement at the end of the
sufficient,
stroke instead of at the beginning, detent R would have been withdrawn from the position shown, leaving flying lever free. Near the end of the stroke of K, however, the end of the pawl S would have struck stud T, making and K solid, for all practical purposes, and moving Q to the position Qi at the end of the If it had been desired to keep the accumulator wheels stroke. out of engagement altogether, R would have been lowered out of the position shown, and 6 would have been moved to a posi-
tion clear of stud T.

entirely free of
Then
flying lever
of
K, and no movement
would have been would have taken place.
The
provisions for throwing the accumulator out of engagement at either the commencement or end of the return stroke are
similar to those just described.
12
ft
CHAPTER
MANY
VII
IRREGULAR MOTIONS
machine parts require either an intermittent or an irregular motion instead of moving continuously or at a uniform The most common method of obtaining an irregular velocity.
motion
is by means of cams which have grooves or surfaces of such shape or form that the required motion is imparted to the driven member when the cam is in motion. The exact move-
ment derived from any cam depends upon

ating groove or edge which
may
the shape of its operbe designed according to the
motion required. Cams may be classified according to the relative movements of the cam and follower and also according to the motion of the follower itself. In one general class may be included those cams which move or revolve either in the same plane as the follower
or a parallel plane, and in a second general class, those cams which cause the follower to move in a different plane which ordinarily is perpendicular to the plane of the motion of the cam.
The
belonging to either class may either move in a straight line or receive a swinging motion about a shaft or bearing. The follower may also have either a uniform motion
follower of a
cam
or a uniformly accelerated motion. The working edge or groove of a uniform motion cam is so shaped that the follower moves at
speeds, owing from the sudden movement of the follower at the beginning of the stroke and the abrupt way in which the motion is stopped at the end of the stroke. If the cam is to
to the shock resulting rotate quite rapidly, the speed of the follower should be slow at and be accelerated at a uniform rate until the maximum
same velocity from the beginning to the end Such cams are only adapted to comparatively slow
the
of the stroke.
first
speed
is
attained, after
which the motion

184
of the follower should
be uniformly decreased until motion ceases, or a reversal takes
IRREGULAR MOTIONS
place;
185
such cams are known as
"
uniformly accelerated motion
cams."
Several different forms of cams are shown in Cam. The form illustrated at A is commonly called a " plate Fig. i. cam," because the body of the cam is in the form of a narrow
Plate
plate, the
edge of which is shaped to give the required motion to the follower. This follower may be mounted in suitable guides
and have a reciprocating motion (as indicated in the or it may be in the form of an arm or lever which
the
illustration)
oscillates as
cam
revolves.
it
When
the follower
is
in a vertical position
be held in contact with the cam either by the action of gravity alone or a spring may be used to increase the
as shown,
may
contact pressure, especially if there are rather abrupt changes in the profile of the cam and the speed is comparatively fast.
Positive
Fig.
i, is
Motion Cam.
The cam
illustrated
by diagram B,
similar to the type just described, except that the roller
of the follower engages a groove instead of
the periphery.
Cams
of this general
merely resting against " form are known as face
and their distinctive feature is that the follower is given a positive motion in both directions, instead of relying upon a
cams
"
spring or the action of gravity to return the follower. The follower, in this particular case, is in the form of a bellcrank lever and is given an oscillating motion. One of the defects of the
face
tate
cam
is
that the outer edge of the
cam groove
tends to ro-
the roller in one direction and the inner edge tends to certain amount of clearrotate it in the opposite direction.
ance must be provided in the groove and, as the roll changes its contact from the inner edge to the outer edge, there is an instantaneous reversal of rotation which
inertia of the rapidly revolving roll;
is
resisted,
due to the
the resulting friction tends
wear both the cam and the roll. This wearing action, however, may not be serious when the cam rotates at a slow speed. If the speed is high, there is also more or less shock each time the
to
follower
is
reversed, owing to the clearance between the roller

for
and the cam groove.

-
Plate
Cam
arranged
Positive
Motion.
In order to
avoid the defects referred to in connection with the face cam,
i86
Fig. i.
Different Types of
Cams
cam is sometimes equipped with two which operate on opposite sides of the cam, as shown at C, Fig. i. With such an arrangement, the curve of the cam for moving the follower in one direction must be complementary to
the follower of a plate
rollers
the curve of the remaining half of the cam, since the distance between the rollers remains constant. In other words, this cam
may
be designed to give any motion throughout 180 degrees of
IRREGULAR MOTIONS
its
187
movement, but the curvature
of the remaining half of the

first.
cam must correspond
to that of the
When
cam
is
laid
out in this way, the distance between the sides as measured along any center line, as at xx or yy, is constant and represents the
distance between the rollers of the follower. the term constant diameter
For
this reason,
sometimes applied to this class which is adapted for heavier work than the grooved face cam The follower or driven member is slotted to illustrated at B.
is
cam
receive the camshaft,
and
this slot acts as a guide
and keeps
the rollers in alignment with the center of the cam. Return Cam for Follower. When the curvature of one-half
of a cam does not correspond to the curvature of the other half, a special return cam is necessary, if the follower is equipped with two rollers in order to secure a positive drive. A main and re-
turn
cam
is
illustrated at Z), Fig.
The main cam may be
laid
out to give any required motion for a complete revolution of 360 degrees, and the return cam has a curvature which corre-
sponds to the motion of the return roller on the follower. After the main cam is laid out to give whatever motion is required,
points as at a, 6, c, d, etc., are located on the path followed by the center of the roller, and, with these points as centers, the points e, /, g, and h are located diametrically opposite, and at a
distance equal to the center-to-center distance between the rollers. These latter points lie in the path followed by the center of the
return
roller,
and by
striking arcs
from them having a radius
equal to the roller radius, the curvature or working surface of the return cam may be laid out. One method of arranging these
two cams is to place the follower between them and attach the The camshaft, in rollers on opposite sides of the followers. some cases, carries a square block which is fitted to the elongated slot in the follower to serve as a guide and a bearing surface. Another form of positive motion Yoke Type of Follower. cam is shown at E, Fig. i. In this case, the follower has a surface which is straight or tangential to the curvature of the cam.
With a
is flat
follower of this kind, there
is
a limitation to the motion
which can be imparted to

or plane,
it is
it, because, when the contact surface evident that no part of the cam can be con-
l88
cave since a concave surface could not become tangent to the straight face of the follower, and even though the follower is
curved or convex any concave part of the cam must have a radius which is at least as great as the radius of any part of the follower. The type of cam shown at E, like the one illustrated at C, can
only be laid out for a motion representing 180 degrees of cam rotation; the curvature of the remaining half of the cam must be complementary to the first half or correspond to it. The
has a dwell or period of rest at each end of its stroke, the parts x and y being concentric with the axis of the camshaft. This general type of cam has been
follower of the
cam shown
at
used for operating light mechanisms and also to actuate the

valves of engines in stern-wheel river steamers. On all of the cams previously referred to, Inverse Cams. the curved surface for controlling the motion has been on the
driving member. shown at F (Fig.
roller
With a cam
i)
of the inverse type,

is
such as
is
the
cam groove
in the follower
and the
which engages this groove is attached to the driving memThe motion of this cam can be laid out for only 180 deber. The inverse type of cam is used chiefly on of movement. grees the particular cam illustrated at F being light mechanisms,
designed to operate a reciprocating bar or slide. The curved part of the slot in the follower has the same radius as the path of
the driving
roller,
and serves to
arrest the
motion
of the slide
momentarily.
head
is
similar
The well-known Scotch yoke or slotted crossto an inverse cam having a straight slot that is
perpendicular to the center line of the follower. (The motion obtained with the Scotch yoke and its practical application is
referred to in Chapter III.)
The form of cam shown at G, Wiper and Involute Cams. Fig. i, is simply a lever which has a curved surface and operates with an oscillating movement through an arc great enough to
give the required lift to the follower. " " " " or a called a wiper cam, lifting toe
cam
of this
kind
is
and has been employed
and harbor steamboats for operating the engine valves. Many involute cams are somewhat similar in form to the type illustrated at G, and they are so named because the cam curve
on
river
IRREGULAR MOTIONS
is
189
of involute form.
in
stamp
mills.
Such cams are used on the ore crushers Several cams are placed on one shaft and as
they revolve the rods carrying the stamps are raised throughout part of the cam revolution. Disengagement of the cam and follower then causes the latter to drop.
Cams having
The
principle
Fig.
Rectilinear
Motion.
Some cams
is
instead of
rotating are simply given a rectilinear or straight-line motion.
upon which such cams operate

i.
shown by
dia-
gram H,
The cam
or block k
is
given a reciprocating
motion in some form
is shaped so as to impart the required motion to the follower /. An automatic screw machine of the multiple-spindle type is equipped with a
of guide,
and one edge
cam
of this general type for operating side-working tools, the tool-slide receiving its motion from the cam which, in turn, is
actuated by the turret-slide.
This type of cam
is
to an automatic lathe for operating the radial
arm
also applied or tool-holder.
to Plane of Cam. The cams previously referred to all impart motion to a follower which moves in a plane which either coincides with or is parallel to the plane of the motion of the cam. The second general class of cams previously referred to, which cause the follower to move in a plane usually perpendicular to the plane of the motion of the cam, is illustrated by the design shown at /, Fig. i. This form is known as a " cylinder " or " barrel " cam. There are two general methods of making cams of this type. In one case,
Cams
for
Motion Perpendicular
a continuous groove of the required shape is milled in the cam body, as shown in the illustration, and this groove is engaged by a roller attached to the follower. Another very common
method
of constructing cylinder cams, especially for use
on auto-
matic screw machines, is to attach plates to the body of the cam, which have edges shaped to impart the required motion to the
follower. When a groove is formed in the cam body, it should have tapering sides and be engaged by a tapering roller, rather than by one of cylindrical shape, in order to reduce the friction
and wear.
Automatic Variation of
derived from a
cam
is
Motion. Ordinarily the motion the same, the cam being designed always
Cam
igo
especially for a given
and constructed
movement.
It is possible,
however, to vary the motion, and this may be the relative positions of the driving and driven
auxiliary device.
done by changing members by some
This variation may be in the extent or magnitude of the movement or a change in the kind of motion derived from the cam. The cam mechanism shown at A in Fig. 2 is so
is
arranged that every other movement of each of the two followers The bellcrank levers a and b, which are the followers, varied.
have cam surfaces on the lower ends, and they are given a
Fig. 2.
Mechanisms
for
Varying Motion Normally derived from

c
Cams
swinging motion by rolls d and e pivoted to arm with the shaft h seen in the center of the arm.
which revolves
The requirements are that each lever have first a uniform motion and then a variable motion; it is also necessary to have a change in the variable stroke until twelve strokes have been completed, when the cycle of variable motions is repeated. For
instance, every other vibration of each lever
angle,
is
through a certain
and
for twelve alternate vibrations the stroke is
changed
from a
maximum
to a
minimum, and
vice versa,
the angle of
the uniform vibration being the

for the variable strokes.
when
roll
d engages the
mean or average movement The uniform vibration is obtained cam surface on either lever a or b, and
IRREGULAR MOTIONS
the variable
191
This
roll is
movement is derived from roll e on the opposite end. mounted eccentrically on bushing / which is rotated
in its seat
lution of
by star-wheel g, one-twelfth revolution for each revoarm c; consequently, the roll is moved either toward or
axis of shaft h, thus varying the angle of vibration
away from the

accordingly.
Another mechanism which serves to vary the motion derived from a cam surface is shown at B in Fig. 2. This mechanism
used in conjunction with the one previously described. A motion represented by the curvature / of a plate cam is reproduced by the upper end of the rod or lever q. One movement of the rod end is an exact duplicate of the cam curvature, and this
is
movement
represents the
is
mean
of a cycle of twelve
movements,
each of which
a reproduction of the curvature on an increasing
or diminishing scale from maximum to minimum, or vice versa. The lever returns to the starting position with a rectilinear or
The lever is given a reciprocating movement by crank j and connecting link k. The roll 5 at the lower end of the lever is kept in contact with cam surface / by spring t. The lever q is fulcrumed and slides in the oscillating bearing m
straight-line motion.
which
is
supported by the slotted cross-head n. This cross-head operated by roll o which is carried by a crankpin on a twelveis
tooth ratchet wheel p.

resulting tension
When
/
the
mechanism
line
roll s to
is
in action, the
crank j throws connecting link k out of
on spring
causes
with lever q and the follow the outline or

travel
is
curvature
of the
cam until the upper end of the

is
reached;
then the connecting link k
thrown out
of line with lever q in
the opposite direction, which causes spring / to force roll s against the straight return guide r. For each revolution of the
crank, a pawl turns the ratchet wheel p one tooth, so that the slotted cross-head n and the bearing are gradually raised and then lowered. As the result of this upward and downward move-
ment
is
of bearing m, which is the fulcrum for lever q, the motion increased and then diminished the desired amount.
Varying Dwell of
Cam Follower.
in Fig. 3 is for varying the dwell of a of time it remains stationary.
The mechanism illustrated cam follower or the length The cam A lifts lever B during
IQ2
three-fourths of a revolution, and during the dwell the follower B is held up by the latch C. This latch is controlled by pawl D,
cam E, and
in its edge
spring F.
is
and
four-tooth gear G.
The cam E has ratchet-shaped notches made integral or in one piece with a twentyThe ratchet and gear are revolved upon the
H, by the planetary every twenty-four revolutions of cam A.
hub
of a twenty-five-tooth stationary gear
pinion K, once for
With
this particular
mechanism, the lever
is
given a dwell of
90 360 degrees
degrees for the first revolution; thereafter the dwell increases

after each rise of the follower, until the fourth period
4.
Fig. 3.
Arrangement
for Varying
Dwell
of
Cam
Follower
it is
(which gives 1530 degrees dwell) when the dwell decreases until again 90 degrees; that is, during the fourth period the rise occurs while the cam makes three-fourths revolution, and then
there is a dwell equivalent to 4^ revolutions. Twenty-four revolutions are required to complete a cycle of movements. When milling the teeth in cam E, the index-head was arranged
for twenty-four divisions,
but teeth were cut only at the follow-
ing divisions: 1-2-4-7-11-16-20-23. When the mechanism is in use, latch C is disengaged whenever pawl enters a notch
in
thus allowing lever B to drop suddenly. Automatic Variation of Cam Rise and Drop.
cam E,
The
special
design of
cam
illustrated in Fig. 4 normally has a i2o-degree
IRREGULAR MOTIONS
rise,
193
a 6o-degree dwell, a go-degree drop, and a go-degree dwell.
In the operation of the machine to which this
cam was
applied,
however, it was necessary to vary the motion derived from the cam in accordance with the pressure exerted upon a certain
part of the machine; for instance, if the pressure exceeds a given limit during a dwell, the rise must take place in 90 degrees instead of 120 degrees; whereas, if the pressure decreases below
the desired amount, the drop
must be lengthened
to 120 degrees.
Fig. 4.
Cam
to
equipped with Mechanism for Varying Rise and Drop according Predetermined Pressure on another Part of the Machine
The mechanism
for automatically varying the
cam motion
is
comparatively simple, as the illustration indicates.
The main cam A carries two auxiliary cams B and C. These cams are driven by pins, which pass through them as shown by the sectional view, and they are free to slide upon these pins and
K
is
the shaft, parallel to the axis of the shaft. Cam B carries a roller and cam C, a roller L. Adjacent to these movable cams, there
a disk
M and N.
having two sets of ratchet teeth and two side cams (The end view of this disk is shown at the lower part
IQ4
of the illustration.)
pawl
rests
upon the block
until the
increase or decrease of pressure interferes with the balance of the spring shown and causes pawl F to drop into engagement
with a ratchet tooth.
As soon as this engagement occurs, disk and cams and N come into engagement stops rotating with rollers K and L and force cams B and C over toward cam A so that they engage the wide cam-roller on the follower, and give it the required variation of movement. The cam H re-
turns pawl F to the neutral position. Sectional Interchangeable Cams for Varying Motion. A flexible cam system was required that made it possible to vary the motion relative to the complete cycle of movements by substituting one interchangeable
of using a large single
cam
for
section for another, instead
cam
each variation.
Two
distinct
methods
of obtaining practically indentical results
were suc-
One mechanism was a rotary type and the cessfully evolved. other involved the use of rectilinear motion for the cam sections. Both mechanisms might properly be called " magazine " cams, because the cam sections are continually placed in action and
then replaced by others in successive order.
rotary design is illustrated in Fig. 5. The cam sections shown at A are semi-circular. The continuity of the cam sur-
The
is
face
obtained by making each semi-circular section in the form
of a half turn of a spiral with close-fitting joints, the complete cam appearing like a worm. The sections are fed longitudinally
along the shaft and successively under the lever roller at a rate Four feathers C of advance equaling the lead of the spiral.
are provided to guide and retain the cams. The two screws producing the longitudinal movement are driven by pinions meshing with an internal gear F, which is fastened to the bearing.
D E
feathers extend only to within the width of one cam from the left bearing, two sections drop from the shaft at every revolution, the dropping sections being guided by the guides G.
As the
The double cam upon
the driving gear 7, the lever 7, and the carrier-slide provide the means for hanging the semi-circular catches each cams upon the magazine bar H. The slide
piece
by
the pins
and,
by
pushing one, causes the further one
IRREGULAR MOTIONS
to slide onto the lifting slide
195
M which engages
i
The
gears
N and 0, in
the ratio of
to
2,
grooved hub. and disk P operate a

its
slide for returning the
cams
to their shaft.
The
rollers
on
successively engage the steps
MI and
z,
thus raising the slide
which drops back automatically. To facilitate engagement between the cam threads and the
screws, the square threads of the latter are
V-shaped at the
entering ends, and, to insure locking the cams to the shaft quickly, the ends of the feathers recede into pockets and fly out by the action of springs. Any part of the system may be
Fig. 5.
Cam Mechanism
provided with Interchangeable Sections for Varying Motion of Follower
changed by placing the desired section in a holder and introand the magazine bar. The cam ducing it between the slide to be removed the dropping cam comes out upon an inclined
runway of the holder. The alternate design is the rectilinear cam system shown in The mechanism consists of the cam sections A proFig. 6.
y
vided with rack teeth at B.
(See also detail sectional view.)
Each
section has four lugs C which act as guides in the ways D. feeds the sections along beneath the lever roller, pinion
and the
frictionally driven pinion
assembles them.
it is
When
any
section has passed beneath the roller,
automatically
196
chute.
hung upon the magazine

slightly longer
The forward
lugs
are
made
than the rear ones, to span the gap G; but the rear lugs enter the gap just as the forward lugs clear the ways. The sections are taken from the lower part of the ways in the
magazine by spring-controlled forks upon the chain / which engage the lugs and lift the cams until the smaller lugs strike at the corner /. The linked gear meanwhile engages the rack, and as it swings about the center L, it lifts the cam up against the ways; here the resistance offered to further motion of the links
causes
to rotate about its
own
center
and
slide the
cam
into
Fig. 6.
Interchangeable
Cam
Sections which have a Rectilinear Motion
place.
Substitute sections are introduced at
M, and
the replaced
sections are lifted from the ways.
Variable Rotary Motion derived from

application of
is
Cam.
An
unusual
In this case, a cam used to impart a variable speed to a shaft which makes the
a
is
cam
same number
of revolutions as its driving shaft.
The
driving
shaft carries a casting A to which is fulcrumed the lever in turn, has a roll on each end. One roll engages a cam
is
B which,
C which
it.
other
The supported upon roll bears upon a lug on the side of gear D which is also free upon the shaft, but is constrained to revolve with it either
the shaft but does not revolve with
faster or slower, according to the relative positions of lever
and cam C.
IRREGULAR MOTIONS
Group
of
197
Cams engaged Successively.
The mechanism
to be
described was designed to engage with the driving shaft first one and then another of the cams in a group of five mounted
It was necessary to have these cams opershaft. ate their respective levers successively back and forth from one end of the group to the other, and while any one cam was in
upon the same
action the others
must remain stationary with
their lever rolls
Eight revolutions of the shaft were reto complete one cycle of movements. The device for quired
dwell.
on a po-degree
Fig. 7.
Application of
Cam
for Varying Rotary
Motion
controlling the action of these
cams A, B, C,
etc., are
by a roll-key G which is caused to move from end to end. This motion of the roll-key and K\. (See longitudinal section is obtained from ratchets at lower part of illustration, which is taken at an angle of 90
inside of the shaft
in bearings E. hollow shaft is effected
cams is shown in Fig. 8. The mounted upon a hollow shaft D carried The engagement of successive cams with the
degrees to upper section in order to show more clearly the conAs the roll-key is moved along, it follows the instruction.)
clined surfaces
which bring
as at
it
spective
cam keyways,
M.
double-ended pawl
(see also
engagement with the reWithin the roll-key there is a detail view) which is held into
into
198
engagement with either ratchet K or K\ by balls and springs. The ratchets are cut oppositely and are given a reciprocating movement by cam O, roll N, and roll screw P which causes both
similar equipment on the ratchets to reciprocate together. opposite end of the ratchet makes the motion positive. When
the roll-key has engaged the last

of the ratchet causes the
cam
in one direction, the return
pawl
to rise onto a higher surface,
'AWL L
Fig. 8.
Cams
it
in a
Group engaged Successively
thereby throwing
into
mesh with the other
ratchet and effect-
ing the reversal. Obtaining Resultant Motion of Several Cams.
driven
member
or follower
is
given a motion corresponding to the re-
sultant motion of four other cam-operated followers by the mechanism to be described. These followers are in the form of
levers,
which are equally spaced and fulcrumed upon one bar.

independently by four positive-
Four
of the levers are operated
IRREGULAR MOTIONS
motion cams.
199
the group, is, the forces
The fifth lever, which is in the center of

motion
of all the others; that
receives the resultant
acting upon the other four levers are automatically resolved and their resultant in magnitude and direction is transmitted posiIt is not necessary to show the cams tively to the fifth lever. or levers to illustrate the principle involved, but the ingenious apparatus by means of which the resultant motion is obtained
is is
shown
in horizontal section in Fig. 9.
Each
of the four levers
connected by a knuckle joint to one of the racks A, B, C, and D. These racks are free to slide up and down independently
and are arranged in two pairs. One pair meshes with pinion E and the other pair with pinion F. As the arrangement of the mechanism is symmetrical it will only be necessary to describe the action of one side. Any movements of the levers connecting
Fig. 9.
Mechanism
for Obtaining Resultant
Motion
of Several
Cams
and B will be transmitted to pinions E and G, which are mounted on one stud and rotate together. A stationary rack H and a sliding rack / engage pinion G. The sliding rack
with racks
/ carries a pinion K L and a sliding rack

to
M
D
which, in turn, engages a stationary rack is located on sliding bar P Pinion

.
which
is
attached the
fifth lever
previously referred to.
In order to illustrate the action of this mechanism, assume that rack A lifts one inch, rack B drops one-half inch, rack C is
one-quarter inch. The resultant is a three-quarter inch rise. In analyzing the motion, it should be remembered that a pinion moving along a stationary rack
stationary,
and rack
lifts
will cause
a movable rack on the opposite side to travel with twice the pitch-line velocity of the pinion, which fact and its converse are here applied. The racks A and B acting upon
pinion
is
E will cause it to rise
(I
~2) =
i inch.
This move-
2OO
is
ment
one-half inch,
doubled in the sliding rack / which, therefore, travels which and it is again doubled in sliding rack
has a movement of one inch.
Rack M,
in turn,
moves pin
^V
and the fifth lever slide P one-half inch. If the action of racks and D is analyzed in a similar manner, it will be found that has a movement of one-half inch, and rack N, one-quarter rack which gives a total rise of the lever attached to slide P of inch,
three-fourths inch.
To
further illustrate the action,
if all
of the
cam levers should drop one inch simultaneously, the result would be a drop of four inches for the middle lever attached to slide P. The cam Double Two-revolution Cam of Shifting Type.
mechanism
illustrated at
in Fig. 10 is so arranged that
two
Fig. 10.
which
it is
(A) Double-shifting Cam; (B) Lever vibrated from Shaft on fulcr timed; (C) Shaft oscillated by Cam located on it
are necessary in order to give the required motion to a follower. One revolution is required for the rise or upward movement of the follower and a second revo" lution for the dwell," during which the follower remains stationThe cam sections a and b are fastened together and are ary.
revolutions of a double
free to slide
cam
upon
is
their shafts a distance equal to the face
width
of
of one section.
The two cam
sections are driven
by means
member and, spline. in the illustration, is shown in contact with the spiral cam a, The cam b is from which the upward movement is derived.
Roll c
attached to the follower or driven
IRREGULAR MOTIONS
2OI
simply a circular disk mounted concentric with the shaft. The lever d for shifting the double cam is operated by a " loadand-fire "
mechanism having a spring plunger at

explained in Chapter
e.
(The load-
and-fire principle is
IV on " Reversing
Mechanisms.")
When
the
mechanism
highest position,
of
when
is in operation, cam a lifts roll c to its lever d shifts the double cam along the
b,
where it remains during a dwell then immediately shifted in the opposite direction, thus allowing roller c and the driven member
shaft, leaving roll c
upon cam
one revolution; the cam
is
to drop instantaneously
upon cam
section a.
The movement
of
shifting lever d is derived from the double-ended lever detailed view) which extends through a slot in the cams.
(see
This
lever
is
pivoted at the center and

it rests
is
free to
swing in one direction
or the other, until
the double
cam
against the sides of the opening. in the position shown in the illustration,
With
end/
engages
roll h and forces it to the left until spring plunger e comes into action and suddenly throws the lever over the full
distance.
The
opposite end of lever
/ swings
far
enough
to
thrown over. Lever Vibrated from Shaft on which it is Fulcrumed. A cam which is used for vibrating a lever twice for each revolution
clear roll k before this roll is
of a shaft
on which
it is
fulcrumed
is illustrated
at
in Fig. 10.
A gear
attached to the shaft drives a pinion which is one-half the size of the gear. This pinion revolves cam n, and the shaft for
/
the pinion and cam has a bearing in the end of lever p. The cam revolves in contact with a stationary roll o which causes the lever
to vibrate
about the shaft as a center twice for every revolution. Shaft Oscillated by Cam located on it. Fig. 10 shows, at C,
how a shaft can be given an oscillating or rocking movement by cam which is mounted on the shaft. The cam r is attached to gear q which is driven from an outside source. As the cam rea
volves in contact with
to slide
t.
A
is
u which
roll s, a reciprocating motion is imparted chain attached to this slide passes over a sprocket fast to the shaft. The other end of the chain is
fastened to a tension spring beneath the slide, which serves to hold the roll 5 into engagement with the cam.
CHAPTER
WHEN
The
kind.
VIII
a motion
is
the resultant of or difference between two
original motions, it is often referred to as a differential motion.

differential
This
is
derived that
is
screw is a simple example of a motion of this a compound screw from which a movement is equal to the difference between the movements
obtained from each screw.

the principle.
The diagram A,
Fig.
i,
illustrates
two screw threads on it at e and /, respectively, which wind in the same direction but differ in Screw / passes through a fixed nut and screw e through pitch. a nut that is free to move. The motion of the movable nut for each revolution of the screw equals the difference between the pitches of the threads at e and /. This combination makes it possible to obtain a very slight motion without using a screw having an exceptionally fine pitch and a weak thread. Another form of differential screw is shown at B, which illustrates a stop that enables fine adjustments to be
shaft has
obtained readily.
The screw bushing
is
threaded externally
through some stationary part and is also threaded internally to receive screw h which is free to move axially but cannot turn. Both screws in this case are right-hand, but they vary as to If bushing g has a pitch of pitch. % inch or 0.03125 inch and
screw h a pitch of %$ inch or 0.02777 inch, one complete turn of 0.02777 g will advance screws h only 0.00348 inch (0.03125
0.00348), because, as bushing g advances 7V inch, it moves screw h back a distance equal to the difference between the
pitches of the
fractional
two threads.
of
part
a turn
of
turning the bushing only a very small adjustments may be
By
obtained.
Differential
Motion
Chinese Windlass.
i,
The Chinese
another simple
windlass shown
by
the diagram C, Fig.

202
is
example
to
of a differential motion.
203
is
The
hoisting rope
arranged
unwind from one part of a drum or pulley onto another part The distance that the load or differing somewhat in diameter. hook moves for one revolution of the compound hoisting drum
is
equal to half the difference between the circumferences of the

sections.
differential chain hoist illustrated at
two drum
ates
The well-known
oper-
on the same general principle as the, Chinese windlass. The double sheave a has two chain grooves differing slightly in di-
Fig.
i.
(A and B) Differential Screws; (C) Chinese Windlass; (D) Differential Hoist
ameter, and an endless chain passes over these grooves and around a single pulley b. This pulley b and the hook attached to it is raised or lowered, because, for a given movement, a
of sheave a greater length of chain passes over the larger part than over the smaller part. If the upper sheave is revolved by
leads to the groove pulling down on the side d of the chain that of smaller diameter, the loop of chain passing around pulley b
will
be lengthened, thus lowering the pulley; the opposite result will be obtained by pulling down on chain c which leads up to the larger diameter of the sheave.
204
Differential
Most differential moMotions from Gearing. tions are derived from combinations of bevel or spur gearing. The
is
epicyclic bevel gear train illustrated
by diagram A,
Fig.
2,
applied to
many mechanisms
of the differential type,
and
its
action under different conditions should be thoroughly understood. The shaft a has mounted on it two bevel gears b and c
and an arm d. The arm is attached to the shaft and carries a pinion e which meshes with each gear and is free to revolve upon the arm. There are several conditions that can exist with a gear
train of this kind.
Fig. 2.
Epicyclic Trains of Bevel
and Spur Gearing
First,
If the shaft
assume that gear b is stationary and and arm d is revolved, motion
c loose
on the
shaft.
will
be transmitted
from the stationary gear b to gear c, through pinion e, and gear c will make two turns for every one of arm d and in the same
direction as the arm.
If gear b
should rotate instead of being
combined with that of the arm, would the motion of gear c and it would also make a difference modify whether gear b turned in the same direction as the arm or in an
stationary, this motion,
opposite direction.
Second, suppose the preceding conditions are reversed and one of the bevel gears b or c is revolved while the other gear remains stationary, and that arm d carrying the bevel pinion
constitutes the driven element.
With only one gear
revolving,
the
205
arm
will
and at
half its speed.
turn in a direction corresponding to that of the gear If both gears rotate in the same direction
at different speeds, the
arm
will follow in that direction
and with
a speed intermediate between the two. If the gears are driven in opposite directions at different speeds, the arm will follow
e will
the more rapidly moving gear, and if the speeds are equal, pinion revolve upon the arm, but the latter will remain stationary.
Third, assume that arm d remains stationary and gears b and c If gear b is the driver, the pinion e will are loose on the shaft. transmit motion to gear c in the opposite direction, simply
the three gears in this case forming a simple train with pinion e acting as the idler. The force tending to rotate arm d will be
one-half the force transmitted from gear b to gear c. tical application of this last principle is found in the
differential
prac-
Webber
dynamometer.
The arm
of this
dynamometer which
supports the scale pan and weights corresponds to arm d and is pivoted on a shaft carrying two bevel gears. On the arm and
meshing with these two bevel gears are bevel pinions and the amount of power transmitted through this train of gearing is measured by the weights in the scale pan. The combination of gearing illustrated by diagram A usually has two or more pinIn many cases, there are ions meshing with the bevel gears.
full
two pinions located diametrically opposite, as indicated by the and dotted lines. The addition of other pinions, however,
does not affect the action of the gearing.
The diagram B, Fig. 2, shows an arrangement of spur gearing which gives a differential motion. This combination consists of ordinary spur gear g, an internal gear h, and a pinion k. This
pinion is free to turn on a stud that is attached to arm /. In the application of this gearing, there are three possible conditions.
the internal gear h may be stationary, and the and k may revolve. Second, the arm / may be stationgears g ary, in which case either the internal gear h or gear g may be the driver. Third, gear g may be stationary and the motion be transmitted in either direction between gear h and arm /. Fig. In 3 shows a practical application of this gear combination. this design, there are two intermediate pinions (corresponding to
In the
first place,
2O6
}
k in diagram B Fig. 2) which are mounted on an arm and located diametrically opposite. This arm is keyed to the end of a
shaft.
The
large internal gear
casing enclosing the gears. other shaft which is in line with the shaft carrying the pinion arm. This arrangement is simply used to obtain a reduction of
speed.
stationary and forms part of a The central gear is keyed to anis
The
design
is
is
gearing, in general,
compact, although differential or epicyclic Such inefficient as a transmitter of power.
gear combinations, however, have certain mechanical advantages, and they are often utilized by designers for a variety of
Fig. 3-
Epicyclic Gearing for Obtaining

ential
Speed Reduction by
Differ-
Motion
purposes as indicated by the different mechanisms to be described.
The Varying Speeds. differential speed-changing mechanism shown in Fig. 4 has spur gears and pinions but no internal gear. This is a compound or
Compound
Differential
Gears
for
reverted train and
is
intended for an automatic screw machine
of the heavier class (the Cleveland) in order to provide a slow and powerful movement to the spindle for heavy thread-cutting
operations, or for
drive.
any other heavy work which requires a powerful

is
The
gearing
contained within the spindle driving
There are three pulleys on the back shaft of the spindle head. and the slow speed is obtained by shifting the belt to the pulleys
center pulley A,
207
and engaging the sliding clutch B with gear C; upon a square shaft and cannot revolve, the C is held stationary. There are two sets of planetary gear pinions D and E located diametrically opposite. The pinions on each stud are locked together but they are free to revolve about the stud. Pinions D rotate around the fixed gear C,
as this clutch slides
while pinions revolve the driven gear F at a slow speed, but with considerable power. The gear F is keyed to the extension of pinion G which meshes directly with the front spindle gear of
the machine.
When
this slow
speed
is
not required, the clutch
Fig. 4.
Compound
or Reverted Train of Epicyclic Gearing for ing Speed
Reduc-
disengaged, so that the entire train of differential gears is upon the loose center pulley A. Two spring plungers (not shown) attached to pulley A engage the rim of pulley L and
is
free
tachment
revolve
cause both pulleys to revolve together when the slow-speed atis not engaged, so that the planetary pinions will not
upon
this
their studs at this time.
The
clutch
is
shifted
by a cam-operated rod
H acting in conjunction with a spring /.

differential action
With
arrangement of gearing, the

is
and
reduction of speed
of pinions
the result of the difference in the diameters
D and E and their mating gears. When the slow-speed

is
attachment
operating, the larger pinions
roll
around the
208
stationary gear
direction.
C and
force gear
will
to follow slowly in the
same
be more apparent if that part of the larger pinion D which is in engagement with stationary gear C, at any time, is considered as a lever pivoted at the point where
This action
mesh with the stationary gear. As the pinion revolves and the imaginary lever swings around its fulcrum, the in contact with gear F force the teeth of the smaller pinion
the teeth
latter to
move
in the
same
direction in
which the
"
rolling pinions
D and E and pulley A

Differential
are moving.
(See
Reversal of Motion
Variations of
through Epicyclic Gearing," Chapter IV.)
Motion between Screw and Nut.
motion between a revolving screw and a nut which is rotating about the screw at a different speed. One application of this principle
movement
are sometimes obtained
by the
differential
is
by the variable-speed mechanism of a milling machine shown in Fig. 5. This mechanism is designed to increase
illustrated
the efficiency of a machine by accelerating the speed of the table when the cutters are not at work. The machine table moves
rapidly
up
to the cutting point, then the speed
is
reduced while
milling and, after the operation
is completed, the table is quickly returned to the loading position. This mechanism is located beneath the machine table C, which
is
by a screw D, that passes through the plain bearings E, F, and G, mounted upon the base of the machine. The
traversed
pinion
and
it is
confined longitudinally between bearings and F, to screw Z), so that the latter must turn with the splined
is
is
pinion but
free to slide in a lengthwise direction.

it is
The
hole
through gear / is threaded to fit screw D so that a nut and gear combined. The auxiliary shaft
bearings
in
practically
carries
two pinions,
shaft.
mounted upon the

V.
This
/ supported in L and M, which are loosely shaft / is rotated continuously
from the driving shaft one direction through spiral gears and are clutch sleeves which Within the housings
encircle the shaft /.

free to slide
The
sleeves are splined to the shaft, but are
upon it, and they may be locked with teeth formed on pinions L and M. These clutches are controlled by levers T and U at the front of the machine which are connected by the
shafts shown, with the clutch shifting devices at
209
and Q. The action of the clutches is controlled automatically by adjustable stops located on the front of the machine table.
The
lever T.
clutch connecting with gear L is first engaged by hand The table then moves forward rapidly (in the direction
indicated
by arrow A)
as gear
H revolves sfcrew D and causes it
is held stationary at this before the milling cutter begins to act upon the Just strikes a stop, thus engaging the clutch with gear work, lever M. The gear nut / is then revolved in the same direction as
to turn through the gear nut 7 which

time.
Variable Fig. 5. Differential
Feeding Mechanism which is partly controlled by Movement between a Revolving Screw and Nut
the
gear screw
H but at a slower speed,

Both
so that the forward
movement
of
D is reduced, because of the differential action between the

sets of gears continue to operate while
screw and nut.
the cut is being taken; when the milling operation is completed, another stop engages lever T, thus stopping the rotation of gears L and H. As the gear nut I continues to revolve about the
screw, the
movement
of the
machine table
is
reversed, since
in the direction
screw
D is not rotating.
by arrow
The motion continues
indicated
trips the latter,
B until a third stop to the right of lever U thereby stopping gear 7 and the table movement.
210
table
is
The
now
in position for
removing the finished parts and
them with others that require milling. Feeding Mechanism for Revolving Spindle. The spindle of a horizontal boring, drilling, tapping, and milling
replacing
Differential
given a lengthwise feeding movement by the differential action between the revolving spindle and a revolving nut which engages a helical groove in the spindle. The spindle
machine
is
is
driven
by a
large gear
(see Fig. 6)
back gearing of the machine.
The hub
which connects with the of this gear has two keys
Fig. 6.
Mechanism
of Differential
Type
for
Feeding Spindle in Length-
wise Direction
which engage the splined
B on which gear end which mesh with three planetary pinions D that engage one side of the double internal gear E. The other side of this internal gear meshes with pinions N. These pinions, in turn, mesh with gear teeth formed on the rotary nut L which engages directly with a spiral or helical groove cut in the spindle. A flange on this nut rotates
spindle.
The
sleeve
is
mounted has gear teeth cut
in one
between large ball thrust bearings, as shown, in order to take the end thrust in either direction.
When nut L
rotates at the
same speed
as the spindle, the latter
does not
211
move
in a lengthwise direction, but,
by revolving nut
L L
either faster or slower than the spindle, a feeding movement in one direction or the other is obtained. The rotation of nut
is
regulated by the gearing at G. When the feeding movement is stopped, gear F, which carries the planetary pinions D, does not
L rotates with the spindle, which, therefore, remains in the same longitudinal position. When gear F which is connected indirectly with the feed change-gears G is revolved
revolve and nut
these gears, the nut L is revolved independently of the spindle different rate of speed. What are known as Application of Floating Lever Principle. " " " " or differential levers are utilized in some forms of floating mechanisms to control, by the application of a small amount
by
and at a
of
power or force, a much greater force such as would be required for moving or shifting heavy parts. Floating levers are commonly applied to mechanisms controlling the action of parts
that require adjustment or changes of position at intervals varying according to the function of the apparatus subject to control.
The
may be derived from a handand the purpose of the floating lever is to so control the source of power that whatever part is to be shifted or adjusted will follow the hand-controlled movements practically the same as though there were a direct mechanical
initial
movement
or force
operated lever or wheel,
connection.
A floating lever is so called because it is not attached

bodily, or to
to fixed pivots
free to
move
and does not have a stationary fulcrum, but is " " float within certain limits and in
accordance with the relative forces acting upon the different

connections.
Fig. 7 illustrates
one application of the floating
lever.
The
diagram at the
for a large hoist.
left
represents an auxiliary braking apparatus The brake shoe A is applied to the brake drum
whenever the dead weight

is
rests
upon the
lever D.
This
connected by rod E with a cross-head attached to the upper end of a piston rod extending through the oil cylinder F and into the steam cylinder G. When steam is admitted beneath
lever
raised
the piston in cylinder G by opening a valve at H, the weight is and the brake released, and, if for any reason the steam
212
pressure should be suddenly reduced, weight C would fall and the brake be applied automatically. The movements of the
piston in cylinder G and, consequently, of weight
C are controlled
by hand
lever
through floating lever /, in such a manner that
the weight rises and falls, as the lever is shifted, practically the same as though the force, for moving the weight were derived directly from the lever by means of a rigid mechanical connection.
Fig. 7.
Diagrams
illustrating Application
and Action
of Floating
Lever
The
action of the mechanism is as follows: If the weight is down and the brake applied, and lever L is moved from its central position to the right, the left-hand end of lever / will be raised (as shown on an exaggerated scale by diagram X), thus lifting rod K and opening valve H\ this valve has no lap, so that any movement of the lever admits steam to the cylinder. As soon as the piston begins to rise, the right-hand end of lever / also rises (see diagram Y) and turning about pivot O immediately begins to close the steam valve. If the lever L is moved through
a small
arc, the
213
and the weight only rises a short distance; on the contrary, if the lever is thrown over to the extreme position, the piston and weight must move upward
valve
is
closed quickly
If the lever, after
a proportionately greater distance before the valve is closed. being thrown to the right, is moved towards
the
left,
valve
it
H opens the exhaust port and the weight descends;

move downward,
which tends to
the left-hand end of the
close the exhaust port
is raised,
as soon as
begins to
floating lever
and prevent further downward motion.

apparatus of this kind responds so quickly to adjustment that the weight follows the motion of the hand lever almost instantaneously and the end of the floating lever connected to
rod
An
has very
little
actual movement.
The
used to stabilize the action of the weight and which would occur if there were only the cushioning effect of
steam.
cylinder F is prevent overtravel

oil
The by-pass valve
controls the flow of oil
from one
end
of the cylinder to the other as the piston
so that the motion of the weight ceases as oil valves are closed.
moves up or down, soon as the steam and
Controlling
Mechanism
of
Steering Gear.
The
practical
effect of the floating lever previously described for controlling
be obtained by other mechanical devices, examples of which are found on steamthe

of power-driven apparatus
movements
may
ships for controlling the action of the steering engines. Engines used for this purpose are commonly equipped with a control valve which distributes steam to the engine valves. The latter are
generally of the hollow piston type and are arranged to receive steam either at the ends or in the center, the exhaust varying accordingly. The admission of steam either to the ends or in
the center
instance,
is
if
governed by the position of the control valve. For the control valve is moved in one direction, steam
may be
admitted to the ends of the engine valves and be exhausted in the center. If the control valve were moved in the
opposite direction, this order would be reversed and also the direction in which the engine rotates; therefore, each engine valve requires but one eccentric, the control valve acting as a
reversing gear,
The mechanism which
operates this control
214
valve
is
so designed that, when the engine is set in motion to the rudder either to port or starboard, this same motion is
move
ment
wheel.
utilized to shift the control valve in of the
such a
way
that the move-
rudder coincides with the motion of the steering While the floating lever has been used in connection
with this controlling mechanism, the
common form
of control
depends upon the action (which gearing or of a screw and nut.
is
often differential) either of
With the arrangement illustrated at A, Fig. 8, the control valve of a steering engine is governed by the action of a screw that is operated by the steering wheel, and a nut that is revolved by
Fig. 8.
(A) Controlling Device for Steering Gear; (B) as Substitute for a Floating Lever
Mechanism used
the engine.
The
shaft a
is
connected with the steering wheel

b
which is splined to, and The rod d serves to operate the free to slide through, gear c. control valve of the steering engine. Any rotary motion of
and transmits rotary motion to screw
shaft a
moves screw
b in a lengthwise direction in or out of the

e,
nut on worm-wheel
speed as the screw.
If
unless this nut
is
revolving at the same

:
worm-wheel
e,
The action of the mechanism is as follows which meshes with a worm on the steering en-
gine crankshaft, is stationary, the rotation of shaft a will turn screw b in or out of the nut and shift the control valve, thus
starting the engine in one direction or the other, depending upon which way the control valve was moved. As soon as the engine
starts,
worm-wheel
and the nut begin
to revolve,
which tends
to
2I 5
the screw and control lever in the opposite direction. screw b were revolved in the direction shown by the Suppose arrow/, thus moving the screw and control lever to the right;
then, as the engine starts, worm-wheel e and the nut revolve as shown by the arrow g. Now as soon as the rotation of shaft a and screw b is stopped or is reduced until the speed of rotation is less than that of worm-wheel e, the screw is drawn back into the nut and the control valve is closed. If the steering wheel and screw b were turned slightly and then stopped entirely, the rudder would only be moved a corresponding amount, because the
move
Fig. 9.
Steering Gear Control
Mechanism having
Gearing
Differential Bevel
control valve would soon be shifted, by the action of wormwheel e, to the closed position. Steering engines, in general,
are equipped with
some form
of stopping device
which auto-
matically limits
the
movement
of
the rudder and prevents
overtravel and damaging the mechanism. Control Mechanism having Differential Bevel Gearing.
The
steering gear controlling
mechanism
illustrated in Fig. 9
operates on the same general principle as the design previously

described, although the construction is quite different. The control valve, in this case, operates with a rotary motion, instead of
moving
14 A
in a lengthwise direction.
Shaft
is
revolved by the
steering wheel and transmits rotary motion to shaft
through
2l6
the gearing shown. The differential action for regulating the position of the control valve is obtained by means of three gears
keyed to shaft B, and gear E on the F is free to revolve about shaft B. Gear D interposed between gears C and E is mounted upon a segment gear G which engages another segment gear on the conC, Dj and E.
Gear
is
extended hub of worm-wheel
valve spindle /. If shaft B is revolved while gear and the worm-wheel are stationary, gear rolls around between the gears and, through the segment gear, turns the control valve,
trol
thus starting the steering engine and with it the worm on the crankshaft which drives worm-wheel F and gear E. As soon as
the rotation of shaft
is
stopped, gear
which has been
re-
back volving in the opposite direction to that of C rolls gear to the top position, thus closing the control valve and stopping
the engine.
gear
mains
are revolved at the same speed, C and rotates between them and the control valve resimply exceeds that of C, the valve open. If the speed of gear
If gears
begins to close, and if C revolves faster than E, the valve is opened wider and the engine continues to operate. Rolling Worm-wheel Type of Controlling Mechanism.
ingenious substitute for the floating lever illustrated at B in Fig. 8 depends for its action upon a worm-wheel which is interposed between two worms. The handwheel h controls the ro-
The
worm j, which meshes with the worm-wheel k. The on the opposite side of the worm-wheel is rotated by whatever apparatus is to be controlled. The shaft of the wormwheel is journaled in boxes which are free to slide up and down the vertical slides in the framework shown. Any vertical distation of
/
worm
placement of the worm-wheel
is
transmitted to rod n which
operates the valve, clutch, or other mechanical device used for Assume starting, stopping, and reversing the driving machinery.
is at rest with the worm-wheel midway beand lower positions in the vertical slides of the upper housing. When the handwheel h is revolved in a direction corresponding to the motion desired, worm j revolves, and worm I is stationary, since the mechanism is not yet in motion; therefore, the rotation of the handwheel has the effect of rolling the
that the mechanism
tween
its
217
worm-wheel k between the two worms either up or down, depending upon the direction in which the handwheel is rotated. Any vertical displacement of the worm-wheel will, through the
medium
of controlling
is
This motion
rod n, start the power-driven machinery. and worm / immediately transmitted to shaft
which acts to move worm-wheel

tically,
I.
k in the opposite direction veris
provided
worm j
is
stationary or
The
result is that the power-driven
member
revolving slower than is moved or ad-
justed proportionately to the rotation of the handwheel k.
The
handwheel, for instance, might be turned to a position corresponding to a certain required adjustment, which would then be made automatically. This controlling device operates on the
same general
principle as the steering gear controlling
mechaof the
nisms previously described. Differential Governors for Water Turbines.
Many
automatic governing devices used for controlling the speed of water turbines have a differential action. A simple form of
by the diagram A, Fig. 10. An auxiliary water motor drives the bevel gear a by belt d, and bevel gear c is driven by belt e from a shaft operated by the turbine to be governed. Both gears a and c are loose on their shaft, but the arm n which carries the bevel pinions b is fast to
governor
is
illustrated in principle
the shaft. On one end of the shaft there is a pinion / which meshes with a rack g that operates the turbine gate, and thus controls the flow of water to the turbine. As the auxiliary motor
has no work to do except to drive part of the governing mechanism, it runs at practically a constant speed; the variations
due to the
affected.
rise or fall of
of the total
head
It will
the water level are so small a percentage water that the speed of this motor is little be assumed then that the speed of gear a is
of
The speed of gear Cj however, changes practically uniform. with an increase or decrease of the load upon the turbine, and,
as gear c runs faster or slower than gear a, the arm n follows it around one way or the other and thus opens or closes the turbine
gate.
it is
The governor shown at B controlled by centrifugal
also has a differential action,
but
force acting
on a
fly-ball
governing
2l8
device.
The governor
is operated by a belt a connected with This belt passes around idler pulleys and over the
the turbine.
wide-faced pulleys b and c. These pulleys, through bevel gearing, drive the differential gearing composed of gears J, e, and/. Gears d and e are loose from their shafts and pinion/ is pivoted on an arm that is keyed to the shaft. Gear e is connected by the
gearing shown with a centrifugal governing device at g. The belt pulley b is conical and the diameter at the center is the same
as that at pulley c. When the turbine is operating at normal the belt is at the center of the conical pulley b and, conspeed,
Fig. 10.
Differential
Governing Devices for Water Turbines
sequently, gears d and e revolve at the same rate of speed in opThe result is that the arm carrying pinion / posite directions.
remains stationary.
balls at g
If the turbine begins to
run too
fast,
the
move outward under

is
and
belt a
shifted
by
the action of centrifugal force, a mechanism not shown to a smaller part
b. The resulting increase in the speed of gear d causes the arm carrying pinion / and the shaft h to which it is attached to revolve in the same direction as gear d. As a
of the conical pulley
movement, the turbine gate is lowered by means of not shown, and the speed of the turbine wheel is reduced. gearing If the turbine should begin to run more slowly than the normal
result of this
219
speed, the shifting of belt a by governor g would cause gear d also to revolve slower, thus turning shaft h in the opposite direction and raising the gate.
Another modification of the differential governor is shown by n. This particular type of governor was installed in one of the large power plants at Niagara Falls. It is equipped with two sets of The gears A epicyclic gearing. and B are free to turn on the shaft, but may be retarded by brake bands at E and F. The inner gears C and D are driven by belts
the diagram, Fig.
connected in some
way with
the turbine.
One
of these belts is
open and the other
crossed, so that the gears revolve in opposite
Fig. ii.
Differential
Governing Mechanism controlled by Ratchetoperated Brakes
directions.
The brake bands
are so arranged that,
when one
Both of tightens, the other loosens its grip on the brake drum. bands are operated by a shaft G and the tightening of the these
effected by a double ratchet mechanism (not shown) two pawls. One pawl rotates shaft G in one direction having and the other in the opposite direction. When the speed in-
bands
is
pawl or the other is operated by a flyAs the result of this ball governor driven from the turbine. motion of the pawl, one band is tightened and the other released,
so that one of the gears
creases or decreases, one
or
degree of friction or is prevented
is held with a greater or less from turning altogether, while
220
If gear
the other one runs free.
is
held
carrying pinion
will
begin to turn in the

if
by the brake, the arm same direction in
which gear
turns, whereas,
gear
remains stationary, the
carrying pinion on the end of the shaft will pinion
arm
will
follow gear
D; consequently, the means of a rack raise or by
lower the turbine gate. This governor depends for its sensitiveness upon the fly-ball governing device, and for its power upon
the open and cross-belts which
may
be proportioned to transmit
any required amount
of power.
Differential Gearing of Automobiles.
One
of the important
applications of differential gearing, at the present time, is found on automobiles. The object of transmitting motion from the engine to the rear axle through differential gearing is to give an
equal tractive force to each of the two wheels and, at the same time, permit either of them to run ahead or lag behind the other
as
may be required in rounding curves or riding over obstructions.

axle is not formed of one solid piece, but
The
motion
is
trans-
mitted to the right- and left-hand wheels by means of separate sections, the inner ends of which are attached to different members of the differential mechanism.
chanical
The
principle of this
me12.
movement
The
will
be understood by referring to Fig.
Two
and
general types of differential gearing are
shown
in this illus-
tration.
design at the left
is
equipped with bevel gearing
is the type generally employed. The propeller shaft extends from the transmission case where speed changes are ob-
which drives the large tained, and revolves the bevel pinion bevel gear M. This gear and the casing to which it is bolted revolve freely on the hub of gears F and E. Attached to the casing are radial pivots on which revolve loosely bevel pinions D. These pinions engage the bevel gears and
which are connected with the
right-
and left-hand
of gear
axles or
shafts T.
Under ordinary conditions, the rotation gears F and E to both revolve at the same
the connecting pinions
causes
rate of speed, since
but do not revolve.
To
the casing 0, illustrate the action, assume that the
are
moved around with
wheels are jacked up and are simply revolving in one position;
then,
if
221
held from turning so that, say, gear E is will roll pinions around stationary, the rotation of bevel gear on gear E, with the result that gear F will revolve twice as fast
one wheel
is
as
is revolving with it and at the same speed. when gear On the other hand, if the opposite wheel and gear F were held stationary, the gear E would run at twice its normal speed;
if
moreover,
the speed of either of the gears
is
reduced, the other
side is speeded
up a corresponding amount.
Fig. 12.
Automobile Differential Gearing of Bevel and Spur Gear Types
While the bevel form of differential gearing is largely used, some designs have been equipped with spur gearing. The diagram at the right in Fig. 12 illustrates the difference in arrangement. Each of the bevel pinions is replaced by a pair of spur pinions D connecting with each other and with spur gears E and F. These pinions do not extend over as far as the opposite gear so that connection between the gears F and E is from one pinion to the other, as shown by the detailed view. The action of this form of differential is identical with the bevel pinion type previously described. The differential gearing is ordinarily incorporated in the rear axle, except when power is transmitted to
222
the wheel
is
by means
of side chains, in
which case the
differential
in the countershaft.
Speed Regulation through

speed of a driven part is
Differential Gearing.
When
the
two different governed by sources, differential gearing may be used to combine these drives and allow any variations in speed that may be required. An application of this kind is found on the fly frames used in cotton
spinning for drawing out or attenuating the untwisted fiber or
drives from
Fig. 13.
Diagram
of Mechanism having Differential Gearing through which Speed Changes are Transmitted
roving,
by passing
it
between different pairs
of rolls
which move,
attenuated,
same time given a slight twist. The diagram, Fig. 13, represents a mechanism for controlling the speed of the bobbins, one of which is indicated at B. This bobbin receives its motion through a train of gearing connecting with the main shaft of the machine and also through another combination of gearing which is driven by a pair of cone-pulleys
successively, at increased speeds. it is wound on bobbins and at the
After the fiber
is
for decreasing the
it
223
speed of the bobbin as the roving is and the diameter increases.

shaft
is
wound upon
The main
rolls,
driven
through shaft
S and
is
one of which
by pulley A and motion is transmitted the gearing shown to the cone C and the indicated at the upper part of the diagram.
The cone C and

is
the rolls
move at a constant speed, and
the roving
at a uniform rate of speed. On the shaft S there is a bevel gear E, which is one of the gears of an " differential epicyclic train that is commonly known as the motion." The large gear to the arm of the gear corresponds
delivered
by the
rolls
train, since it carries the
two intermediate bevel pinions J and K.
is driven from the lower cone C\ which is connected This gear belt with the upper cone. Bevel gear F which meshes with by the pinions carried by gear is loose on shaft 5 and is connected
through gearing with the bobbin B. With this arrangement, the speed of the bobbin depends first upon the speed of bevel gear E, which is constant, and also upon the speed of gear D,
which
cones.
will
of gears twice the variations in the speed of the bobbin. produce The roving is wound on the bobbin in successive helical layers
may be varied by shifting the position Any variations in the relative speeds
of the belt
on the and E
by means
constant speed by gear on shaft S. The roving passes from the rolls to the flyer, and entering the top of its hollow spindle, is threaded down through one arm of the flyer and then wound on the bobbin. The flyer
of the flyer
H driven at a
and bobbin revolve
in the
same
direction,
but the bobbin has a
higher velocity and, for that reason, draws the roving from the flyer and winds it in successive layers as the bobbin travels up
and down, so as to cover

is
its entire surface.
As each
successive
added, the bobbin increases in diameter, and its speed layer relative to that of the flyer must be decreased in order to pre-
vent breaking the roving. This change of speed is transmitted to the bobbin through the differential gearing referred to by
shifting the belt
Differential
on the cone-pulleys. Gear and Cam Combination.
The
differential
is
gear and
cam combination
described in the following
used on
fly-frames in conjunction with the
same general
class of
mecha-
224
illustrated
nism
differs
by the diagram,
Fig.
13.
This
from the
is
differential ordinarily
used in that
mechanism it has no
differential
epicyclic train of gearing.
As previously explained, a
motion
employed
in connection with a shifting belt
and cone-
pulleys for changing the speed of the bobbins. The differential action is obtained, in this case, by means of a crown gear A
(Fig. 14)
which
crown gear C driving gear F, and the double crown gear D, which is mounted on a spherical seat and engages gears A and C at points diametrically opposite.
attached to the main driving shaft B; the secured to sleeve E, which carries the bobbin
is
position, so that a small part of the gear
This double crown gear operates in an oblique meshes with gear A
Fig. 14.
Differential
Gear and
Cam
Combination
on one
C.
side meshes with gear allows the intermediate crown gear spherical bearing to swivel in any direction, and it is held in position by a cam side
and a small part on the other
The
The gear C has the same numsurface on the edge of sleeve G. ber of teeth as the intermediate gear D, but gear A has a somewhat smaller number of teeth.
The
differential action is
obtained by the relative motions
and cam G. This cam is driven from the lower belt-cone of the machine which is connected with gear H. If cam G were revolving at the same speed as gear A the same teeth on gears A and D would remain in contact and the entire gear combination would act practically the same as a clutch. As soon as the speed of the cam differs from that of gear A, the
between gear
,
position of intermediate gear
D is changed so that different teeth
are
225
successively engaged. As the result of this differential action, the speed transmitted to gear C is either increased or
decreased.
The
the difference between the speeds of gear A and this difference diminishes, the speed of gears and
extent of the differential motion depends upon cam G. As
increases;
reduced, the speed of gear C is also reduced, since the motion from gear A is lost as the result of differential action. The advantages claimed for this mechainversely, as the speed of
is
cam G
nism are quiet operation and reduction

Differential
of friction.
Mechanism
of
Gear-cutting
Machine.
On
certain kind of gear-cutting machine, a differential mechanism is employed so that when cutting spiral gears the rotary motion
Fig. 15.
Application of Differential Gearing for Combining Rotary Motions
for generating helical teeth will be combined with the rotary motion for indexing the work, for cutting successive teeth. This machine operates on the same general principle as a universal milling machine when the latter is used for cutting spiral
gears.
teeth
The mechanism, however, for generating the helical and indexing the work form integral parts' of the machine.
machine
is
The screw which

of the
feeds the cutter-slide along the horizontal bed driven from cone-pulley (see Fig. 15) through
connecting shafts
and
gears.
This cone-pulley
is
also connected
with change gearing
worm
for
which transmits motion to the indexing G and the work at a rate suitable the required helix angle. These change- gears generating
for revolving
wheel
226
same purpose as those used on a universal milling connecting the spiral head with the table feedThe worm-wheel G is not only used for rotating the work
for
serve the
machine
screw.
in order to generate the helix, but for indexing as well.
The way
these two motions are imparted to wheel with each other will now be explained.
without interfering
The change-gears
nect at
for controlling the indexing
movement
con-
gearing, consisting of bevel gears
with a shaft leading to the differential or epicyclic / and L with intermediate
pinions N. Bevel gear / is attached to the shaft connecting with the change-gears at H, whereas the opposite bevel gear L
Fig. 16.
Crane equipped with Differential Hoisting Mechanism shown

Diagrammatically in Fig. 17
is
The
is mounted. attached to a hollow sleeve upon which worm are carried by an arm attached to shaft M. bevel pinions
This shaft
ential
is
cutter-slide
connecting with the by worm-wheel F. The action of this differthrough change-gears " mechanism or " jack-in-the-box is such that, if shaft
is
driven
stationary, the change-gears at
may
be operated for
in-
dexing, motion being transmitted from gear J to L through as idlers, thus revolving worm K. On the other pinions hand, if the indexing mechanism is stationary and the cutter-
slide feeding, the
movement thus imparted
to shaft
M may be
transmitted to
bevel gear
around the stationary and impart motion to gear L. As will be seen, it

roll
worm
K as pinions N
would be possible with
rotate
it for
227
this
mechanism
to index the
generating helical teeth independently.
work and The two
motions can also be operated together or combined without interare connected through a oneference. The change-gears at
revolution friction trip with the main driving shaft. As the cutter feeds across the gear blank, a helical groove is generated
by the rotary motion derived from change-gears F, shaft M, the differential gearing, and worm K. After a tooth groove is finished, the cutter is dropped down to clear the work and returned for milling another tooth groove. The indexing mechanism is then tripped by hand and the work is rotated sufficiently
Fig. 17.
Differential Hoisting
Mechanism
for the next successive tooth
by the change-gears
at
acting
through the differential gearing and

Differential
Hoisting
worm K. An ingenious method Mechanism.
vary the speed of a hoisting mechanism is illustrated by the diagram, Fig. 16, which repreThere are sents the crane to which this mechanism is applied.
of utilizing differential action to
two chains attached to the crane hook. One of these chains A passes over a pulley on the trolley and over pulley B to the
D passes upward over its and over pulley E to pulley F, and then down to a drum located back of drum C. These chains may be wound upon their respective drums either in opposite direcwinding drum C.
The
other chain
trolley pulley to the
left,
228
tions or in the
If
same
direction,
and at varying
rates of speed.
both drums are rotated in opposite directions at the same speed, the effect will be to raise or lower the hoisting hook, whereas,
the
if
drums
rotate in the
same direction and at equal speed, the

off
chain will be taken in by ,one and given
by the
other, thus
causing the hook and its load to be carried horizontally without raising or lowering it. Any difference in
the
speed of
the two drums
when mov-
ing either in the same or
opposite
to
directions will
evidently cause the hook
move both
vertically
and horizontally at the same time. The mechanism for operating the two hoisting drums is illustrated diagrammatically in Fig. 17. There are two electric
motors
/ and K.
Motor
drives the worm-wheels

in opposite
directions
and
bevel
also
the
attached
other
gears.
The
motor
Fig. 18.
Differential
Speed Indicator
gears bevel gears.
drives the spur and the upper
The
inter-
bemediate pinions tween the bevel gears revolve on arms Q which are keyed to the shafts of their respective drums. The bevel gears with
which the pinions mesh are loose on their shafts. With this is stationary, motor / will drive arrangement, if motor the drums in opposite directions and raise or lower the hook On the other hand, with motor / as previously explained.
229
stationary, motor K will operate the drums in the same direction and move the crane hook horizontally. As these motors may
be reversed or operated together at varying speeds, any desired combination of movements and speeds for the hook and its load
may
be obtained.
A sensitive speed-indicating Speed Indicator. device which shows variations of speed between two rotating parts is shown, partly in section, in Fig. 18. This indicator
Differential
operates on the differential principle.

cylindrical rollers;
It is
equipped with two
one
roller is
shown at
and the other
is lo-
cated in a similar position on the opposite side of the vertical center line. The axes of the roller shafts are in the same vertical
plane,
and on the ends
of these shafts are
mounted
belt pulleys C.
These pulleys are connected with the shafts the relative speeds of which are to be compared. Each roller A is in contact with a
spherical steel ball
three inches in diameter.
The
ball is
held in position by a small stop at the rear and by a small at the front. This roller is mounted on an arm fixed roller
to a spindle
is
which
is free
to rotate
and
to the outer
end
of
which
attached the pointer F* When both the supporting rollers A are driven at the same speed and in the same direction, the
spherical ball will rotate about a transverse horizontal axis
and
will carry the
wheel
E vertically up or down,
as the case
may be.
The
movement will be indicated by the pointer F. the supporting rollers runs faster than the other, the ball will rotate about some inclined axis and wheel will
direction of
If either of
naturally turn so that its axis is parallel to that about which the sphere rotates. This instrument is said to be very sensitive as
of speed variations. For instance, it is claimed that a difference in the speed of the rollers due to a Variation of o.ooi inch in the diameter of driving pulleys having a nominal diameter
an indicator
of 2 1 inches cari
be detected.
While
this degree of sensitiveness
it would seem preferable to transmit the motion from the driving shaft by some positive drive instead of by belts, inasmuch as any slipping of a belt would affect the action of the
may be obtained,
indicator.
CHAPTER IX
CLUTCHES AND TRIPPING MECHANISMS
THE
different devices used for controlling
motion which
is
transmitted
by
various kinds of mechanism
may
either be
for varying the time of disengagement, or non-adjustable so that the tripping action occurs at the same point in the cycle of operations. Tripping and disengaging devices also vary in that some
manually or automatically operated, and be adjustable
operate periodically or at regular intervals, whereas others act once and then must be re-set by hand preparatory to another
The application of disengaging mechanisms With some classes of machinery, an autogreatly. matic trip of some form is used to stop the machine completely after it has performed a certain operation or cycle of movedisengagement.
varies
ments.
On many machine
movement
tools, trips are
used to disconnect a
at a predetermined point, not only to prefeeding vent the tool from feeding too far, but to make it unnecessary for
spoiling work.
the operator to watch the machine constantly, in order to avoid (When a feeding motion must be disconnected
at a certain point within close limits, it is common practice to use some form of positive stop for locating a slide or carriage
after the feeding movement has been discontinued by a trip The function of some acting through suitable mechanism.) devices is to safeguard the mechanism by stopping either tripping the entire machine or a part of it, in case there is an unusual
resistance to motion,
which might subject the machine to
in-
methods of arresting motion which are most commonly employed are by means of clutches, by shifting When the tripping belts, and by the disengagement of gearing. action is automatic, some design of clutch is generally used to disconnect the driven member from the driver or source of power.
230
jurious strains. The three mechanical
TRIPPING MECHANISMS
231
The
controlled in various ways. Shifting belts are not ordinarily applied to machines as a part of the regular mechanism, but are very generally used to control the starting
is
action of the clutch
or stopping of an entire machine;

tensively for this purpose.
clutches are also used ex-
Gearing which
engaged to start or stop a driven member is Feeding mechanisms of some types have a worm-wheel driven
engaged or disused in some cases.

is
by a worm which
is
is
discontinued.
The method
dropped out of mesh when the feeding action of controlling motion may depend
of the driving and driven members, and the necessity of eliminating shocks in starting, or upon some other factor, such as the inertia of the driven part or the frequency with
upon the speed
which starting and stopping is required. In considering some of the more common forms of mechanical
devices ot the class used for starting and stopping, the types of mechanisms employed to disconnect driving and driven members, and also the means of governing the time at which disen-
gagement takes place when such engagement is automatically As various tripping devices are controlled, will be dealt with. used in conjunction with reversing mechanisms to change the
direction of motion, instead of stopping
it entirely,
the chapter
of
on " Reversing Mechanisms " shows additional applications

automatic tripping appliances.
A clutch is a Controlling Motion by Means of Clutches. form of coupling which is designed to connect or disconnect a
driving or driven member for starting or stopping the driven clutch consists principally of two main sections which part.
are engaged or disengaged either at will by a hand-operated controlling device, or automatically by the action of some power-
driven mechanical apparatus, such as a cam connected by suitable means with the shifting clutch member. There are several distinct types of clutches
signs.
The common types
which are made in a great variety of deof clutches may be divided into two
general classes; namely, (i) those having teeth which interlock, or positive clutches, and (2), those which transmit motion from
No
the driving to the driven part of the clutch by frictional contact. attempt will be made to describe all classes, but rather to il15 A
232
lustrate
some
of the
more common types and include a few
special
forms as examples indicating variations in clutch design. Two examples of the positive or tooth clutches are shown at
and
B in Fig.
that incline to
The form illustrated at A has teeth with sides make them engage or disengage more readily.
.
One part a
part b is
of the clutch is fast to
one
shaft,
whereas the other
with
it,
keyed but is
to the opposite shaft section, so that it revolves free to move in a lengthwise direction. The
movable part to engage or disengage it is ordinarily of a forked lever c which may be operated either hand or mechanically. This lever has prongs which either by
shifting of the
done by means
engage a groove in the shifting member or are pivoted to a ring d which fits into the groove, the arrangement in either case allowing the clutch to revolve between the U-shaped prongs.
Many
clutches of this general type have straight instead of
tapering teeth.
What
member
is
commonly known
as a
"
saw-tooth
"
clutch
is
il-
lustrated at B.
This type is very easily engaged but the driving can only be rotated in one direction. There are other
differ in
forms of positive clutches which

or tooth type
is
regard to the shapes of
the teeth or the angle of the engaging surfaces.
The
positive
used when
it is
not objectionable to start the

the resistance to motion
is
driven
member suddenly and when

into engagement.
not so great as to cause

teeth
an injurious shock each time the clutch
come
Friction
Clutches.
When motion
is
transmitted from the
driving to the driven parts of a clutch simply
by
frictional con-
tact, the load may be started gradually and without shock, such The differas often occurs when a positive clutch is engaged. ent types of friction clutches vary in regard to the form of the
friction surfaces
and with respect
to the kinds of material used
to obtain sufficient frictional resistance.
The
frictional
sur-
faces may be either conical or cylindrical, or in the form of one or more flat rings or disks. simple design of conical clutch is
illustrated at C, Fig.
i.
Motion
is
transmitted from part g to
k by the frictional resistance of the conical surfaces. The effectiveness of any friction clutch as a transmitter of power
TRIPPING MECHANISMS
varies with the coefficient or degree of friction
surfaces.
233
between the en-
may both be of metal, gaged but, in many cases, one member has a metal surface and the other is partially or entirely covered with some material such as
frictional surfaces
The
leather or
bination
in -one
is
an asbestos fabric. The cast iron and leather comcommon, and pieces of cork inserted in holes drilled
is
member
another
common method
of increasing fric-
Fig. i.
(A and B) Positive Clutches; (C and D) Friction Clutches
tional resistance.
It is
common practice
to maintain the driving
and driven members of friction clutches in engagement by means of springs which are compressed in order to release the clutch.
The angle of the conical surfaces is usually about 12 or 13 degrees. The conical type of friction clutch is simple in construction but rather bulky or large when compared with other types of equal capacity as transmitters of power. One of the disadvantages of a large clutch, aside from the increase in weight and the space which it occupies, is the natural tendency for a heavy
234
rotating
body
to continue in motion.
is of
For instance, when a

quite large in diameter
heavy
clutch,
which
necessity
made
to obtain the required
amount
of frictional surface, is revolving
rapidly and is disengaged in order to either stop or reduce the speed of the driven member, it may continue to revolve for some
time after disengagement, which might be objectionable on some To avoid trouble from this source, some classes of machinery.
automobile clutches are equipped with a brake which is interconnected with the foot pedal and only comes into action when
the clutch
is
disengaged.
of Friction Clutch.
Expanding Type
The
i is
radially expanding
type of clutch illustrated at

or
D in Fig.
a form that has been
used very generally, the details of the design being varied more less. This clutch consists of an outer casing j in which there
are two expanders or segment-shaped pieces connected by rightand left-hand screws at k and /, respectively. These screws
are attached to levers w, which, in turn, are connected to the sliding sleeve p, by links n, thus forming toggles between the
sleeve
and the screws. The two expanders and the toggle mechanism are caused to revolve with the shaft by a central driving
hub q. The clutch is operated by shifting the sliding sleeve and toggles as indicated by the full and dotted lines; this movement turns the screws having right- and left-hand threads far enough to either expand the inner members tightly against the outer casing or to withdraw them from frictional contact. The expanders referred to are lined with maple grips, in this
particular case, to increase the frictional resistance. The type of friction clutch Ring or Plate Clutches.
in Fig. 2 has
shown two friction rings A and B which are gripped between flange C and the rings D and E when the clutch is in engagement. The rings A and B are not rigidly attached to the outer casing, but are driven around with the casing by keys or feathers. The driving plates or rings D and E are keyed to the hub of The two flange C and this hub, in turn, is keyed to the shaft. driving rings D and E are free to move along the hub, and the outer ring E is connected to the toggle mechanism shown.
When the sliding collar
engages the ends of the toggle levers, out-
TRIPPING MECHANISMS
side driving plate
235
which forces back against flange
moves back against the driven plate the central driving plate D and the driven plate
B A
four frictional surfaces.
with considerable pressure, thus engaging The two driven rings A and B contain
wooden inserts or blocks to increase the frictional resistance. Some clutches of this general type have one ring which is gripped between a stationary and movable ring, thus giving two frictional
also other modifications of this type. Clutches. Multiple-disk By using quite a number of disks or rings instead of one or two, the diameter of the clutch may
surfaces.
There are
Fig. 2.
Plate or Ring Clutch
be reduced without sacrificing the contact area or the amount

of frictional surface.
of the smaller and more on automobiles, has been referred to. compact clutch, especially
The advantage
Clutches of the disk type are now applied to many automobiles. The driving member of the clutch has a number of disks which
alternate with other disks connected to the driven
member.
For
One
set of disks
may
be of soft
steel
and the other
set of phos-
phor-bronze, or some other combination may be employed. instance, some disks are provided with cork inserts.
to
general arrangement of a multiple-disk clutch as applied an automobile is illustrated in Fig. 3. The engine flywheel A transmits motion through keys to the driving disks B. These
The
236
C;
disks alternate with the driven disks which engage keys on drum this drum, in turn, transmits its motion through a connecting
shaft to the gear set enclosed in casing are obtained. While the clutch disks
D where the speed changes

must revolve with
their
respective driving and driven members, they are free to move laterally, so that all the disks may be firmly pressed together in
order to engage the clutch. The pressure required to force all the disks into contact is derived from a spring E. The clutch
is
controlled
by a pedal attached
to lever
which releases the
Fig. 3.
Multiple-disk Clutch applied to Automobile Transmission
spring for engaging the clutch and compresses the spring for Clutches of this kind are releasing the pressure on the disks.
generally enclosed in an oil-tight case, so that the disks can be kept well lubricated. Some disk clutches, however, do not " " clutches have one operate in an oil bath. These dry-plate series or set of disks which is faced with some special friction
material, such as asbestos-wire fabric.
Pneumatically-operated Multiple-disk Clutch.
While most
clutches are engaged and disengaged by mechanical means, commulpressed air or water under pressure may be employed.
TRIPPING MECHANISMS
tiple-disk clutch designed for
237
driving shaft six friction disks C. engages

Fig. 4.
pneumatic operation is shown in has keyed to it casing B, which These disks alternate with an equal number connecting with a hub attached to the driven shaft D. The disks are enclosed in the casing by cover E which is bolted Surroundto casing B and is free to turn on the driven shaft D.
The
ing the driving shaft
is
a sleeve F, which
is
connected at
with a pipe for supplying the compressed air. The annular groove in the center of this sleeve connects with a hole that
extends to the end of the driving shaft, and through which air
Fig. 4.
Pneumatically-operated Multiple-disk Clutch
is
admitted back of the circular piston
which holds the disks
engaged. The sleeve F is with a stuffing-box and gland at each end to prevent provided the escape of air. This sleeve remains stationary and the shaft
firmly together
when
the clutch
is
revolves in
pressure.
it.
The
clutch
may
also
be operated by water under
It is sometimes Multiple-disk Clutch equipped with Brake. necessary to start and stop machines or certain parts of machines smoothly, with great rapidity, and in synchronism with other
moving parts. With light or slow moving apparatus, the problem is relatively simple, but the difficulties multiply as weight and speed are increased. The clutch mechanism shown in Fig.
5
has proved very
efficient for the class of service
mentioned.
238
This design of clutch is used on a machine transmitting a load of 20 horsepower and operating about 3600 times per day, under
unusually trying conditions.
This machine picks up
its
load
from dead
rest,
makes
three revolutions
and comes
of
to rest again
in three-fifths second, or at
an average rate
300 revolutions per
minute, without the slightest shock or effort. When it is considered that the clutch drum is driven at only 340 revolutions per
will
minute, and the engagement is only a fraction of a second, it be seen that the slip is very slight indeed. The absence of shock may be attributed to the perfect cushioning of the pressure
applied to the clutch and to the liberal friction area provided, there being nearly a square inch for each pound of pull at the average radius of the disks.
device consists essentially of two multiple-disk friction clutches of the dry type mounted tandem on a single sleeve
The
which
is fitted
to slide, but not to turn,
on a shaft that
is di-
rectly coupled to the intermittent load.
shown at
built
up
in
and the brake clutch, at the usual form for disk clutches, that
The driving clutch is B. The two clutches are

is,
with two
al-
ternate series of disks, one keyed to the driving member and the other to the driven member; one set is preferably faced with
friction fabric.
One
series of disks in
a set
is
provided with
internal projections to engage longitudinal slots on the sleeve, while the other disks have external projections loosely fitting the internal slots of the driving and braking clutch drums.
The
projecting lugs on the disks are reinforced to provide greater bearing surface on the sides of the slots in which they travel.
As both
clutches are
mounted on the same
sleeve,
and the outer
part of the driving clutch is continuously driven, the sleeve be-
comes the driven member of the driving clutch and the driving member of the brake clutch. The driven member of the brake clutch is solidly bolted to the frame of the machine of which
the clutch constitutes a part, so that, in reality,
is
it is
not driven,
this clutch
but acts as a brake to bring the sleeve to rest when

engaged.
Both the clutch drums are
built in skeleton
form to
facilitate
the egress of material wearing off the friction facings, and to
TRIPPING MECHANISMS
239
permit of the easy application of castor oil to the facings. If this treatment is not neglected, a set of facings may last two years
or more in constant service, but, if the facings are allowed to become entirely dry, they will be less durable. The sleeve is provided with a flange on each end so that, when it is moved endwise, the disks of
of the sleeve flanges
one of the clutches will be clamped between one and the head of one of the clutch drums,
while the pressure on the disks of the other clutch will be reMovement of the sleeve in the opposite direction will leased.
Fig. 5.
Quick-acting Multiple-disk Clutch and Brake Combination
release the disks of the first clutch
and clamp those
of the second.
illustration, the parts are shown in the position of rest, or with the driving clutch disengaged and the brake clutch set.
In the
The controlling mechanism is operated pneumatically and may be made automatic by connecting with other moving parts to actuate the valves. The actual movement of the sleeve which
engages and disengages the clutches
is
derived from two opposed
pneumatic cylinders and the connections shown.
It will be apthat the cylinders must work alternately, that is, when one parent is under pressure the other must be open or free to exhaust. The
distribution of air
is
controlled
by two
valves, together with a
240
With the valves
in the
series of interconnecting pipes.
"
up
"
position,
compressed
air is free to
pass through the pipe to one
of the cylinders
down,
to the top of the other valve for forcing it cutting off the air supply of the cylinder it serves, and
it
and
opening
to exhaust.
small hole near the live-air inlet leads to the annular space below the valve proper, around the stem, and is open continu" " ously, admitting air to hold the valve in the up position when so placed. As the only connections between the controlling
valves and the cylinders are pipes, the control may be somewhat remote and placed in any convenient position. Experiments
have been made to determine the practicability of operating the valves magnetically, and also of moving the clutch sleeve by means of magnets, but both have been found far less efficient
and much slower than air, the slowness of the electrical operation " build up." being due to the time required for the magnets to The drift of the shaft after the operation of the stopping valve
has been found to be very small and practically constant, the shaft stopping within a few degrees of the same position every
the friction disks or their facings is automatically compensated for by additional travel of the pneumatic pistons, so that mechanical adjustments are rarely required.
time.
Any wear on
The magMagnetic Clutch with Automatic Band Brake. netic clutch illustrated in Fig. 6 is equipped with an electrically operated brake which acts automatically when the clutch is reThe
leased, in order to stop the driven part as quickly as possible. which is provided with a driving shaft carries the field
magnetizing coil B. The hub C on the driven shaft has attached to it a flexible spring-steel disk or plate D. This plate
which is prevented from coming directly carries the armature into contact with the magnetizing coil by a ring of frictional material at F. This friction ring, which is made of woven asbestos and brass wire, provides a frictional surface for driving. The ends of the winding of the magnetizing coil are attached to
the rings G which are in contact with a pair of brushes conthe electrical circuit. The automatic brake, which nected with
is
of the
band
type, engages
drum
/,
and the ends
of the
band
TRIPPING MECHANISMS
241
at two points as shown. The plunger of are pivoted to lever a solenoid enclosed in cylinder L is attached to lever K, and at the outer end of this lever there is a weight which serves to apply
the brake
when
the clutch
is
disengaged.
In the operation of this clutch, the current is gradually admitted to the magnetizing coil by means of a rheostat. The
magnetic attraction between this coil and the armature causes the friction ring F to be held firmly against the driving member, so that motion is transmitted between the driving and driven
shafts.
The
solenoid
is
also energized so that lever

released.
is
pulled
upward and the band brake about drum /
This brake
Fig. 6.
Magnetic Clutch equipped with Automatic Band Brake which

operates
when
Clutch releases
is
held in circular form and out of contact with the
drum by a
spring and rod 0. As soon as the circuit is broken, the clutch is released, and the solenoid allows the weighted lever to fall,
thus supplying the brake automatically to the driven part. This feature is of particular advantage when the driven side of
is connected to some part which tends to revolve quite a long time after disengagement. The induction clutch shown in Fig. 7 is Induction Clutch.
the clutch
similar in its operation to
an induction motor.
This particular
form of clutch
copper ring
the
is
is
applied to an electrically-driven planer. The the driven member and it is held by a spider A
,
which contains the bushing b. This spider runs loose on the shaft and its hub carries a pinion through which power
of
hub
242
is
All the other parts shown belong to the driving is keyed to the continuously running motor
transmitted.
member which
shaft.
This driving member, which acts also as a flywheel,
consists of the two-part steel castings

collector rings
E and F, the coil G, and the

has running clearance beis nonmagnetic, it has no
D.
The copper
and
tween castings
ring F, and, since
C
it
tendency to be drawn over towards the poles on either side. This ring has, however, a high conductivity and, because of this fact
and
its position
it is
with relation to the revolving magnetic driving
member,
pulled along
by
this driving
member on
the same
principle as that of the induction motor.
Two
of these clutches
Fig. 7-
Induction Clutch which operates on the Principle of the Induction Motor
are employed, one for the cutting

stroke,
and the other
for the return
and a switch worked by dogs admits a small current to one clutch on the cutting stroke and to the other clutch on the return stroke. The induction clutch transmits power without
contact between
its
driving and driven members.
The clutches used Clutches that Automatically Disengage. on power presses are designed to automatically disengage after making one or more revolutions. The clutch connects the flywheel or driving gear of the press with the driven shaft, whenever As long as this it is tripped, by pressing down a foot- treadle.
treadle
is
held down, the clutch remains in engagement and the
press continues to run; if the treadle is released, the clutch is disengaged when the ram or slide of the press is approximately
TRIPPING MECHANISMS
at the top of its stroke. releases a pin, key, or
243
of the treadle
The downward movement
some other form of locking device which quickly engages the driving member; when the treadle is released, the locking device encounters some form of trip or cam
surface which withdraws
it
and stops the
press.
There are
many
to
be described
designs of clutches of this general type and the examples will illustrate the general principles governing
their operation.
of the type
Automatic Clutches of the Key Type. Fig. 8 shows a clutch a key which is engaged or disengaged with having
the
hub
of
the flywheel.
This flywheel revolves freely
on the shaft
is
until the
dog
pulled
down by
the action
of the foot- treadle; then the
key C is forced downward into engagement with the flywheel
by a strong
When
spring E. the foot-treadle is resteel
Fig. 8. Automatic Clutch of Shiftingdog D is forced up, key Type and when key C comes into contact with the dog, it is pushed back into the shaft, thus allow-
leased, the
and then
ing the flywheel to again run freely. If the treadle is depressed released, the press will make one revolution before
stopping, but if the treadle is held downward, the press will continue to run. This clutch is equipped with a safety device
to prevent the ram or slide of the press from descending unexpectedly while setting dies or making adjustments. This safety device consists of a steel ring F having a keyway or slot in it for receiving the key C. When the press slide is at the top
of its stroke
and dog
D is up,
the key
is
entirely within the shaft
and may be held in this position by turning ring F, thus preventing accidental engagement of the clutch. Ring F has an extension arm that enables it to be turned readily.
shown in Fig. 9 that has a rocking key instead of one that moves radially. This key A extends across the shaft
clutch
is
and,
when
the press
is
not in motion, the key rests in a semi-
244
circular seat
and occupies the position shown in the end view. position, the lever B at one end of the key is in en-
When
in this
gagement with the latch C, which is connected with the footAs soon as latch C is swung out of the way by deprestreadle. sing the treadle, lever B and the key tend to turn as they are
acted upon by the compressed spring E. When the flywheel has turned far enough to bring one of the recesses F opposite the key, the latter, by making a quarter turn in its seat, engages
the recess and locks the flywheel and shaft together.
If the
Fig. 9.
Automatic Clutch
of
Turning-key Type
treadle
is
immediately released, thus allowing latch

of
to swing
back to the vertical position, it will engage lever around and force this lever and the key back out
B when it comes
engagement
with the flywheel. Some designs of Clutches Engaged by a Wedging Action. a wedging action of some automatic clutches are engaged by locking member between cam or eccentric surfaces, instead of
is
employing pins or keys. shown at A, Fig. 10.
cam
surfaces, is
example of the cam type of clutch having a series of eccentric or to the crankshaft, and surrounding this keyed
An
A cam a,
TRIPPING MECHANISMS
245
cam
there
is
are surrounded
a slotted ring c containing rollers 6, which, in turn, by a hardened tool steel ring d. These parts are
inserted in a recess formed in the

slotted ring
c,
hub
of the flywheel.
On
the
a lug / which is in engagement with the As soon lever e when the press is not in operation. pivoted stop as the stop lever is drawn downward by means of the foot pedal,
there
is
the rollers are carried around
by the action
of the flywheel until
they are wedged tightly between the cam surfaces and the outer ring d\ the crankshaft is then driven with the flywheel and continues to revolve until lever e
is
released and,
by
striking stop /,
Fig. 10.
Automatic Clutches
of the
Cam
or
Wedging Type
throws the
rollers
rollers
out of engagement.
The
slotted ring c has
a spring attached to
leased
it (not shown) which turns the ring and toward the high points of the cam when the ring is re-
by the lowering
is
of lever
e.
The
design of clutch illustrated at

solid
is
equipped with an ec-
centric h
member
which with the crankshaft and a wedge-shaped j which serves to lock the flywheel and crankshaft
This wedge j is located between the eccentric and a together. k inserted in a recess in the hub of the flywheel. The ring ring is split and compressed somewhat so as to exert a pressure against
the wall of the recess.
When
the stop 5
is
in
engagement with
246
pin w, the flywheel simply revolves about the expansion ring k. When stop 5 is withdrawn, the ring k expands, and, as it begins to revolve with the flywheel, the wedge j is forced between the
and the inside of the ring; consequently, the flywheel, expansion ring, and the shaft are firmly locked together. When the foot pedal is released and stop s engages pin n the ring contracts and remains stationary while the flywheel continues to
eccentric h
y
revolve.
The
surface at
shaft
is
stopped when
Clutch
serves as a brake, so that the crankthe slide is approximately at the top of
its stroke.
Variable
Control
by
"Pattern
or
Chain."
When
is
clutches are engaged usually controlled either

carrier
or disengaged automatically, their action
by cams
some form
of revolving
having one or more lugs or dogs that engage the clutch-
operating lever.
illustrated at
The
in Fig.
ingenious
method
of controlling clutches
n is applied to a textile machine known as

The variations
"
twister
"
and used for producing fancy yarns.
in the yarn are obtained
delivery
rolls.
The
by controlling the action of two sets of lower rolls r and s of each set support the
and d. Splined to the end of roll r is a shifting clutch member e which revolves the roll when engaged with the clutch teeth on the hub of gear/. A similar clutch and gear combiupper
rolls c
nation
The
located at g for driving the lower set of delivery rolls. upper clutch is connected with lever q pivoted at h, and the
is
lower clutch, with lever j pivoted at k. The action of these clutch levers is governed by a pattern chain / suspended on
a drum m.
chain come
revolves, the rollers of the pattern into engagement with the lower ends of the clutch
this
As
drum
levers, thus shifting the clutches in
and out
of
engagement.
By
changing the position of the rolls or risers of the pattern chain, the pattern of the yarn may be varied and different fancy effects
be obtained.
The chain drum
is
revolved by means of change
gearing for varying the speed according to requirements. The clutch gears are rotated continuously, and the delivery rolls are only stopped when a knob or knot is being formed, both sets of
being rotated while the yarns are being twisted together between the knots.
rolls
TRIPPING MECHANISMS
247
Another application of an endless chain for controlling the engagement and disengagement of a clutch at predetermined This mechanism is applied intervals is illustrated at B, Fig. 1 1
.
to a loom.
The
vertical shaft a is driven through bevel gearing
The upper end
(not shown) at the lower end, from the driving shaft of the loom. of shaft a carries a clutch member b, which is en-
gaged by the shifting clutch member c splined to shaft d. Shaft d, through the bevel and spur gearing shown, is connected with
Fig. ii.
Mechanisms equipped with Endless Chains for Engagement and Disengagement of Clutches
Controlling
/.
drum or cylinder e carrying the clutch controlling chain Above this chain, there is a lever g pivoted at h and connected by link i with another lever j pivoted at k. The pin / connecting the link and lever engages a slot in bellcrank m, the movements of which are controlled by a spring n and a connector o which extends to another part of the machine. The vertical slot in
the chain
lever
has a short horizontal section at the upper end.
The
16 A
action of the
mechanism
is
as follows:
When
the clutch
248
are engaged, the chain drum and chain revolve, and of the links p engages lever g, the lower lever j is raised,
members when one
thus locating pin q in the upper part of the annular groove of the shifting clutch member. As soon as pin / at the end of lever 7*
reaches the upper end of the vertical slot, the bellcrank lever swings over under the action of spring n, thus engaging pin
m
/
with the horizontal part of the slot and locking the lever j in the upper position. As soon as the lever j is raised, a projection
engages pin q and disconnects the clutch, thus stopping the rotation of shaft d. The link p on the pattern chain is no longer
under the
roller of lever g,
but
this lever is still held in the
upper
position, by the engagement of pin / with the horizontal slot The clutch remains disengaged until the in bellcrank lever m.
to the right, thus connector o swings the vertical part of lever allowing the upper clutch member c to reengage the lower part.
The movements
referred to.
of
the connector are controlled
by another
chain which operates on the same general principle as the one

Tripping Mechanisms.
tripping mechanisms are applied to various kinds of machinery to stop the movement either of the entire machine or of some part of it.
What
are
known
as
"
"
Automatic tripping devices generally operate in conjunction with a clutch, or they are used to disengage intermeshing gears. The trip may be adjustable and be set beforehand to act after
a certain part has moved a given distance, or it may only act when a machine begins to operate under abnormal conditions.
The
adjustable form of trip,
if
for
motion,
may
consist simply of a stop
a part having a rectilinear which is placed in such a
position that it will disengage a clutch after the part under the control of the trip has moved the required distance. If a rotary motion is involved, the same principle may be applied with
whatever modification of the mechanism

the trip
is
is
is
designed to act automatically only
when
necessary. When the machine
operating under adverse conditions, the action may be governed by variations of pressure or resistance to motion, or the product on which the machine is working may cause the trip
to act in case the operation
is
not as
it
should be.
The
following
TRIPPING MECHANISMS
examples
bilities of
249
will illustrate
a few of the applications and the possiof different types.
tripping
mechanisms
Trip which Disengages a Clutch. of automatic tripping mechanisms is
One
of the simplest
forms
at A, Fig. 12. machine tools for disengaging the feeding movements of a toolThe tool-slide, which may be slide at a predetermined point. the carriage of an engine lathe, is moved along the bed by a feed-screw a or a splined rod which is rotated through a clutch
b.
illustrated diagrammatically This general type is applied to some classes of
The
shifting
member
of this clutch is operated

d.
by a
lever c
the lower end of which connects with rod
This rod extends
along the bed a distance equivalent to the carriage
movement and
Fig. 12.
Simple Forms of Automatic Tripping Mechanisms
carries
jecting
an adjustable stop collar e, which is engaged by some propart/ on the carriage; when this engagement occurs, the
rod is shifted in a lengthwise direction, thus throwing the clutch out of mesh and stopping the feeding movement. Obviously, the point at which disengagement occurs depends upon the
position of stop collar e which is set in accordance with the length There are other trip mechanisms of of the part to be turned.
the clutch-shifting type which differ from the kind described in regard to the details of the mechanism for shifting the
clutch.
Trip
illustrates a
which Disengages Gearing. Diagram B, Fig. 12, form of automatic trip which serves to disengage
worm
gearing instead of a clutch.
The worm
g revolves
worm-
250
This
wheel h and the table feed-screw.
worm
by
is
carried
by an
dog
n,
arm j pivoted
lever
/
at k
and held
in position
the engagement of
trip
with a notch in lever m.
When the adjustable
and swings it about attached to the work table, strikes lever pivot p, the worm g drops out of engagement with worm-wheel h
and the feeding motion stops.
be varied at
n.
will
The point of this engagement may
Some
of the trip
operate on this
by simply changing the position of the trip dog mechanisms on vertical drilling machines same general principle.
automatic tripping mechanisms, used on machine tools for controlling feedtype
Many
different designs of
especially of the
ing movements, are of the same principle as those described, in that trip dogs are attached either directly to the driven mem-
ber or to some auxiliary mechanism such as a revolving disk geared to the driven part, and these dogs stop the feeding movement either by disengaging a clutch or gearing. If the feeding
movement
obtained through ratchet gearing, the pawl may be prevented from engaging the gear teeth of the ratchet wheel after the latter has turned a predetermined
is is
intermittent and
amount.
in
An example
of this type of tripping device is described
Chapter VI
(see Fig. 3).
Automatic Stops for Drilling Machine. Fig. 13 shows a side elevation and plan of an automatic stop or trip for a verticalspindle drilling machine, which operates
clutch.
by disengaging a friction The feeding movement is transmitted to the spindle from
the friction gear c to the disk d and through worm gearing at k to a pinion meshing with rack / attached to the spindle sleeve. The
position of friction gear c is controlled by hand lever g which, through link e, lever/, shaft a, and collar b moves the friction gear
in or out of
engagement with disk
d.
Lever g
n.
is
held in the
engaged position by the latch or trigger

collar h is set
An
adjustable stop
by means
of graduations to automatically disengage
the feed after a hole has been drilled to whatever depth is reThis collar acts by simply striking the end of latch n, quired.
thus releasing lever g and the friction gear c. Any wear in the friction clutch is compensated for by adjusting set-screw j in
the end of connecting link
e.
TRIPPING MECHANISMS
251
Duplex Automatic Tripping Mechanism.
Another form
of
tripping device for a vertical-spindle drilling machine is illustrated at B, Fig. 13. This stop may be set to disengage the worm e from the worm-wheel on the pinion shaft, or it may be utilized
to disengage miter gear g
is
which drives the worm-shaft.
The
attached to a bracket or arm a clamped to the tripping dog feed rack on the sleeve. The dog b may be swung so as to engage
either levers c or d\ as
shown
in the plan view, it is in the latter
Fig. 13.
Automatic Stop or Tripping Mechanisms of Vertical-spindle

Drilling
Machines
Lever c controls the engagement of worm e with wheel whereas d serves to disengage the bevel gear g. When the /, worm is cut of mesh, the spindle may be moved vertically by the
position.
been
hand-feed lever, for facing or similar operations, after a hole has drilled. Ordinarily, gear g is disengaged, but this does not
leave the spindle free for rapid adjustment. Adjustable Dial Type of Tripping Mechanism.
The auto-
matic tripping mechanism shown in Fig. 14 is applied to Colburn drilling machines and may be adjusted to disengage the down-
252
of the drill at
is
ward feeding motion
any depth up
to 14 inches.
drill
The
feeding movement from shaft A, through
transmitted through the

gearing, to shaft
quill.
spindle
worm
which has a
pinion engaging the rack on the spindle disengagement of the feed is controlled
The automatic
pawl
with lever N.
the feed
The
is
by the engagement of distance that the spindle feeds

is
downward before
adjustable dial 7.
7 inches of
tripped
regulated
by the graduated
$$ inch
The graduations on
this dial indicate
of the spindle travel,
and one complete revolution represents The pawl H is so designed that it spindle travel.
Fig. 14.
Automatic Feed-tripping Mechanism having Graduated Adjusting Dial for Controlling Time of Disengagement
can be set to allow two revolutions of the dial before engaging

lever
N.
of the
The operation
mechanism
is
as follows:
If the feed is
to be tripped automatically in 7 inches or less, pawl is set as indicated by the dotted lines at K\ if it is desired to trip the feed
at a distance greater than 7 inches, pawl is turned to the position shown by the full lines. For example, if it should be
required to automatically trip the feed at a depth of 3 inches, the knurled nut L would first be loosened and the graduated
dial
/ turned until the figure 3 on
it
was opposite the mark on
TRIPPING MECHANISMS
253
pointer /, after which nut L would be tightened. The pawl would then be set in the position shown by the dotted lines, with the result that, when the drill had traveled 3 inches, the sur-
would come into contact with the side N of the trip arm and disengage the feed. On the other hand, if it were required to drill to a depth of 9 inches before the feed was automatically tripped, the dial I would be set with figure 2 opposite the mark on pointer /, and pawl H would be turned to the position shown
face
by the
full lines.
With the pawl

its
in this position, the contact
of surface
with lever
N would not
stud,
throw out the
feed, as the
pawl, being loose on
would simply turn and pass the
Fig. 15.
Safety Tripping Device for Wire-winding Machine

it.
tripping the arm,

lines,
arm without moving

it
After the pawl had passed would then be in the position shown by the dotted
as at
it
is, with the end in contact with a projecting sleeve, thus preventing further rotary movement, so that, when K, again came around to the tripping lever, the feed would be
that
disengaged.
If the
knurled nut
is loose,
the feed cannot be
automatically tripped at any point.
The diagram, Fig. 15, Trip for Wire-winding Machine. shows an automatic tripping device that is applied to a machine used for winding small wire onto spools. In this illustration, A represents the reel which contains the stock of wire, and B is
the spool upon which the wire
is
wound.
This spool
is
driven
254
at a constant speed. If, for some reason, the wire should not uncoil easily from reel A, it might be broken or the mechanism
damaged, assuming that the wire passed directly from the reel to the spool. In order to avoid trouble from any resistance to
uncoiling which
guided by
free to
occur, the wire, after leaving the reel, is idler pulleys, so as to form a loop; at the end of this
may
loop, there is
an
idler pulley
swing about fulcrum E.
C mounted on a lever D which is When the uncoiling and winding

is
proceeding under normal
conditions, the weight of lever is sufficient to prevent the
wire from lifting
it;
any ab-
normal
resistance, however, such as might be caused by a kink on reel A, will result
in swinging lever
upward
trip
into
which,
G, disengaging a clutch, stops the machine.
contact
with
by
Tripping Devices for Textile
Machines.
"
Some very
ingenious
nisms or
Fig. 16.
mechatripping " are stop motions
Tripping Device for a Textile
Machine
applied to different classes of

textile
machines.
The exam-
ples described illustrate the possibilities of the use of comparatively simple devices for automatically controlling the action of
machines under conditions which might, at first, seem to be very complex and difficult. The stop motion shown in Fig. 16 is applied to a machine used for twisting yarn. The yarn passes from the guide wire at A around the rolls B and C, through an eye in wire D and out
through the guide at E.
F, which
is
The
wire
D is attached to another wire
by the
fall
full
normally held by the yarn in the position shown lines. If the yarn or thread should break, the wires
to the position shown by the dotted lines, thus bringing wire into engagement with the lower roll C. Contact with this
TRIPPING MECHANISMS
roll
255
immediately moves the wires to the left until a tongue G enters between the rolls and raises B out of contact with C, which
prevents
from revolving and stops the delivery of yarn. Another stop motion which acts when a thread is broken is shown in Fig. 17. This mechanism is applied to a machine used
it
It is designed to raise the spool for winding thread on spools. out of contact with a flange which drives it by friction, if a thread
breaks, thus arresting the motion of the spool without stopping the spindle on which the spool is mounted. The device is also
arranged so that the wire which drops when a thread breaks

raised automatically to its
is
normal position
for
re-threading.
Fig. 17.
Another Tripping Device or "Stop Motion"
for a Textile
Machine
The thread A
there
is
passes through the eye of a drop wire
and serves
to hold this wire in its
a lever
normal position. Attached to this wire pivoted at D and connected by link E with the
catch F. The lever G is normally held in a horizontal position by catch F. If a thread breaks, however, the dropping of wire B releases catch F and lever G falls to the position shown in the
illustration.
This lever
is
connected by a rod
with a sleeve
/ pivoted
sleeve
at
K.
The downward movement
of lever
G swings the
about its pivot and brings a pin under the flange R of the thus raising it from the supporting disk L, as shown in the spool, illustration; at the same time, the flange of the spool engages a
rubber disk
of
which stops the rotation. Attached to the shaft which is given a partial turn lever G, there is a small finger
256
the catch lever
falls.
when
As the
swings
result of this
movement, the
with the drop wire B back to the normal position ready for re-threading. As soon as the catch lever has been reengaged with the catch F, the spool drops
finger engages lever
it
C and
into contact with its driving flange
and again begins
to
wind the
yarn.
Machines. Certain classes of machines are equipped with some form of electrical control for automatically stopping the machine when it is operating under abnormal conditions. A simple method of controlling a
Electrical Control for Textile
textile
machine
electrically is
found on some drawing frames.
The
Fig. 18.
Simple Form of Electrical Control for Stopping a a Thread Breaks
Loom when
upper and lower sections of the machine frame are insulated from each other, and one pole of a small dynamo is connected to one frame section and the other pole to the other section.
The cotton, which is a non-conductor and is constantly passing between the different pairs of rolls, prevents the completion of the electrical circuit except when the cotton breaks and both
rolls of
a pair come directly into contact with each other.
When
of a
this occurs, the electrical circuit thus
formed, acting in conjunc-
tion with
an electromagnet, swings a lever into the path
shifts
revolving trip or catch which, as its rotation is stopped, either a belt from the tight to the loose pulley or disengages a clutch by means of suitable mechanism.
very simple form of
electrical controlling device is
shown
TRIPPING MECHANISMS
in Fig.
1 8.
257
This device
is
ever a thread breaks.
The
applied to looms and operates whensteel spring wire A is normally held
between two threads in the bent position shown to the left. If one of the warp threads should break, the spring wire is immediately released and flies over to the left into engagement with rod B, as shown to the right, thus closing an electrical
This circuit is a comparatively weak one and stops the machine by means of an electromechanical type of mechanism. The actual force required for stopping the machine is somecircuit.
times considerable, and it is derived by a moving part of the loom, the electrical mechanism simply being used to cause a locking effect that enables the other part of the mechanism to operate.
Mechanism of Drop-hammer. When a board type drop-hammer has fallen and is rebounding, the friction rolls grip the board and elevate the hammer preparatory to the delivery of another blow. The eccentrically mounted gripping
Tripping
of
roll is moved inward against the board for elevating the hammer, when a " friction bar " is released by a tripping mechanism and allowed to fall. Most of these tripping devices operate on the
same general
The
in Fig. 19. principle as the design illustrated at friction bar a is attached at its upper end to a lever that
controls the position of the eccentrically
mounted
friction roll;
when
the bar
front roll
falls, the lifting board is gripped between this and one at the rear that revolves in one position. Be-
is released, the lower end rests upon a seat which prevents it from falling. When the hammer c descends, an incline surface d on it engages bracket b and pushes bar a off
fore the friction bar
of its seat.
The weight
of this bar is sufficient to give the roll
referred to the required gripping pressure on the board /, so that the hammer is lifted to the top of its stroke. As the hammer
engages a lever and raises the friction bar which, in this particular case, is returned to its seat by a spring-operated
rises, it
guide
In order to operate the hammer properly, it is necessary to release the friction bar at exactly the right time, which must
g.
be varied according to the thickness of the hammer dies. The tripping mechanism must be so set that, as the hammer rebounds, its upward movement is continued by the action of
the friction
rolls.
If the release of the friction
bar occurs too
soon, the rolls will grip the board either before the strikes its blow or before it has had time to rebound.
hammer On the
will fall
other hand,
if
the release occurs too late, the

roll will
hammer
back
after
rebounding and the

bracket
b.
or stationary load.
tical position of
The point
of
have to pick up a " dead " release depends upon the ver-
Fig. 19.
Board Drop-hammer Tripping Mechanisms
shown at B, bar k is held in the upper pothis case, the friction Fig. 19. sition by a catch / which engages a slot in the bar and is attached This shaft also carries a lever n to the short vertical shaft m.
trip
mechanism
In
of the swinging latch type is
hammer.
that extends out far enough to engage an inclined surface on the As the hammer descends, lever n, bar m, and catch I
are turned, thus releasing the friction bar k
and allowing the
rolls
TRIPPING MECHANISMS
259
to grip the board for elevating the hammer. The point at which release occurs may be varied by changing the vertical
position of lever n.
Breakable Pins to Prevent Overload.
Some types
of
ma-
chines are so arranged that any unusual resistance to motion will automatically stop either the entire machine or whatever
part
is
affected, in order to prevent

it
damaging the mechanism
or straining
excessively.
simple form of safety device
consists of a pin
which shears
the
off
or breaks in case
overload
becomes excessive. The sprocket A shown in Fig. 20 is provided

with a pin of this kind. This pin C connects the driving hub B with the hub of
the
sprocket.
of
is
sprocket, instead keyed to the shaft,
The
being
loosely
mounted on
is
it,
and the hub

shaft
keyed
to
is
the
instead.
The pin C
ing
of
in diameter
grooved or reduced an amount depend-
upon the maximum amount power to be transmitted. If this pin is subjected to an unFig. 20.
usual strain, it will break, thus leaving the wheel free and protecting the driven parts.
Sprocket driven through Pin which breaks in Case of Excessive Overload
This same method of protection against overload has been

applied in various ways, and, while it is simple, there are certain disadvantages. In order to avoid replacing a broken pin, the machine operator sometimes inserts a pin that is stronger than
it
should be to afford adequate protection against injurious The ideal safety device is one which does not break in strains.
case of overload, but simply disengages
it
and is so arranged that can readily be reengaged. In electrical work, this principle has been applied by substituting circuit-breakers for fuses which
melt when the current becomes excessive.
260
The
prin-
Automatic Clutch Control to Prevent Overload.
ciple governing the operation of an automatic device for disengaging a clutch when the overload becomes excessive is illus-
trated
by the diagram, Fig. 21. This mechanism was applied to a metal-cutting machine, the object being to automatically
becomes abnormally high.
disengage the feed in case the resistance to the rotation of the

tool
The mechanism
if,
is
also arranged
to reverse the feeding
movement
for
any
reason, the excessive
resistance should continue after the feed has been disengaged.
Fig. 2i.
Device for Automatically Stopping Feeding Motion when Resistance to Rotation becomes Excessive
The
spindle to which the cutting tool is attached is represented at A. This spindle is driven through worm-wheel and worm L from the driving shaft B, which receives its motion from a
countershaft through a belt operating on pulley K. The driving shaft B is free to move in a lengthwise direction within certain
limits.
The
clutch
C is
keyed to
this shaft so that it will rotate
and move
axially with the shaft.
side of clutch
are free to revolve
vented from moving of each gear is provided with clutch teeth corresponding to those
and F on each gears the shaft, but are preupon in a lengthwise direction. The inner side
The
TRIPPING MECHANISMS
261
on clutch C, which is used to lock either gear to shaft B. The shaft /, which transmits feeding movement to the cutting tool, is driven either through gears D and E or through gears F, P, and H. When clutch C engages gear D, the cutting tool is fed forward by shaft 7, and a reversal of the feeding movement
is
obtained when clutch
is
shifted into
engagement with
gear F.
When
to the
clutch
engages with gear
Z>,
excessive resistance
motion
of the cutting tool will cause the clutch to
be
shifted to the neutral position, thus stopping the feeding
move-
ment.
shaft
This automatic action
is
obtained as follows:
The
is for-
B
C
is
normally held
Z),
by
clutch
engages gear
spring so that the feeding
in such a position that
movement
tension on this spring is regulated by the nut shown. In case the resistance to the rotation of the cutting tool and
ward.
The
should become excessive, the pressure between the spindle teeth of the worm L and the worm-wheel causes the worm
by somewhat like a nut. This lengthwise movement of worm-wheel L and shaft B, against the tension of spring N, disengages clutch C from gear D and stops the feeding movement. If the resistance to rotation again becomes normal,
acting
to
move
in the direction indicated
the arrow, the worm-wheel
C is automatically returned into engagement with gear On the other hand, if the resistance to rotation increases, clutch C may be drawn over into engagement with gear F,
clutch
D.
thus reversing the feeding movement. Other mechanical devices for automatically disengaging the driven member whenever the 'resistance to motion increases
excessively are shown at A and B in Fig. 22. These devices operate on the same general principle as the one previously described, but differ somewhat in regard to the arrangement. The mech-
anism illustrated by diagram A is designed to allow a wormwheel to make one revolution and then stop; the movement,
however,
pleted,
if
may
be discontinued before the revolution
is
com-
the resistance to rotation becomes excessive.
The
sleeve a is revolved constantly
The
by a pulley on its outer end. inner end of this sleeve has clutch teeth intended to engage
262
corresponding teeth on the end of sleeve b. The latter is attached to the shaft and both are free to move slightly in an endwise direction. The body of sleeve b is threaded to form a
worm which
engages worm-wheel
c.
The
spring e tends to
and into engagement with clutch teeth on sleeve a. The stop at d is utilized in this particular case to disengage the driving clutch after the worm-wheel has made a If stop d is withdrawn, the spring e revolves the revolution. worm-wheel slightly and moves the worm and clutch b to the
shift sleeve b to the left
B
Fig. 22.
(A and B) Devices for Automatically Disengaging the Driven Resistance to Motion Increases Excessively; (C) Friction Gearing designed to Vary Contact Pressure According to Load
Member whenever
and into engagement with the constantly revolving clutch a. The worm-wheel then begins to revolve and continues until the lug g strikes the stop d or until some unusual resistance too great to be overcome by the spring is encountered; then, as the wormleft
wheel remains stationary, it forms a nut for the worm which screws itself out of engagement with clutch a. The strength of
spring e is proportioned with reference to the safe or maximum load to be transmitted. One of the advantages of this type of
mechanism is that the motion is positively transmitted until an excessive load causes the driving clutch to be disengaged. Pro-
TRIPPING MECHANISMS
vision
263
made for the adjustment of spring e so can be varied according to conditions. that the tension Diagram B, Fig. 22, illustrates a modification of the same
may
readily be
in
is free to move slightly general type of mechanism. The shaft an endwise direction and is keyed to the tapering disk h,
which
into a seat of corresponding taper in the hub of gear n, thus forming a friction clutch. Motion is applied to gear n
fits is
and
for
transmitted
by worm j
to a
worm-wheel (not shown),
turns freely in the hub of any desired purpose. Shaft but is attached to worm j. The lever k, which has a gear n, spring fastened to it above the fulcrum or pivot, supplies the
necessary
amount
/
of thrust to
ordinary
conditions.
keep h in engagement with n under This thrust may be regulated by the

of the block to
thumb-screw
the spring
is
which changes the position

excessive, the
which
of the
fastened.
If the resistance to the
motion
worm-wheel becomes
shaft
worm moves
bodily along the
teeth of the wheel, as though it were a nut, and, by moving and disk h to the left, disengages the friction clutch.
The endwise
thrust from lever k might be obtained
by means
of
a weight instead of a spring. A Pressure of Friction Gearing Varied According to Load. novel design of friction gearing, in which the pressure between
the two friction wheels
of
is
automaticallyf regulated
by the amount
power transmitted, is shown at C in Fig. 22. The wheel which is the driver revolves in the direction shown by the
t
The driven pinion lengthwise direction upon

arrow.
is
free to either rotate or slide in
shaft r within certain limits.
This
This nut
shaft has a screw of coarse pitch which passes through nut s. slides in grooves in the friction pinion / so that the
pinion and nut revolve together. A spiral spring p inserted between nut s and the pinion forces the latter against the driver w
with a pressure depending upon the position of the nut. If wheel w is revolving in the direction shown by the arrow and
the driven shaft meets with an unusual degree of resistance to rotation, as soon as shaft r lags behind or stops revolving, nut
s
moves downward, owing

17
to the action of the screw,
and
in-
creases the compression

A
on spring p and
also the pressure be-
264
tween pinion / and wheel w. When the resistance to rotation again becomes normal, the spring moves the nut slightly upward
and reduces the endwise
thrust.
While
this device
may
not
be entirely practicable, it embodies an interesting principle. Automatic Relief Mechanisms for Forging Machines. Forging machines are equipped with a tripping or relief mechanism which prevents excessive straining or breakage of the parts controlling the
motion
of the
movable
die, in case the
stock to be
is
forged
is
not placed in the grooves of the

flat faces.
dies,
but
between the
These relieving mechanisms
differ
caught some-
what
in design, but the object in each case is to temporarily and automatically release the movable die from the action of the
driving mechanism, in case the operating parts are subjected to a The release may be strain or pressure that is abnormally high.
by inserting bolts or "breaker castings" in the mechanism, which will shear off or break if there is an excessive strain; another type of relief mechanism depends for its action upon a
obtained
spring which is proportioned to resist compression for all ordinary strains but to compress sufficiently to release the pressure on the
dies
when
that pressure increases beyond a safe

relief
maximum.
Two
mechanisms will be described. The plan view of a and Toggle Relief Mechanism. Spring forging machine, shown in Fig. 23, illustrates one method of arranging a spring and toggle relief mechanism. When this machine is in operation, the stock is gripped between the stationary The heading slide C, which carries die A and the movable die B.
forms of spring-controlled
a
ram
by
die
or plunger for performing the forging operation, a crank on the crankshaft D. The gripping slide
is
actuated
to
which
B is attached is moved inward for gripping the stock and outward for releasing it, by means of two cams F and G. These
cams transmit motion to slide H, which is connected with slide E through a toggle and link mechanism. Cam F, acting upon roll T, moves the slide E for gripping the stock, whereas camG, in engagement with roll V, withdraws the die after the forging operation is
view to the right shows the relief mechanism in its normal position, and the lower view shows it after being tripped to relieve any abnormal pressure on the dies.
completed.
detail
The upper
TRIPPING MECHANISMS
265
When
the machine
is
operating normally, link /, which con-
nects with link
of the
main gripping
about pivot L and, through link imparts a reciprocating motion to the gripping slide E. If a piece of stock or some other part is caught between the flat die faces, the gripping action con,
toggle, oscillates link
RELIEF
IN
"TRIPPED" POSITION
Fig. 23.
Plan and Detail Views of Forging Machine showing Automatic Relief or Tripping Mechanism
tinues until the
strain exceeds a certain
amount;
then the
backward thrust upon
to swing about pivot lower detailed view) carrying with it the other links of the (see " " and compressing the spring S which is shown by-pass toggle
link
causes
it
in the plan view at the
left.
As the
result of this
change in the
266
position of the by-pass toggle, pressure on the gripping die is Meanwhile the heading tool attached to slide C comreleased.
pletes its full stroke and, upon the return stroke, the by-pass toggle is re-set automatically by spring 5 which expands and,
through rod R, swings the toggle links back to their normal This automatic position shown in the upper detailed view.
re-setting of the toggle
as
is
makes it unnecessary to stop the machine, with safety devices of the breaking-bolt type. necessary
Fig. 24.
Bevel Spring Plunger Type of Relief Mechanism on Bolt and Rivet Header
There
"
is
no movement
"
dies.
of the by-pass toggle, except

is
when a
sticker
to use the shop expression
caught between the
gripping
While
this relief
mechanism safeguards the work-
ing parts from excessive strains, it is capable of transmitting enormous pressures to the gripping dies.
A type of reBeveled Spring-plunger Relief Mechanism. lief mechanism which differs from the design described in the is apforegoing is illustrated in Fig. 24. This relieving device
TRIPPING MECHANISMS
plied to a wedge-grip bolt
267
is
attached to a slide
and rivet header. The movable die which is beveled to correspond with the
tapering end of slide b. Slide b is given a reciprocating movement by the toggle mechanism at e, and, when slide c is pushed in-
ward
solid
for closing the dies, the beveled
end
of slide b forms a
metal backing, which securely locks the movable die during the heading operation. When forming the heads on bolts or rivets, it is necessary to place the stock directly in the impression
and not between their opposing faces, as these dies are intended to come together, so that the stock is firmly held in the impression between them while the rivet or bolt head is formed by the tool attached to slide g. The relief which comes into action in case the stock is caught mechanism, between the dies, consists of a spring plunger a, which has a beveled end and is held outward by the spring shown. The beveled end of this plunger bears against an angular projection on a slide for transmitting motion, through the toggle mechanism, to slide b and the movable die. If this die, however, is prevented from moving inward by a piece of stock that is not in the die impression, but caught between the faces, the increased pressure on plunger a forces it back against the tension of the spring and
in the gripping dies,
off of
the beveled seat, as indicated
by
illustration
B.
which
Automatic Speed-limiting Device. A speed-limiting device is governed by the inertia of a weight and the tension of a spring is shown in Fig. 25. This automatic stop was designed
for application to
steam engines but devices operating on the same
general principle could doubtless be applied to other classes of
machinery. This mechanism is primarily a safety device and is intended to stop the engine and prevent damage such as might
be caused by a bursting flywheel, in case the governor failed to

operate.
The
lever
is
pivoted at
to the engine cross-head
and
normally prevented from swinging about pivot B by the spring C attached near the upper end. The inertia of weight D, which may be adjusted along the lever A tends to swing the lever
is
,
to the right
when
the motion
left.
head moves to the

its stroke,
suddenly reversed and the crossWhen the cross-head is at one end of

is
the upper end of lever
is
quite close to the catch
268
E, which engages latch F. Rod G attached to this latch connects through whatever additional rods or levers may be needed, with the tripping mechanism used in conjunction with a quickclosing valve
der.
which controls the flow

its
of
steam to the engine

is
cylin-
This valve and
operating mechanism
shown
in detail
connected in any convenient way with bellcrank lever H, from which rod / carrying weights at its lower end is suspended. This rod passes through trip-lever K, which normally engages lever L connected with the
at the left of the illustration.
is
Rod G
PUSH BUTTON FOR
REMOTE CONTROL
Fig. 25.
Automatic Speed-limiting Mechanism for Steam Engines
quick-closing valve
M. If, for any reason, the speed of the enbecomes excessive, the lever A and its attached weight gine resists the sudden reversal of motion at the end of its stroke sufficiently to overcome the tension of spring C, and lever A strikes catch E, thus releasing latch F; as rod / drops, the flange on it
strikes trip
and allows the steam valve to be closed by the N. This speed-limiting device may be adjusted the tension of spring C and also by chang'ng the by varying The greater the spring tension and the position of weight D.
weighted lever
nearer the weight
is
have to be to overcome the tension
to the pivot B, the faster the speed will of the spring at the point of
TRIPPING MECHANISMS
reversal.
269
The handle
is for
re-setting the
steam valve and
handle Q, for tripping the valve by hand. If remote control is required, this may be obtained by the use of rods or cables
directly connected to latch
K, or by the use
of a solenoid R, as
by the illustration. This automatic safety stop is recommended as being simple, positive in action, adjustable, inexpensive, and easily applied to almost any engine. The automatic speedCentrifugal Type of Safety Stop. limiting device described in the following was designed for apIn case the speed becomes plication to gas or gasoline engines.
indicated
Fig. 26.
Centrifugal
Type
of Speed-limiting
Device designed for Gas
or Gasoline Engines
owing to the failure of the governor, this tripping mechanism, which is of the centrifugal type, operates by It may be attached either breaking the ignition circuit.
excessive,
The controlling to the secondary shaft or to the main shaft. element is a weight A (Fig. 26) which is attached to a rod connecting with a spring B on the opposite side of the hub. This
weight
is
located within a casing
carried
by a stud
is
screwed
into the end of the shaft.
Pivoted near the casing
a latch
which normally holds the weighted trip-lever F in* the position shown. The ignition switch is located at G and, when the lever
is
held up
by
latch E, the ignition circuit
is
closed.
If
the
270
is
speed of the engine
increased to such an extent that the action
of centrifugal force causes weight
A to fly outward against the tension of spring B, the end of rod H, by striking catch E, releases lever F and allows it to fall, thus breaking the ignition circuit.
In designing automatic Electromagnetic Tripping Devices. or automatic devices for standard machines, the demachinery
the problem of providing a suitable " mechanism for making a machine " fool-proof and reliable. This is particularly true in the case of automatic machines
signer
is
often confronted
by
where one operator looks after several units. While it is not claimed that purely mechanical means cannot accomplish the same results which are secured through the use of electromagnetic tripping devices, the mechanisms would, in some cases,
be so complicated, as compared to electrical devices for the same purpose, that they would be a source of trouble, if not impractical.
Another advantage of the electrical devices lies in the fact that they may be used as a check on the accuracy of preceding operations
and thus avoid
finishing pieces of
work that
this is far
are defective.
The
case
application of electricity to
automatic machines
may
be
regarded as a complication in itself,

if
but
from being the
The
these tripping devices are properly applied. following examples are typical applications of electro-
magnetic tripping devices to automatic machines, and by studying these designs, one may readily understand how similar
mechanisms could be applied to other classes of maIn most of these examples, the tripping devices conchinery. stitute part of attachments for standard machines that were
tripping
automatics," thus dispensing with the necessity of an operator for each machine.
converted into
"
Methods
of
Closing Electromagnetic
Circuit.
metallic
cartridge shell is
shown
in Fig. 27 (view to right) in place
on a
machine which pierces the primer hole, and a shell is illustrated at on which the piercing operation has been performed. After the hole has been pierced, the primer is inserted in the primer cavity J. These operations are performed on a standard Waterbury-Farrel cartridge primer. The shells were formerly placed on dial pins by hand and indexed under the cross-head for piercing
TRIPPING MECHANISMS
271
removed from the dial pins automatically. An improvement was made in the method of operation by applying an automatic feed mechanism to place the shells on the dial pins, but this did not dispense with the necessity of an operator for each machine, as there are three
and
inserting the primer; they were then
possible conditions that
may result in
work:
i.
The
feed
mechanism might
the production of imperfect fail to deliver the shell to
while primers would

2.
the dial pin, or the supply of shells might become exhausted, continue to feed and thus be wasted.
The
\
piercing
punch might break and the machine would
CROSS-H
Fig. 27.
Mechanism for Closing Circuit and Stopping Machine Case Punch fails to Pierce the Shell
in
had not been

less.
then continue to place primers in the cavities of shells which pierced, and such shells would obviously be use3.
The primer
feed might
fail
to
work properly, or the
supply of primers might become exhausted. The application of a suitable electromagnetic tripping mechthis machine takes care of all of these contingencies. consider the possibility of the feed mechanism failing to First, deliver a shell to the dial pin. Referring to diagram A, Fig. 28, it will be seen that the shells are carried on- pins on the dial and
anism to
are indexed under the
punch
a.
If
a shell
is
in its place
on the
dial pin, it contracts the spring b
when
the
ram
descends, but
272
fail
should the mechanism

g passes
to deliver
shell to the pin, the sleeve
the dial pin and pushes the upper contact d mechanism down upon the lower contact e. This closes the electrical circuit and stops the cross-head on the upThe contacts are fastened to the frame of the machine stroke. and the method by which the tripping mechanism operates will
of the tripping
down over
be described in detail
later.
is
The way
in
which the piercing operation

is
safeguarded by the
27.
electromagnetic tripping mechanism
illustrated in Fig.
The punch-holder
located at the index point immediately after the completion of the piercing operation. If a shell is
is
Fig. 28.
(A) Circuit-closing Device which acts when Shell has not been placed on Dial Pin; (B) Trip which prevents passing a Shell without a Primer
pierced, the pin
shown at the
left of
the illustration
descends through the hole in the shell, as but if the piercing operation
;
does not take place, the punch is held in the position indicated in the right-hand illustration, thus contracting the light spring
and throwing the lever against the contact E. This closes the electrical circuit and causes the machine to be stopped so that
shells cannot have primers inserted in them when the primer hole has not been properly pierced. The failure of the machine to feed a primer into the primer
cavity of the shell is guarded against by the mechanism illustrated at B in Fig. 28. The design of this tripping mechanism
TRIPPING MECHANISMS
is
273
practically the
same as that used
to control the piercing oper-
ation,
and
will
Fig. 29 illustrates the
be readily understood without further description. mechanism used on a press for assembling
the brass cups A and B, the cup A being inserted in the cup B. These cups are held in hoppers on each side of the machine from which they are taken by notched dials. The cups A are dropped
FIBER
CONTACT CLOSERS
Fig. 29.
Circuit-closing Device Shells
used on Machine for Assembling
A and B
into holes in the machine dial which passes over the dial carrying the cups B. The operation of the machine will not be described;
it
should be mentioned, however, that a plunger descends in such a manner that the cup A is forced into place in cup B. Several
conditions
may occur that will result in loss or damage.

fail
The feed
mechanism could
to deliver either one or both cups to their or it could deliver them to the dials in an inrespective dials,
274
verted position. Either the absence or inversion of either or both cups is detected by an electromagnetic tripping device
which automatically stops the machine until the error has been corrected. The punch C is located at an index point preceding
the assembling punch, and is carried by a bracket which is fastened to the cross-head. In the case of an inverted cup, the
punch
is
down through
held on the bottom of the cup and pulls the rod G the action of the pinion, which engages with rack
Fig. 30.
Electromagnetic Controller applied to Power Press for Operating Clutch
teeth cut in the rods
C and G.
to pull
the contact closer
The descent of the rod G causes down the upper electrical contact
to be stopped.
until it closes the circuit
and causes the machine
view at the right shows the punch and die when the feed mechanism has failed to deliver a cup to the dial plate. In this case, the upper electrical contact is pulled down by the and causes the machine to be stopped as precontact closer
The
detail
viously described.
Electromagnetic Controller.
netic tripping device used
Fig. 30 shows the electromagon the machines referred to in the
TRIPPING MECHANISMS
275
In this illustration, the foregoing, for stopping the machine. device is shown in place on a power press equipped with tripping
a Horton clutch.
will
The arrangement of the tripping mechanism be more readily understood by referring to Fig. 31, which
This tripping mechato
is
shows an end and cross-sectional view.
nism
self-contained
and can be applied
any style
of press or
type of machine.
piece C,
The bracket A carries the magnet Bj poleand levers D and E. The brass pole G is wound with
No. 14 double-covered wire and the connecting wires extend through the back of the spool. The brass pins H help to support
and provide adjustment for different widths of air gap, which should be as small as possible. In order to start the press, the lever E is pulled down. This engages the flywheel clutch (see Fig. 30) and allows the spring / to pull the lever D over the hardened knife-edge, thus setting the pole-piece C at the proper working distance from the magnet.
the pole-piece
The
the
of
inside dimensions of the device are given in Fig. 31.
When
used on
magnet
is
energized by two dry

fifteen
cells, it
gives an
initial pull
from twelve to
pounds.
As the dry
cells are
open-circuit except for the fractional part of a second during which the contacts meet they have a long life.
The initial pull provided by an electromagnet of this kind varies with the material used for the magnet and the pole-piece.
Where
cast iron
is
used, the pull of the
magnet can be calculated
by the formula:
;V7
in
= 3oooZ VP-T- D,
of coils of wire
;
which
N
7
= number
turns)
on the spool (ampere-
= = P Z = D=
pull of 15 pounds,
1. 1
current in amperes;
pull in pounds;
air
gap in inches;
in Fig. 31
diameter of plunger in inches.
The electromagnet shown

25 inch.
was designed
and Then:
it will
be seen that
Z=
to give a = inch and
NI =
5 3000 x y g
Vi5
-T-
1.125
3423. 19 ampere-turns.
276
of wire
Assuming that there are 375 turns
on a
spool, the
amount
or, say,
of current required will
10 amperes.
Two
be found to be 34 3- 9 375 good dry cells connected in

^
g
series
will
average 15 amperes during their useful life and give a considerably higher current when new. As 10 amperes is sufficient to enable the electromagnet to do the work required of it, it will
be seen that an ample factor of safety

designing devices of this kind,
as possible.
is
provided.
When
moving wires and moving contacts
should be avoided and the mechanism should be
made
as simple
The dry
cells
should be used on open
circuit, the
NO. 14
DOUBLE COVERED WIRE
Fig. 31.
End and
Cross-sectional Views of Electromagnetic Controller
contacts carefully insulated from the machine, and covers provided for contacts and terminals.
Mechanism. The delicate mechanism of an adding machine is safeguarded and intricate from injury resulting from careless or rough operation, by the ingenious mechanism shown in Fig. 32. This controlling device is so arranged that the force or power exerted upon a hand lever
Controlling Device for a Delicate
by the operator
not transmitted directly to the mechanism, but the operation of the machine is subject to spring action at a The opercertain known rate and with a known driving force.
is
ator
is
only allowed to supply the power for stretching certain
TRIPPING MECHANISMS
277
springs and releasing their action, the arrangement being such that he cannot apply his strength directly to the mechanism. The inner end of the operating lever is shown at F. The " " shows the lever after it has upper view marked position No. i
POSITION No.2
POSITION No. 3
Fig. 32.
Spring Controlling Device which Safeguards the Delicate
Mechanism
of
an Adding Machine
been pulled forward for operating the machine. This lever revolves freely on its shaft and the operating parts are driven
by the member E.
releases
As
lever
is
pulled forward, catch
pawl Z, thus allowing
member
to fly forward as
2 78
springs A contract and transmit motion to E through levers D and links B. This free movement of part E operates the forward stroke of the machine, and the rate of action is controlled by an oil by-pass governor (not shown). The movement of E is stopped by abutment F in The forward moveposition No. 2. ment of operating lever F, which is now free of the mechanism,
is
No.
continued by the operator until the lever arrives at position At this point, the end of pawl Z strikes pin H, throw3.
ing the pawl back into engagement with the projecting lug on part E. As the lever moves from position No. 2 to position No.
3,
the springs
links
are extended, and acting through levers and they return lever F to the starting position, the lever
Fig. 33.
Simple Arrangement for Holding in the
Downward
Position
only
One Key
at a
Time
in a
Row
of
Adding Machine Keys
carrying with it part E and the mechanism of the machine. This reverse movement is also under the control of the oil governor.
Near the end
of the return
permit pawl
to pass,
movement, latch and the various parts return
rises to
to position
No.
ready for another stroke.
provision of two springs A is simply for balancing the on the mechanism. The double action of these springs, which makes it possible for them to operate the mechanism on both the forward and backward strokes, is due to the fact that they are connected to movable members at each end. In one
The
strain
case, the connection is to levers
and
in the other to operating
lever F.
The
contraction of these springs between positions
TRIPPING MECHANISMS
No.
tion
i
279
and No. 2 operates the forward motion, and their contracfrom position No. 3 to No. i operates the backward motion.
machine is said to be has been depressed, it of another key in the same vertical column will release the first key. With this arrangement, if an attempt were made to de-
Control for Flexible Keyboard. " "
The keyboard of an adding flexible when so arranged that, if a key will stay down, but the pressing down
press two keys successively, the releasing of one by the downward action of the other would eliminate a possible error. As a further advantage, if the wrong key were pressed, the depression
Fig. 34.
Full-stroke
Mechanism to Prevent starting the Operating Lever and not completing Its Movement
of the right one restores the
The
wrong one to its normal position. simple, but ingenious, device for controlling the action of the keys on one of the commercial adding machines is illustrated
If
in Fig. 33.
key No.
the stem on which
pivoted strip
depressed, the lower hooked end of springs past the end of a long that extends throughout the entire length of
i is
it is
mounted
the vertical row of keys. The result is that the key is held in the downward position by this hooked end until some other key is depressed. For instance, if the operator presses down on key
No.
2, this will
swing the strip
about
its
pivot to allow the
ISA
280
of the
stem to pass, and this movement of strip A releases the hooked end of key No. i which immediately is forced upward to its normal position by a spring B. In the same manner, any key which may be pressed down will throw back the strip and release any other key which may at the time be
hooked end
depressed. Full-stroke
Mechanisms.
Mechanisms
are
sometimes so
arranged that hand-operated movements are, to some extent, controlled mechanically, to prevent motion in the wrong direcThe full-stroke ratchet mechanism tion or incomplete action.
shown
in Fig. 34 is used
on the
Ellis
the operator from starting handle
adding typewriter to prevent A and not completing the
required movement. For instance, if handle A is in the upper position, as shown at the left, any downward movement must be
continued until the handle has

it
made a complete
stroke before
can be reversed
if
for returning it to the original or

is
upper position.
as
Similarly,
the lever
at the lower end of
its stroke,
shown
by the view to the right, any upward movement must be completed before the direction of motion can be reversed. This
positive control of the action of handle simple manner. As the handle is moved
is
obtained in a very
or upward,
downward
pawl
is
carried with
it.
This pawl
is
pivoted to part
and
normally held in a vertical position by a spring.
When
left,
handle
A
its
is
at the upper end of its stroke, as

is
shown
at the
and a
started, pawl upper end swings to the right; as the downward movement of handle A continues, pawl B engages successive notches in sector C, and locks into one of these notches if an attempt is made
to return handle
downward movement
engages sector
C and
before the
downward
all
stroke
is
completed.
When
handle
has been pushed
the
way down
(as
shown
to
the right), pawl B drops into the enlarged notch E of sector C where there is enough room to permit the pawl to swing around to
the vertical position; consequently, as soon as handle A is moved upward, the top of pawl B swings to the left and again engages successive notches in sector C, thus preventing any return of
handle
A to the lower position until the pawl has cleared the upper end of the sector and again swings to a vertical position.
CHAPTER X
AUTOMATIC FEEDING MECHANISMS
MACHINES which operate on
large
numbers
of duplicate parts
which are separate or in the form of individual pieces are often equipped with a mechanism for automatically transferring the
parts from a magazine or other retaining device, to the tools that perform the necessary operations. The magazine used in
conjunction with mechanisms of this kind is arranged for holding enough parts to supply the machine for a certain period, and it
equipped with a mechanical device for removing the parts separately from the magazine and placing them in the correct position wherever the operations are to be performed. The magazine may be in the form of a hopper, or the supply of parts
is
to be operated
upon by the machine may be held
in
some other
way.
from the hopper or main source of supply to the operating tools may be through a chute or passageway leading directly to the tools, or it may be necessary to convey the parts to the tools by an auxiliary transferring mechanism which acts in unison with the magazine feeding attachtransfer of the parts
The
ment.
These automatic feeding mechanisms are usually designed especially for handling a certain product, although some
types are capable of application to a limited range of work. The feeding mechanisms described in the following include designs
which differ considerably, and illustrate, in a general way, the possibilities of automatic devices of this kind. Attachments having Inclined Chutes. One of the important
applications of magazine feeding attachments
is
in connection
with the automatic screw machine.
Most
of the parts
made
on these mach'nes are produced directly from bars of stock, but secondary operations on separate pieces are sometimes necessary, and then an automatic or semi-automatic attachment
may
be employed to transfer the parts successively to the ma281
282
chine chuck where the tools can operate upon them. Many of these attachments have magazines which are in the form of an
inclined chute that holds the parts in the correct position and from which they are removed, one at a time, by a transferring
device.
An
shown
in Fig.
example of this type of magazine attachment is i. This attachment was designed for feeding
the handles of safety razors on a Brown & Sharpe automatic screw machine. The preliminary screw machine operations involve turning, forming, knurling, drilling, tapping, and cutting off the handle, thus producing a piece of the form shown at
These partly finished handles are then placed in the chute or slide of the feeding attachment, from which they are transferred to the chuck, so that a hole can be drilled
in the illustration.
clear through the handle as indicated at B,
and one end
of the
hole be slightly enlarged. The upper and lower plates C of the chute have grooves milled in them to correspond to the en-
larged parts of the handle. As each successive handle reaches the lower end of the chute and drops into the small pocket shown,
a spring plunger L attached to the turret advances and pushes the work out into the chuck of the machine.
As the ends
bottom
is
of the handles
have shoulders, the pocket at the
shoulder.
automatically enlarged to permit the passage of this The work-carrier consists principally of two blocks
D and E and a finger F.

block
F.
Block
D is held in the
cross-slide
and
E is attached to the top of block D. The forward end of block E is cut out to fit the work, which is held in place by finger
is fastened to lever G, pivoted on block D, and held in position by a pawl normally engaged by plunger / and pin /. When a piece of work drops into the pocket in
This finger
block
and the front
cross-slide
has advanced far enough to
bring the work in line with the hole in the chuck, the enlarged part of the plunger L trips the finger F after the work has been
partly inserted in the chuck. This action is caused by the contact of plunger L with a beveled edge on pawl which disenthe V-shaped end of the pawl from a groove in lever G gages
and, at the same time, pushes back spring plunger 7, thus allowserves as ing finger F to drop away from block E. The pawl
283
a locater for the work and, when disconnected from lever G, it swings down and the work is pushed into the chuck by plunger
L which is held in
the advancing turret.

it
After a piece has been
inserted in the chuck, the cross-slide, as
moves outward, brings
SHOWING ELONGATED SLOT
SECTION THROUGH X-Y
Fig. i.
Automatic Screw Machine Magazine Attachment
which, through the combined action of against casting lever G, pawl #, and spring plunger /, closes the work-carrier. The piece in the chuck is forced in against a spring plunger
trip
held by feed finger N. This spring plunger ejects the work when the machining operation has been finished and the chuck
is
opened.
284
Another magazine Feeding Attachment for Pinion Staffs. attachment having an inclined chute is shown in Fig. 2. feeding
This attachment was designed for handling pinion
staffs of the
~"R?tSSFr%'-
Fig. 2.
Magazine Attachment
for Pinion Staffs
form
illustrated
corner of the illustration.
which
is
by the dotted lines in the upper right-hand The chute C is supported by a bracket attached to a boss provided on Brown & Sharpe
285
automatic screw machines for holding special attachments. The bracket A is attached to B and carries the mechanism for feeding
moved by
the pinion staffs successively to the place where they can be rethe transferring arm. The two main parts of the
fit
chute are grooved to

as follows:
is
the pinion staffs, so that the latter are
held in the correct position.
The operation of this attachment is The chute is filled with pinion staffs and the lower one
link G,
held back temporarily by trip F. This trip is connected to which carries a pin that engages a slot cut in lever
(see detailed view).
Lever
has fastened to
trip-lever plate / the inclination of
which
may
its upper side a be varied. When
the transferring arm swings upward, it is stopped in the correct position by set-screw /, which engages stop K, the arm itself
bearing against plate / and forcing
it
back, together with lever
H. This action, through connecting link G, operates trip F and allows one piece to drop into the pocket formed at the end
The transferring arm carrying a split bushing D advances and pushing back the nest L passes over the end then of a pinion staff and grips it. The transferring arm then reof this trip.
cedes and swings

is
down
to the
chuck in which the pinion
staff
placed. returns trip-lever plate / and lever Trip-lever F also swings back in order to catch another piece, the pinion staff in the trip being deposited in the nest L ready
When
the transferring
arm
descends, the spring to their former position.
for transferring to the split
bushing
the next time the trans-
ferring
arm
ascends.
for
3,
bushings shown at A, Fig.
Narrow Bushings. The narrow and drawn in a die to the shape shown; they are then turned, faced, and threaded (as indicated at B) in a Brown & Sharpe automatic screw maMagazine Attachment
are blanked out
chine.
Two
attachment shown in
separate operations are required, but the magazine this illustration is used for both. The
bushings are placed in the inclined slide or chute, and the lower one is retained temporarily by a finger i which is held upward by
t
spring
k,
the exact position of the finger depending
upon the
adjustments of set-screw./ which engages a projecting end. The transferring arm, which removes the work from the lower end of
286
the chute
and conveys it to the chuck, has a swinging or circular movement, as indicated by the dotted line. The work is gripped as the holder (shown in detail at C) advances, and then, as the transfer arm starts to swing downward toward the chuck, the
finger
i is
the chute.
depressed, thus allowing the bushing to slide out of The work-holder has a taper shank b which fits into
c.
the main body
On
this
body
is
pin
in
flat
is
driven.
c
The pin h in
this ring
held a ring d through which a d fits into an elongated hole
body
and enters spring plunger e. A slot in body c receives a spring g, which is provided to grip the work securely. This
spring also compensates for slight variations of diameter.
PATH OF TRANSFERRING BUSHING TO RK-CHUCK
Fig. 3.
Magazine Attachment
for
Handling Parts shown
at
A and B
The degree
of inclination for chutes of
magazine attachments
varies from 20 to 60 degrees and depends upon the size and shape of the work. The chute should incline at a greater angle for small work than for large work. The chutes of attachments used
for handling flat pieces, such, for example, as might be cut out in a blanking die, are usually held in a vertical chute instead of
one that
is
inclined.
The automatic feeding atRevolving Magazine Attachment. tachment shown in Fig. 4 differs from the types previously described in that the blanks to be operated on are held in a revolving carrier or magazine B. This attachment is used for feeding the
287
blanks from which the barrels for watch springs are made. The shape of these barrels, which are about f inch in diameter,
is
indicated at
M.
The magazine wheel B
is
recessed, as
shown
by the side view, to form a pocket for the blanks, and it is provided with slots around the edge in which the blanks fit, as indicated
at N.
The blanks
slot
are inserted in the attachment or magazine
wheel through
C which
connects with pocket D.
The wheel
by a belt which transmits motion from a pulley on the front camshaft to a pulley located on shaft S. As these two
is
rotated
pulleys are of the
same diameter, the magazine wheel rotates at
Fig. 4.
Magazine Attachment
of Revolving
Type
the same speed as the front camshaft. The blanks, as they are carried around by the wheel, drop into slide and from there
into a pocket in a bushing held
by a
carrier.
The block /
of
this carrier (see enlarged detail view) is counterbored to receive
a bushing which contains plunger P, and the bushing is cut out to receive the spring fingers E. These fingers are attached
to plugs
is
which are held in
drilled holes in block 7.

is
The bush-
ing by spring G, which bears against a pin driven into the bushing. As a blank rolls down the slide H, it is deposited in bushing 0. The cross-slide
free to slide in
block 7 and
held back
upon which the attachment
is
mounted then advances
to locate
288
the blank in line with the hole in the chuck.
When
in this
position, the turret advances and a stop on it pushes plunger and depositing forward, thus forcing the blank from the fingers The spring Q which returns plunger P is made it in the chuck.
much
ing 0.
heavier than the spring
used for holding back the bushis
The
will
object of this
arrangement
to insure that the
bushing
be pushed out close to the face of the chuck before
the plunger forces the blank out of the spring fingers. The autoHopper Feeding Mechanism for Screw Blanks.
matic feeding mechanism to be described
is
used on a thread
rolling machine of the type having straight dies between which the blanks are rolled to form the threads. The faces of the dies
are in a vertical position and one die is given a reciprocating motion in a direction at right angles to the axis of the screw blank.
The automatic
such a
feeding
mechanism shown
in Fig. 5
is
arranged to
transfer the screw blanks
from the hopper

is
to the dies at
in
way when caught between
that each successive blank

the dies.
The
in a vertical position which is at the hopper
equipped with a plate or center-board C which passes through a slot in the bottom of the hopper and is given a reciprocating motion by a gear-driven cam. This centertop of the machine, is
board has a vertical

detail sectional view)
slot
which
extending along the upper edge (see is a little wider than the diameter of
the screw blank bodies.
As the center-board moves up through
the mass of screw blanks, one or more of these blanks are liable If a to drop into the slot and hang suspended by their heads.
blank does not happen to be caught for any one stroke of the center-board, the mass of blanks is disturbed and it is likely that
one or more blanks
will fall into the slot
on the next successive
stroke of the center-board.
As some blanks
are picked
up while
in a crosswise or other
incorrect position, an auxiliary device is employed to dislodge such blanks. This device consists of three revolving wheels at
which have teeth

is
like ratchet wheels.
these wheels
shown by the
detailed view.
The arrangement of The center wheel,
which is the smallest, revolves above the heads of the blanks which are moving down the slot of the center-board in the proper

position, as indicated at E.
289
The two outer wheels, which are revolve close to the outer edges of larger than the central one, the center-board. If a blank is not in the correct position, it will
be caught by these wheels and be thrown back into the hopper, but all blanks that hang in the slot pass between the outer wheels and beneath the central one without being disturbed.
After the blanks leave the center-board, they pass down the inclined chute G, which is provided with a guide F that holds them
Fig. 5.
Hopper-feeding Mechanism for Screw Blanks
in position.
As each
successive blank reaches the lower end of
the chute, it swings around to a vertical position and is caught between the dies which roll screw threads on the ends.
bilities of
if
The possiFeeding Shells with Closed Ends Foremost. mechanical motion and control are almost boundless, there is no limit to the number of parts that may be incorand usually greater
liability of
porated in a mechanism, but as complication means higher manufacturing cost,
derangement, the
2QO
skillful
designer tries to accomplish the desired results by the simplest means possible; it is this simplifying process that often
requires a high degree of mechanical ingenuity. The feed-chute shown in Fig. 6 illustrates how a very simple device may some-
times be employed to accomplish what might appear at
first
to
an attachment used in conjunction with an mechanism for drawing shells in a punchautomatic feeding These shells are fed from a hopper, and it is essential to press. have them enter the die with the closed ends down. If a shell descends from the hopper with the open end foremost, it is autobe
difficult.
This
is
Fig. 6.
Attachment of an Automatic Feeding Mechanism Shells which enter Open End Foremost
for
Turning
matically turned around to the left illustrates the
by the simple device shown. The view movements of a shell which comes down
end foremost.
In this
in the proper position or with the closed

case, the
bottom
of the shell simply strikes pin
and, after
rebounding, drops
down through tube
C.
If the
shell is foremost, as illustrated at the right, it
open end of a catches on pin

If
and
is
turned around as the illustration indicates.
a shell
enters the die with the closed end upward, the drawing
will
punch
attach-
probably be broken. Feeding Bullets with Pointed Ends Foremost.
An
ment
for feeding lead bullets or slugs to press tools with the pointed ends foremost, regardless of the position in which the

bullets are received
291
from the magazine or hopper, is illustrated is applied to a press having a 4înch stroke. The bullets enter the tube A which connects with " " a hopper located above the press. An moves agitator tube
in Fig.
7.
This attachment
up and down through the mass

bullets
of bullets in the hopper and the which enter the agitator tube drop into tube A. As each bullet reaches the lower end of this tube, it is transferred by
slide
attached to the cross-head) to a (operated by cam position under the rod E. The rod-holder L is also carried by the cross-head. Whenever a bullet enters tube A with the
rounded or pointed end downward,

a hole in dial
it is
simply pushed through
F and into feed-pipe G leading to the dial feed-plate
This feed-plate, in turn, conveys the bullets to the of the press. press tools where such operations as swaging or sizing are performed.
shown by the detailed sectional views at the lower part of the illustration. Whenever a bullet enters the dial with the pointed end foremost, the plungers H are pushed back against the tension of springs / and the bullet drops into the tube beneath. If the blunt or flat end is foremost, the plungers are not forced back, and as rod E is prevented from descending further, it simply moves upward against the tension of spring K as the cross-head continues its downward motion. A mechanism is provided for turning dial F one-half revolution,
of dial
is
The arrangement
so that every bullet that into the feed-tube G.
not pushed through the dial will be turned around with the pointed end foremost before it drops
is
from a rack
M attached to bracket L, and a pinion N with which

The
location of the dial
is
This rotary motion of the dial
is
derived
the rack meshes.
governed by an
index plate and a plunger T which enters one of the notches in the index plate; the latter is attached to dial F. A clutch P (see also detailed sectional view) is fastened to sleeve R. Fiber
friction
washers
are used to prevent breakage in case anything
unusual should happen.
the cross-head descends, the rack revolves the clutch shown by the arrow. When within one-quarter inch of the lower end of the stroke (this position is shown in the
in the direction
When
illustration), the
rack
strikes lever
and disengages the
in-
dex plunger T. The rack descends far enough to give it time on the return stroke to move dial F sufficiently to prevent the
returning index plunger from reentering the hole
it
just occupied.
FLAT END FOREMOST

'.CLUTCH
Fig. 7.
all
Attachment
for
Bullets to a Dial
Hopper Feeding Mechanism which delivers Feed Plate with Pointed Ends Foremost
the return stroke, the lost motion of the rack in its bracket provides time for the withdrawal of rod E before dial F is revolved.
On
This
lost
motion can be adjusted so that the highest

is
point of the
upward stroke
reached just as dial
has turned

1 80
293
degrees, thus bringing the other index slot in line with plunger T. If the rack should move too high, the friction washers 5 will allow for this excess movement by slipping. This half
revolution of dial F turns a bullet that is not pushed through it end for end, so that it drops down in the pipe G with the pointed end foremost. The slide C is returned for receiving another bullet from tube A by the action of spring which holds the
cam-plate D. Shells Successively and in Any Position. A feeding Feeding to feed shells or cartridge cases one at a mechanism designed time and in any position is shown in Fig. 8. Owing to the weight
slide roller firmly against the
of the heads of cartridge cases, they may readily be arranged upon a table heads downward, and the particular mechanism to be described is arranged for changing the shells from a vertical to a
horizontal position before dropping them into a trough by means of which they are conveyed to the operating tools. The table
upon which the shells are placed is slightly inclined so that the shells readily slide towards a horizontal disk B which is rotated constantly by a belt and pulley. As the disk revolves, the
way C
towards the funnel-shaped mouth of a guidewhere there is a wheel D having teeth of irregular form. This wheel is revolved in the same direction as disk B so that it continually pushes back some of the shells and prevents jamming.
shells are carried
The
the
which move too near the center of disk B to enter of the guide-way are carried around until they meet the edge of an inclined fence E, which is just above the disk near the center, but is arched near the periphery so that shells can pass under it. This fence causes the shells to move out towards
shells
mouth
the circumference of disk B, so that they way as they again come around.
may
enter the guide-
Just beyond the wheel teeth of regular form that
D
fit
there
is
a feed-wheel
which has
This
between the cartridge
cases.
wheel
by the arrow, so as to feed the shells forward at a definite rate along the guide-way C.
is
rotated in the direction shown
This guide-way, excepting at the mouth, is only slightly wider than the shell diameter, so that all the shells in it form a continuous and orderly row.
The
guide- way
may
be curved gradu-
ally in
any
direction, so that the shells
which enter
it
with their
axes vertical
along.
may
be turned to any desired position as they pass

in this case,
As previously mentioned, the guide-way,
changes from a vertical to a horizontal position. At the end of the guide-way there is a pair of stops that act alternately to allow one shell to issue at a time from the guide-way. The first
stop consists of a pair of fingers
G which rise up
through the
floor
LLLJ
UU

shells
295
drop into the trough
M as they are
discharged from the
guide-way.
Feeding Shells Successively and Gaging the Diameters.
The mechanism
described in the following is part of a cartridgemaking machine, and its function is to feed cartridge cases or shells from a tube, one at a time, and provide means of detecting
shells shells are
having heads that are over the standard diameter. The placed heads downward onto a fixed table from which
9.
they are pushed by hand onto a revolving disk A, Fig.
This
feed disk operates on the same general principle as the one illustrated in Fig. 8. As each successive shell passes from the guide-way of the revolving disk, it is placed directly over a
push-rod B.
which
is
This push-rod is pivoted to the end of a lever oscillated by a cam, thus causing the push-rod to move
.
C and through one of the slots D Each time the pushformed in the periphery of the feed disk A rod B moves upward, it pushes a shell into the end of tube E.
vertically through a guide
This tube has two gravity fingers

lifts
F and,
as the shell rises, its rim
these fingers and separates them far enough to allow the rim to pass; the fingers then drop back behind the rim and prevent the shell from falling when the push-rod recedes. When
this
by
it
push-rod makes the next successive stroke, the shell lifted pushes the first shell up into tube E which is bent over to
form an arch and terminates at E\. When the vertical section of tube
is filled
and the
shells
passed over the top of the arch, they fall open end first down into the vertical section E\. Just below the end of tube EI, there is a
device for releasing the shells one at a time. three-armed lever G, which is pivoted at
oscillating or rocking
roller in
This consists of a
and
is
contact with
lever
movement by vertical rod / cam K, against which the rod is

oscillates, it
given an having a
held
by
a spring.
fingers
shells.
As L and
withdraws, alternately, two which project into the passageway for the These fingers are withdrawn against the tension of suit-
able springs
and the upper one catches the cartridge shells by the whereas the other one extends beneath the open end. When rim, the upper finger is withdrawn, a shell drops against the lower
19 A
296
finger and,
when
the latter
is
withdrawn,
finger
this shell is released and,
in and prevents the next successive shell from dropping out until it is released by the backward motion of finger L. As each successive shell drops,
at the
same time, the upper
moves
and then falls over one of the vertical passes through a gage 0, which are equally spaced around the periphery of the pins machine table. This table is revolved intermittently in order
it
Fig. 9.
Mechanism
for
Feeding Shells Successively and Gaging the Diameters
to locate the shells beneath a series of tools carried
by a
tool-
holder having a vertical reciprocating motion. Attached to the rod /, there is a bar P the
which are steadied by a bar

bar
Q mounted
in suitable guides
movements of The
having a beveled end which engages a beveled surface as shown; consequently, as rod / and bar P are lifted by cam K, plunger R is pushed back far enough When rod J to clear the rim of the descending cartridge.
carries a spring plunger
297
moves inward and bears downward descends, however, plunger on the head of the cartridge beneath it, thus pushing it through the gage and onto one of the series of pins 0. If the rim of a
cartridge should be so large that it would not readily pass through the gage, the resistance overcomes the tension of the spring that
/ into contact with the cam, and the cartridge remains in the gage until the next stroke of the machine. As the table moves around, the attendant will notice that there is a pin withholds
out a shell upon

cessive shell,
and, therefore, he will remove the next sucbecause, ordinarily, the shells are not so large as
it
to resist being forced through the gage
by a second
stroke of the
push-down bar P.
an exceptionally large head will not pass the gage, the machine must be stopped and the shell through removed by hand.
If
INDEX
PAGE
Acceleration, meaning of
4
175 276 280
Accumulator mechanism of adding machine Adding machine, device for protecting delicate mechanism
full-stroke
mechanism
of operation
key controlling device Adding mechanism, general principle
279
172
Aeroplane motor, of revolving cylinder type with revolving cylinders and eccentric track
Air springs or cushions of printing press bed American or continuous system of rope transmission Anchor or recoil escapement for clockwork
65 66 79 29
142
Angular velocity Automatic clutches for power presses Automatic control of reversing mechanism Automatic relief mechanisms of forging machines Automatic screw machine feeding attachments Automatic speed-limiting devices for engines Automatic variation in points of reversal Automobile differential gearing
Backgearing, methods of arranging
Bands,
flexible,
5
242 112
264 281 267

115 220
44
use
of, for
transmitting motion
30
189
Barrel or cylinder Bellcrank lever

Belts, reversing,
cam
for shifting
8
open and crossed
107 28
mechanism
use of, for transmitting power use of open and crossed, for reversing motion Bevel gearing
100
26 24 266
Bevel type of friction gearing Bolt and rivet header relief mechanism Brake and magnetic clutch combination
Brake, multiple disk combined with clutch Breakable pins to prevent over-load
240
237
259
53
133
23
Brown Brown
& &
Sharpe multiple-disk speed-changing mechanism Sharpe quick-return motion for screw machine
Brush wheel of friction gearing Builder motion of a textile machine
115
Camera, claw mechanism
of
moving picture
143
189
Cam
motion, automatic variation of automatic variation of cam rise and drop

299
192
300
CAM
cams
for
CONNECTING-ROD
PAGE
191
Cam
motion, mechanism for varying dwell of follower
sectional
varying
194
196
22
Cams, arranged to vary rotary motion definition of, and general application
double two-revolution shifting type face or positive motion
for
200
185
motion perpendicular to plane
of
cam
189 184 189

187
general classification of
having rectilinear motion
having yoke type of follower

in
group engaged successively
197 198
185
obtaining resultant motion of several

plate
plate,
arranged for positive motion
185
sectional, for varying
motion
194
187 188
special, for returning follower
wiper and involute

Center-line of motion
8
57
Centrifugal and inertia governors
Centrifugal type of safety stop for gas engines
269
29 202
143
Chain and sprocket form of transmission Chinese windlass, differential motion of Claw mechanism of moving picture camera
Clutch control, variable by pattern chain Clutches, automatic disengaging of, to prevent over-load automatic power press, engaged by wedging action
246 260
244
243
231
automatic power press, of the key type controlling motion by

friction
friction, multiple-disk
friction, ring or plate
232
type type
. .
235
234
241
'.
induction type
magnetic, with automatic band clutch

multiple-disk equipped with automatic brake of reversing mechanisms, methods of operating
240
237 101
pneumatically -operated multiple disk that automatically disengage

trip for automatically disengaging
236
242
249
231
types of positive or toothed type which expands radially Clutch method of controlling speeds
234
46
3
Compound Compound
Concave
gearing
train of epicyclic gearing friction disks and inclined intermediate wheel
37
55
Cone-pulley and epicyclic gear combination Cone-pulley and spur gear combination
44
43
41
*
Cone-pulley drives, arrangement of Connecting-rod and crank combination
60
CONSTRAINED
Constrained motion
DRILLING
301
PAGE
2
I
Continuous motion Continuous or American system of rope transmission

Controller, electromagnetic, for tripping
29
mechanism
274
Crank Crank Crank Crank
and connecting-rod and epicyclic gear combination and oscillating link and slotted cross-head
reversing press bed motion for doubling stroke
of, for
,
60
86
124
63
75
Crank, application
Crank mechanism Crank motion, for automatically varying the stroke Crankpin and cross-head, relative motions of Crankshaft of stationary type and revolving cylinders Crosby straight-line motion for indicator
Cross-feeding movement, automatic reduction of Cross-feed mechanism of grinding machine
,
68
83 61 65 16
144
139 61
Cross-head, motion relative to crankpin
Crown gear and
shifting pinion for changing speeds
49
3 6
Curvilinear translation
Cycle of motions
Cylinder or barrel
cam
clockwork
189
Dead-beat or Graham escapement

Dead-center positions of crank
for
142
60
45
213, 215
Differential back-gear for varying speeds

Differential controlling
Differential
Differential
mechanism of steering gear feeding mechanism for revolving spindle gear and cam combination
210
223
38, 206
Differential gearing,
compound
train for varying speeds
of automobiles
220
222
speed regulation through Differential governors for water turbines

Differential hoisting
Differential
217 227
....
mechanism mechanism of gear-cutting machine
Differential motions
225 202
between screw and nut from gearing

Differential or floating levers substitute for
208
204
211
216 229
Differential speed indicator

Differential speed-reducing
mechanism
38, 205
Disengaging mechanisms or clutches Dividing mechanism, automatic
230
167
Diving key type of speed-changing mechanism Double back-gears for lathes
48
44
72
Drawing press toggle mechanism Drilling machine tripping mechanisms
250
302
Drive, positive
DRIVE
FRICTION
PAGE
6
93
257
Drop-hammer Drop-hammer
Eccentric
lifting
mechanism tripping mechanism
62
63 274
Eccentricity of an eccentric
Electromagnetic controller for tripping mechanism
Electromagnetic tripping devices Electro-mechanical tripping device for textile machine

Elliptical gear
270
256 130 128
70
267
29
and eccentric pinion
for quick-return
motion
Elliptical gearing, arranged for quick-return
motion
use of, for modifying crank motion Engine speed-limiting device
English or multiple system of rope transmission

Epicyclic gear and crank combination Epicyclic gear and friction disk combination
86
56
Epicyclic gearing, action
of,
under different conditions
204
combined with cone-pulley
44
38, 206
N
.
compound
use
use
of, for of,
or reverted train
for reversing
motion
108
85
obtaining a rapid reciprocating on water turbine governors
movement
217
Epicyclic gear trains
33
,
Escapements for controlling action of clockwork Evan's friction cones for changing speeds
141
52
185
Face
or positive motion
cam
Feeding and reversing movements combined Feeding bullets automatically with pointed ends foremost
in
290
281
Feeding mechanism, automatic, for handling separate pieces automatic, for screw blanks
with automatic accelerating device Feeding shells automatically with closed ends foremost
288 208 289

295
and gaging the diameters Feeding shells successively and in any position Flexible bands, use of, for transmitting motion
Feeding
shells successively
293
30
211
Floating or differential levers substitute for
216
115
Fly frame, automatically varying point of reversal
mechanism
for varying transverse
movement
of roving
Fly frame differential gearing

Force-closed mechanism
83 222
6
Forging machine,
mechanisms Frictional ratchet mechanisms

relief
264
137
Frictional speed-changing devices
49
232
235
Friction clutches
multiple-disk type ring or plate type
234
FRICTION
v
GRINDING
303
PAGE
Friction clutches, type which expands radially Friction disk and epicyclic gear combination Friction gearing, double-cone
234
56
belt type
and intermediate ring or
52
51
double-cone and intermediate wheel type factors affecting power transmitted by
25
having concave disks and inclined intermediate wheel

multiple-disk type for changing speeds pressure varied according to load transmission by
55
53
263
23
use of, for reversing motion Full-stroke mechanism of adding machine
100
280
Gear and
cone-pulley combinations
43
Gear and rack combination Gear-cone and tumbler-gear mechanism Gear-cones and sliding key for changing speeds Gear-cutting machine, differential mechanism of Geared speed-changing mechanisms
Gearing,
67
48 48
225
46
32 220 128
204
compound
automobiles
differential, of
elliptical,
epicyclic, action of,
arranged for quick-return motion under different conditions
epicyclic, for obtaining rapid reciprocating

epicyclic, for reversing
motion
motion
85 108
148, 150
for high-speed intermittent

friction, factors affecting
friction, pressure
motion power transmitted by
25
varied according to load
263
intermittent
mangle or the Napier motion

ratchet type toothed, various classes of
train of, for transmitting motion transmission by friction
146 81 134 26
31, 33
transmission by toothed
23 26
worm,
249
33
147
Gears, calculating speeds for uniformly intermittent motion

for variable intermittent
idler, effect
motion on transmission of motion

for intermittent
148
32 32
154
57
trains of spur
Geneva wheel
motion
Governors, centrifugal and inertia for water turbines, differential
217 142
14
139, 144
Graham dead-beat escapement for clockwork Grasshopper motion Grinding machine, automatic cross-feed mechanisms
reversing
mechanism
102
304
Harmonic motion,
Header,
relief
HARMONIC
definition of
for bolt
LEVERS
PAGE
mechanism
and
rivet
64 266
3
27
27
Helical motion
Helical or spiral gearing
Herringbone gear
Hoist, action of differential chain
203 227
11
Hoisting mechanism, differential type
Hooke's coupling or universal joint Hopper feeding mechanism for screw blanks
288 45 36 32
142
171
Humpage's gear
for
varying speeds
Idler gear, effect of, in epicyclic gear train its effect on transmission of motion
Impulse face of an escapement pallet Indexing and locking mechanism, combined Indexing mechanism, automatic
167
machine Indexing movement, Geneva wheel for Indicator, pantograph reducing mechanism straight-line motions for
of screw slotting
169
for
154 20
14
,
Induction clutch
241
and centrifugal governors Intermittent bevel gears, locking device for Intermittent gearing
Inertia
57
159
146
147
designed for uniform rest periods for shafts at right angles

rapid acting for moving picture projector with swinging sector
157
150
153
i
Intermittent motion
automatic disengaging device automatic variation of

constant, from variable motion
163
164
161
148, 150
gearing for high speed gears for variable
148
Geneva wheel
of
for
154
moving picture projector Intermittent movements

automatic reduction of
Intermittent rotary motion, two-speed Inverse type of cam
150
134
144
159 188
188
Involute and wiper cams

Irregular motions
184
Key
controlling device of adding machine
279 20 8
8
Lazy tongs or pantograph mechanism Levers, application of bellcrank..
LEVERS
Levers, complete stroke before return floating or differential
MOTION
is
305
;
movement
possible
PAGE 280
211
length of arms relative to fulcrum

position of, relative to center-lines of motion Lifting mechanism of drop-hammer
n
10
Lifting toe or wiper cam Link connection between rotating parts Link mechanisms
93 188
ir
Load-and-fire type of reversing mechanism Load, pressure on friction gearing varied according to
101
263
259
171
prevention of excessive, on driven mechanism
Locking and indexing mechanism, combined Locking device for intermittent bevel gearing Loom, two-speed intermittent rotary motion for
159
159
I
Machine, factors affecting construction Magazine feeding attachments for separate pieces Magnetic clutch equipped with automatic band brake
Mangle gearing or the Napier motion Mechanism, factors affecting construction
trains of
281
240
81
I
30
75
Miehle press bed motion

Milling machine feed
mechanism with accelerating device
208
27
Miter gearing Motion, center-line of

classes of
8
i
constrained
2
I
continuous
curvilinear translation
differential
3 202
for press bed, elliptical gear drive general methods of transmitting
69
7
helical
3
i,
intermittent
irregular
134
184
lever reducing, for taking indicator cards
9
83 61
75
mechanism
for automatically
varying reciprocating
of crankpin relative to cross-head of Miehle flat bed or cylinder presses
bed reversed by reciprocating pinions of press bed, the Napier

of press
79 81
2
plane
quick-return
reciprocating rectilinear translation
spherical
straight-line straight-line for
124
i
4
12
steam engine indicators
14
306
MOTION
PRESS
PAGE
17
13
Motion, straight-line, Peaucellier

straight-line, Scott Russell
sun-and-planet
Motor Motor
drives, reversing
38 122
65
143
of revolving cylinder type
Moving picture camera claw mechanism Moving picture projector, intermittent motion of Mowing machine, wabble gear for driving cutter-bar
Multiple-disk clutches
150
85
235
237
equipped with automatic brake

pneumatically-operated design
Multiple-disk type of speed-changing mechanism Multiple or English system of rope transmission
236
53
29
Napier motion
One-cycle type
for printing press
beds
81
of drive for cold header
Over-load, prevention of, by automatically disengaging clutch prevention of, by breakable pins
72 260
259
142
19
Pallet of an escapement
Pantograph mechanisms
Pattern chain for operating clutches
246
136 134
91
17
Pawl, multiple type for ratchet gearing

of ratchet gearing
motion from revolving Peaucellier straight-line motion Pendulum, effect of arc of swing on time Period of a cycle of motions
rectilinear
141
6
259
Pins, use of breakable to prevent over-load
Piston with traversing and rotating Pitch circle of spur gearing
movements
95 26
2
Plane motion
Planer feed or crank disks Planer reversing mechanism
161
107
Planetary gearing, action
of,
under different conditions
204
38, 206
compound
use
of,
train for varying speeds
for reversing
motion on water turbine governors
108
217
Planetary gear trains

Plate
33
185
cam
arranged for positive motion Pneumatically-operated multiple-disk clutch

Positive driving Positive motion or face
185
236
cam
motion
for
185
Power moving picture Power press clutches

Press bed motion, for
projector, intermittent
150
242
flat
bed or cylinder presses
75
PRESS
RESULTANT
307
PAGE
Press bed motion, having elliptical gear drive reversed by reciprocating pinions
69
79 81
th
Napier
Projector, intermittent motion of
moving picture
150
31
Pulley speeds, method of calculating Pump piston with combined rectilinear and rotary movements Punch press clutches
95
242
Quick-return motions crank and oscillating link derived from elliptical gearing
eccentric pinion
124
1
24 128 130
and
elliptical
gear type
independent crank-operated type

modification of Whitworth
133 127 126
Whitworth
Rack and
Rack and worm
gear combination drive
67
74
75
Rack, double, and shifting gear for reversing motion Racks and pinion arranged for doubling stroke
Radian, definition of
69
5
Rapid starting and stopping clutch and brake mechanism

Ratchet gearing
arranged for reversal of motion automatic disengagement of
double action type
237
134
136 139 137
137
methods
of varying
motion derived from
operated by multiple pawl Ratchet mechanism, for releasing sprockets

of frictional type
136
138
137
which controls a reversing mechanism which reverses automatically

Ratio, velocity
117
no
5
i
Reciprocating motion
mechanism
rapid,
for automatically varying
83 85
from epicyclic gearing
Reciprocating slide, withdrawing from working position Recoil or anchor escapement for clockwork
90
142
and rotary motions, conversion of Rectilinear and rotary movements combined Rectilinear motion, from epicyclic gear and crank combination
Rectilinear
60
95 86
91
,
from revolving pawls
mechanism
for
varying
92
3
Rectilinear translation
Reducing motion, lever, for taking indicator cards pantograph type Relief mechanisms for forging machines Resultant motion of cams, mechanism for obtaining
9
19
264
e
198
308
Return cam
RETURN
for follower
SPEED-CHANGING
PAGE
187
Reversal of motion, by reciprocating pinions with ratchet gearing
79
117, 136
Reversing and feeding movements combined

Reversing clutches, methods of operating
Reversing mechanisms
in
101
97
115 112
arranged to vary point of reversal automatically automatic control of
automatic ratchet type

load-and-fire type of epicyclic or planetary gear type of grinding machine
of two-speed bevel gear type
special
no
101
108
102
99
of reversal
methods of controlling point
105
117
which reverses after given number of revolutions Reversing motion, by bevel gear and clutch combination by double rack and shifting gear
98
,
75
by means of friction disks by means of open and crossed by means of spur gears Reversing motor drives
100
belts
100
97
122
Reversing screw, applications of Reverted or compound train of epicyclic gearing Revolution counter for controlling point of reversal
74
37
,
117
Rotary and rectilinear motions, conversion of Rotary and rectilinear movements combined Rotary motion varied by means of cam
Safety device, breakable-pin type to prevent over-load
for limiting speed of engines for protecting
60
95
,
196
259
267
a delicate mechanism
which disengages clutch to prevent over-load Safety relief mechanism of forging machines Scotch yoke or slotted cross-head and crank Scott Russell straight-line motion v
Screw, applications of reversing
276 260
264
63
,
13
74
208, 213 22
having differential motion relative to nut

transmitting motion Sellers worm and rack drive
use
of, for
,
74
1
Shaper, driving mechanism for crank Skew bevel gearing

Sliding key type of speed-changing Slotted cross-head and crank
24
27
mechanism
48
63
Speed-changing and controlling mechanisms
39 46
Speed-changing mechanisms, all-geared

f Fictional
49
53 41
multiple-disk type
types ot mechanical
SPEED
TEXTILE
309
PAGE
Speed indicator, sensitive differential type Speed-limiting device, automatic

Speed- reducing mechanism, compound epicyclic gear type
differential or epicyclic
229 267 38, 206

205
38, 56
for high velocity ratios
Speed regulation through differential gearing Speeds, calculating for Humpage's gear
changing by gear cone and tumbler gear mecham'sm changing by gear cones and sliding key
control of,
222 45
48 48
46 33 33
31
by means
of clutches
of epicyclic gear trains,
method
of determining
of gears, calculating
methods of calculating Speed variation, by means of epicyclic gearing

of pulleys, in machines, reasons for
206
39
Spherical motion Spiral or helical gearing
4
27
Spring and toggle relief mechanism of forging machine Sprocket and chain transmission Sprocket releasing mechanism of ratchet type Spur gear and cone-pulley combinations
264
29
138
Spur gearing
43 26
32
Spur gears, trains of Starting and stopping rapidly, clutch mechanism Stationary crank and revolving cylinders
Steering gear, differential controlling
for.
237 65
213, 215
mechanism
Stop mechanism, automatic, for engines

electromagnetic
267
270
Stop motions
for textile
machines
254
237
Stopping and starting rapidly, clutch mechanism for

Stops or tripping mechanisms
Straight-line motions
for indicators
248
12
14
J?
^Peaucellier
Scott Russell
Stress, prevention of excessive,
13
Stroke, crank
on driven mechanism mechanism for doubling. doubling by means of double rack and pinion mechanism for adjusting from zero to maximum mechanism for automatically varying length of
of a crank of a lever,
259 68
69
92
83 6
mechanism which
insures complete
280
Sun-and-planet motion
3&
Textile machinery, builder motion

differential speed-regulating gearing of
"5
222
mechanism
for varying reciprocating
motion
83
2 S4
motions tripping devices or stop
310
THOMSON
WORM-WHEEL
PAGE
15
Thomson straight-line motion for indicator .............. ......... ....... Throw of an eccentric ................................................
Toggle and spring relief mechanism of forging machine ................... Toggle joint ......................................................... Toggle mechanism, of drawing press ................................... single- and double-stroke ...........................................
Trains of mechanisms ................................................
63 264 18
72 71
30
32
7
Trains of spur gears ............................................. ..... Transmitting motion, general methods of ...............................
Triple gearing for engine lathes ........................................
44
248
Tripping mechanisms ................................................. of drilling machines ....... .........................................

of
250
257
drop-hammer ............................................ .......
of electromagnetic type .............................................
270 254
253
machines ................................................. of wire winding machine ............................................ Tripping or relieving mechanisms of forging machines ....................
of textile
264
Tumbler gear mechanism
changing speed ........ .................... Two-cycle type of drive for cold header .................................
for
48
71
Universal joint or Hooke's coupling .............................. .....

Velocity, angular ................................................... definition of ......................................................
Velocity ratio ....................................................... of Humpage's gear ........................................... .....
,
n
5
4
5
45
gear for driving reciprocating part rapidly ...........
..........
85
217
13
Water turbine governors, differential ........... ........................ Watt straight-line or parallel motion ................................... Watt sun-and-planet motion .......................................... Whitworth motion, modification of ..................................... Whitworth quick-return motion .......................................
Windlass, differential motion of Chinese ................................ Wiper and involute cams .............................................
38
127 126
202
188
253
Wire winding machine tripping mechanism .............................. Worm and rack drive ................................................
Worm
gearing ............................ . ................. ......... arranged as substitute for floating lever ...............................
'
74 28 216
249
83
...................................
Worm-wheel, duplex,
for varying a transverse
movement .................
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY

This book
is
DUE on the last date stamped below.

first day overdue 50 cents on fourth day overdue One dollar on seventh day overdue.
Fine schedule: 25 cents on
NOV 14
1947
JUN 2 7 1956
LIBRARY USE
OK
REC'D LD
JUNl
1 1953
FEB23"65-7PM
31AG'53HK
AUG171953U
3Nov54Vl| OV 4 1954 LO
6 Oec'55CT
LD
21-100m-12,'46(A2012s 6)4120
416067
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY

Mechanismsmechan 00 Jonerich

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Mechanismsmechan 00 Jonerich

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

AND

THE MACHINERY PUBLISHING

THE INDUSTRIAL PRESS NEW YORK

COMPOSITION AND ELECTROTYPING BY

GILSON COMPANY, BOSTON,

on mechanisms and mechanical movements

the classes of mechanisms, however, which

derived from some

Frequently, the same result

be obtained by forms of mechanisms which

of this treatise is not only to

than a study of abstract theories, which only give an inadequate

conception of their application in the design of mechanisms of various types.

more thoroughly than they do the use

that various modifications of the same general type

be compared. The columns of

ventors engaged in originating and planning

MOTIONS AND GENERAL METHODS OF TRANSMISSION IN MACHINES

SPEED-CHANGING AND CONTROLLING MECHANISMS

CONVERSION OF ROTARY AND RECTILINEAR MOTIONS

Cylinders which Revolve about Cylinders which Revolve within an Ec-

Rack and Gear Combination

Reciprocating Motion from Epicyclic Gear-

with Friction Disks

Operation of Reversing Clutches

Automatic Indexing Adding Mechanism

for Controlling Mechanisms Substitute for Floating Lever

Application of Floating Lever Principle Steam Steering Gears

CLUTCHES AND TRIPPING MECHANISMS

Pressure of Frictional Gearing varied according to

Automatic Relief Mechanisms

AUTOMATIC FEEDING MECHANISM?

MECHANISMS AND MECHANICAL MOVEMENTS

MOTIONS AND GENERAL METHODS OF TRANSMISSION IN MACHINES

of various classes are designed to

derived from some

natural source and

transmitted through the

for obtaining the right kind of

mechanisms which have been applied

machine part does

not vary in direction,

and when there are in motion may be free body

confined to a restricted path.

planets in their flight through space are examples of free motion,

the path or orbit of a planet being determined

by the The moving parts

move in a straight path by a guide or guides.

lar positions of the connecting-rod, the cross-head is subjected

another simple example of constrained motion.

constrained part from the desired path

which oppose the Plane Motion.

parts have plane motion.

in parallel straight lines.

be either rotation, translation, or a combination of these

a plane motion of rotation; the motion

vilinear translation, as various points in the

body have a motion combined with a translation

parallel to the axis, this is

an example of spherical motion.

the rate at which

a moving part changes